JP2019013426A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by increasing a degree of attention to the game and interest in the game.SOLUTION: A game machine 10 includes a distribution device 35 for distributing game balls introduced from an introduction hole 350 to a first passage 351 or a second passage 352 by a distribution part 38. Game balls in the second passage 351 can enter a first start pocket 314. Game balls in the second passage 352 can enter a second start pocket 315 having a different function from that of the first start pocket 314. Triggered by detection of passage of game balls through the second passage 352 by a through gate 318, an electric support member 36 operates from a standby position for limiting entry of game balls into a second start pocket 315 through the second passage 352 to an operation position for permitting entry of game balls through the second passage 352 into the second start pocket 315.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 69

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  In general, a pachinko gaming machine called a digipachi has a first start opening for performing a lottery lottery when a game ball is won. Some gaming machines include a second starting port that allows a winning of a game ball by operating an electric accessory in order to be able to receive a lot of jackpot lotteries with a small number of game balls. In addition, some gaming machines include a sorting device that alternately distributes game balls to a first start port and a second start port (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-231902 A

  By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to improve the player's willingness to play by increasing the degree of attention to the game and the interest of the game.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's willingness to play by increasing attention to the game and interest of the game.

The gaming machine according to the present invention is
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). A distribution device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by:
A first winning opening (314) through which game balls distributed to the first passage (351) can enter;
A second winning port (315) having a function different from that of the first winning port (314), wherein the game balls distributed to the second passage (352) can enter.
Detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), the second winning port (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is provided. ) From a first position where entry into the second passage (352) is restricted to move to a second position where entry of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) into the second winning opening (315) is allowed. An accessory member (36T to 36X);
It is characterized by providing.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can raise the attention degree to a game and the interest of a game, and can improve a player's jackpot game willingness can be provided.

The perspective view which shows an example of a structure of the game machine which concerns on the 1st Embodiment of this invention. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The expanded view which shows an example of a structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 5A is a cross-sectional view illustrating an example of a distribution device of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1, and FIG. 5B is a cross-sectional view illustrating an example of a distribution member of the distribution device. Sectional drawing for demonstrating the effect | action of a distribution member. Sectional drawing for demonstrating the effect | action of a distribution apparatus. Sectional drawing for demonstrating the effect | action of a distribution apparatus. 5A and 5B are cross-sectional views for explaining the operation of the sorting device, and FIG. 5C is a perspective view of the electric support member. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the memory area of the main controller of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the table used with a main controller. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interruption process performed with a main controller. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the start winning process performed by the main timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the through gate process performed by the main timer interruption process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main process performed with a main controller. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the normal symbol control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the normal electric accessory control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special figure game control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the data setting process performed by the special figure game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special figure change start process performed by the special figure game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transfer process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transfer process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub timer interruption process performed with an audio lamp control apparatus. The figure which shows an example of the table used with the main control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transfer process performed by the main process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used with the main control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special figure change start process performed by the special figure game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transfer process performed by the main process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used with the main control apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 4th Embodiment of this invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transfer process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transfer process performed by the main process of FIG. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the game machine which concerns on the 5th Embodiment of this invention. The figure which shows the principal part of the special variable prize-winning apparatus of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used with the main control apparatus of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the opening / closing execution mode control process performed by the jackpot game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the opening / closing execution mode control process performed by the jackpot game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transfer process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transfer process performed by the main process of FIG. The front view which shows an example of the game board of the game machine which concerns on the 6th Embodiment of this invention. Sectional drawing which shows the principal part of the wing accessory apparatus of the gaming machine shown in FIG. Sectional drawing which shows the principal part of the wing accessory apparatus of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used with the main control apparatus of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main process performed with a main controller. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the wing accessory control process performed by the main process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special figure change start process performed by the special figure game control process of FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a game state transition process executed in the main process of FIG. Sectional drawing which shows an example of the distribution apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 7th Embodiment of this invention. Sectional drawing which shows an example of the distribution apparatus of the game machine which concerns on the 8th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 53 (A) is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a gaming machine sorting apparatus according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 53 (B) is a gaming machine sorting according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. Sectional drawing which shows an example of an apparatus. FIG. 54A is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a gaming machine sorting apparatus according to the eleventh embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 54B is a gaming machine sorting according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. Sectional drawing which shows an example of an apparatus. FIG. 55A is a plan view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the thirteenth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 55B is a plan view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the fourteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 55 (C) is a plan view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the fifteenth embodiment of the present invention. 56A is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 56B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A1-A1 of FIG. 56A. FIG. 57 (A) is a cross-sectional view showing the main part of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 57 (B) is the electric motor of the gaming machine according to the eighteenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 57C is a cross-sectional view showing the main parts of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention. 58A is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a twentieth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 58B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A2-A2 of FIG. 58A. FIG. 59A is a perspective view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the twenty-first embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 59B is the perspective view of the electric support member of the gaming machine according to the twenty-second embodiment of the present invention. Figure. FIG. 60 (A) is a perspective view showing a main part of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a twenty-third embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 60 (B) is an electric motor of the gaming machine according to the twenty-fourth embodiment of the present invention. The perspective view which shows the principal part of a support member. FIG. 61 (A) is a perspective view showing a main part of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a twenty-fifth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 61 (B) is electric driving of the gaming machine according to a twenty-sixth embodiment of the present invention. The perspective view which shows the principal part of a support member. 62A is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a twenty-seventh embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 62B is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a twenty-eighth embodiment of the present invention. Figure. FIG. 63A is a perspective view of an electric support member of a gaming machine according to a twenty-ninth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 63B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A3-A3 of FIG. FIG. 64 (A) is a view showing a main part of a gaming board including a gaming machine distribution device and an electric support member according to a thirtieth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 64 (B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. 65A is a view when the electric support member is in a standby state in FIG. 64A, and FIG. 65B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A3-A3 of FIG. 65A. 66A is a view when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 64A, and FIG. 66B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A4-A4 of FIG. 66A. The figure which shows the principal part of the game board containing the distribution apparatus of the game machine which concerns on 31st Embodiment of this invention, and an electric tulip accessory apparatus. FIG. 68 (A) is a view showing a main part of a game board including a game machine sorting apparatus and an electric support member according to a thirty-second embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 68 (B) is a thirty-third embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows the principal part of the game board containing the distribution apparatus and electric support member of the game machine which concern on a form. FIG. 69 (A) is a view showing a main part of a gaming board including a gaming machine distribution device and an electric support member in a standby state according to a thirty-fourth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. The perspective view of the principal part of A). FIG. 70 (A) is a diagram showing the main part when the electric support member is in the operating position in FIG. 69 (A), and FIG. 70 (B) is a perspective view showing the main part of FIG. 70 (A). FIG. 71 (A) is a view showing a main part of a game board including a game machine distribution device and an electric support member according to a 35th embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 71 (B) is a view of FIG. 71 (A). The figure which shows a part. The figure which shows the principal part of the game board containing the distribution apparatus and electric support member of a game machine which concern on 36th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 73 (A) is a view showing a main part of a gaming board including a gaming machine sorting apparatus and an electric support member at a standby position according to a thirty-seventh embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. The perspective view of the principal part of A). Fig. 74 (A) is a diagram showing a case where the electric support member is in the operating position in Fig. 73 (B), and Fig. 74 (B) is a plan view showing a modification of the electric support member according to the thirty-seventh embodiment of the present invention. . FIG. 75 (A) is a view showing a main part of a gaming board including a game machine sorting apparatus and an electric support member according to a thirty-eighth embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 75 (B) is a perspective view of the electric support member. 76A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A5-A5 in FIG. 75B, and FIG. 76B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A6-A6 in FIG. 75B. FIG. 77A is a view showing a main part including the electric support member when the electric support member is in the standby position, and FIG. 77B is a main part including the electric support member when the electric support member is in the operating position. FIG. FIG. 78 is a perspective view showing a modification of the electric support member according to the thirty-eighth embodiment of the present invention.

  Hereinafter, the first to thirty-eighth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings for understanding of the present invention. The following embodiments are examples embodying the present invention, and do not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-rear, left-right, and upper-lower expressions used in the present embodiment are defined by the front-rear direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that includes a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is installed in an island facility (not shown) of the gaming hall. The outer frame 14 is fixed and installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine. However, other examples such as a spinning cylinder gaming machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball gaming machine, and a ballball gaming machine are used. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines.

[Configuration of Front Frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by the left end portion being rotatably supported by the inner frame 12.

  The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an electric decoration unit 27, and the like.

  The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 10) that switches an input signal to the sound lamp control device 5 described later depending on whether or not a pressing operation is performed. As a result, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state of the operation button 20 (with or without operation). This operation button 20 is operated in order to execute an operation button effect or the like that is executed in response to an operation on the operation button 20 by a player during a predetermined period in the special figure game effect.

  Note that the installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as the player can operate the operation button 20. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one and may be two or more. Furthermore, the operation switch 20a is not limited to the contact type switch, and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element or the like as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by the player.

  Further, instead of the operation buttons 20, a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation by a player of the touch key may be provided. Further, instead of the operation buttons 20, a panel 25 and a touch sensor that detects a player's touch operation on the panel 25 may be provided. The operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 is reflected in the operation button effect or the like in the special figure game effect.

  The launch handle 22 is a rotary handle that is operated by a player to launch a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by launching a game ball from a later-described game ball launching mechanism 32 with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation operation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 22 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

  The upper plate 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and aligns the stored game balls in one row. Used to guide to the game ball launching mechanism 32. In addition, the lower tray 24 is provided further below the upper tray 23 and is used for storing game balls surplus in the upper tray 23.

  The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and perform audio output in game effects and the like. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end portion of the front frame 11. Moreover, the electrical decoration part 27 incorporates light sources, such as a display lamp and LED, and performs a lamp | ramp effect with lighting modes, such as lighting or blinking.

[Configuration of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launching mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In FIG. 2, description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for simplification of illustration.

  The control unit 33 includes a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 includes an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning port 313, a left first starting port 314L, a right first starting port 314R, a second starting port 315, and a variable winning port 316b. Variable winning device 316 having an outlet 317, an outlet 317 (discharge port), a first through gate 318, a second through gate 319, a variable display unit 34, a main display unit 37, a sorting device 35, and an electric support which is a normal electric accessory. A member 36 (movable accessory member) is provided. Hereinafter, the left first start port 314L and the right first start port 314R correspond to winning ports having the same function, and are collectively referred to as “first start port 314”. The first start port 314 and the second start port 315 may be collectively referred to as “start ports 314, 315”. In addition, the first through gate 318 and the second through gate 319 may be collectively referred to as “through gates 318 and 319”. The general winning opening 313, the first starting opening 314, the second starting opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316b correspond to winning openings having different functions.

  The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 32 toward the game area on the surface of the game board 31. Then, after being fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that have not entered the various winning ports (the general winning port 313, the first starting port 314, the second starting port 315, or the variable winning port 316 b) It is discharged from the outlet 317.

  Here, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a firing rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323 as shown in FIG. 2. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and game balls launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 are transferred to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeding device 322 has driving means such as a solenoid and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 onto the firing rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving unit that launches the game balls supplied on the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in accordance with the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches a game ball using other driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 4, the general winning opening 313, the first starting opening 314, the second starting opening 315, the variable winning opening 316b, and the out opening 317 are formed with openings that penetrate the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. ing. Each of the general winning port 313, the left first starting port 314L, the right first starting port 314R, the second starting port 315, and the variable winning port 316b includes a ball entering sensor 313a that can individually detect the passing of the game ball, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 10). The incoming sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, and 316a are proximity sensors having through holes, for example.

  The through gates 318 and 319 are gates through which game balls can pass. The through gates 318 and 319 include entrance sensors 318a and 319a (see FIG. 10) that can individually detect game balls passing through the through gates 318 and 319. The entrance sensors 318a and 319a are proximity sensors having through holes, for example. When a game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, a lottery per ordinary symbol (normal determination) whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory that supports winning to the second starting port 315 is determined. ) Is performed. However, the lottery per normal symbol is not executed in the jackpot gaming state. In addition, the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol is clearly indicated by the normal symbol which is a combination of turning on and off the LED lamp pair in the normal symbol display 373 described later. Hereinafter, “ordinary symbol” may be abbreviated as “general symbol”. For example, “general symbol random number storage area” is an abbreviation of “ordinary symbol reservation area”.

  Here, the first through gate 318 is provided in the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 disposed in the lower center of the game board 31, and the passing sensor 318 a detects the passage of the game ball in the second passage 352. To do. In the game board 31, the game ball may pass through the first through gate 318 when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes the left side of the game board 31, that is, when it is left-handed. The first through gate 318 may be on the upstream side of the electric support member 36 in the path leading to the right first start port 314R in the distribution device 35, for example, near the introduction port 350 above the distribution member 38. You may arrange. Further, the first through gate 318 may be arranged in the vicinity of the life nail (navel nail) 31H outside the sorting device 35. The life nail (navel nail) 31H is omitted, and the life nail (navel nail) is omitted. ) It is also conceivable to arrange in the part where 31H was provided. Furthermore, it is only necessary to detect the passage of the game ball in the specific area (the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 in the present embodiment) by the ball entering sensor 318a, and it is not necessary to configure as a through gate. In this case, it is also conceivable that a mark indicating the specific area is attached to the sorting device 35 at the position of the incoming ball sensor 318a.

  On the other hand, the second through gate 319 is provided on the right side of the game board 31 and above the right part of the variable winning device 316. In the game board 31, the game ball may pass through the second through gate 319 when the game ball sent to the game board 31 passes the right side of the game board 31, that is, when the player hits the right.

  The incoming sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a (see FIG. 10) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the incoming sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, The detection result of 319a is input to the main control unit 331. Hereinafter, the detection of the entrance of a game ball by the entrance sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a may be referred to as winning. The incoming ball sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is possible to individually detect the incoming ball of the game ball by other detection methods. Any sensor may be used.

  In addition to the variable prize opening 316b, the variable prize winning device 316 has an opening / closing door 316c for switching whether or not the game balls are restricted to be entered into the variable prize opening 316b. The open / close door 316c is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the variable winning device 316, the opening of the opening / closing door 316c allows the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316b, and the closing of the opening / closing door 316c restricts the entry of the gaming ball to the variable winning opening 316b. Is done. The variable winning device 316 is arranged on the right side of the game board 31, and the open / close door 316c is opened in the round game in the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game. Therefore, when the player shifts to the jackpot gaming state triggered by the fact that the lottery result in the jackpot game is a jackpot game, the player plays a game to the variable winning opening 316b by making a right turn in a round game in which the door 316c opens. You can win a ball. Thereby, the player can obtain more prize balls in the jackpot game than in the special game.

  In the gaming machine 10, when the entrance of the game ball to the left first start port 314L, the right first start port 314R or the second start port 315 is detected by the entrance sensors 314La, 314Ra or the entrance sensor 315a, the main A jackpot lottery (special determination) is performed by the control unit 331. And the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display part 37 according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery. The lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the lottery result.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, the winning of the game ball to the general winning port 313, the first left starting port 314L, the first right starting port 314R, the second starting port 315, and the variable winning port 316b is the ball winning sensor 313a, When detected by 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of winning balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, and the number of winning balls when entering the first starting opening 314 or the second starting opening 315 is 3, and entering the variable winning opening 316b. In this case, the number of prize balls is 13. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result performed in the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game machine 10 shifts to a jackpot game state (special game state), and a round game (unit game) described later in which the variable winning opening 316b is opened. ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times, 5 times, and 16 times), a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

  Further, when a game ball wins at the first start port 314 or the second start port 315, a big hit lottery is executed as described above. When the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot (first determination result and second determination result), the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the special figure gaming state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot game state includes a 2R normal jackpot game state, a 2R probability variable jackpot game state, a 5R normal jackpot game state, a 5R probability variable jackpot game state, and a 16R probability jackpot game state. In the 2R normal jackpot game state and the 2R probability variable jackpot game state, the round game where the variable winning opening 316b is opened until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls or more are won in the variable winning opening 316b is twice. It is a gaming state including an opening / closing execution mode to be performed. The 5R normal jackpot gaming state and the 5R probability variable jackpot gaming state are gaming states in which a round game is performed five times in the opening / closing execution mode, and the 16R probability varying jackpot gaming state is a gaming state in which round games are performed sixteen times in the opening / closing execution mode. In the present embodiment, the same number of game balls can be obtained in round games in any game state. From the viewpoint of the obtainable game balls, the more round games in the open / close execution mode, the more players This is an advantageous gaming state. Therefore, in this embodiment, in terms of the number of game balls that can be acquired, the 16R probability variation jackpot is most advantageous for the player, and then the 5R normal jackpot gaming state and the 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state are advantageous for the player. The 2R normal jackpot gaming state and the 2R probability variable jackpot gaming state are the most disadvantageous for the player.

  The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display disposed so as to be visible through an opening 31 </ b> A formed at a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub-control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, a symbol variation display and a special symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the big hit lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to entering the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 are displayed. Various displays such as a game effect display are performed. The symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. Furthermore, it is conceivable to provide one or a plurality of sub-display units separately from the symbol display unit 341. The sub display unit is disposed, for example, at the upper part or the lower part, or the left part or the right part of the symbol display part 341. The sub display unit may be movable between a position covering the symbol display unit 341 and a position not covering the symbol display unit 341. Further, the sub display unit may be arranged on the upper plate 23.

  For example, the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling, for example, a plurality of types of main symbols having numbers “1” to “9” in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like. Note that sub-designs such as other characters or symbols may be displayed between the main symbols. Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that there are no sub-symbols and that there are nine main symbol types “1” to “9”.

  In the gaming machine 10, in the special game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols is stopped after the preset variation display time from the start of the symbol variation display in the symbol display unit 341. The More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all the main symbols are varied along a preset variation direction (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the variation of the plurality of main symbols is sequentially stopped. Then, when the fluctuation of the main symbol in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the symbol variation display ends.

  The main display unit 37 is arranged in the upper right part of the game board 31, and includes a first special symbol display 371 (first special symbol display unit), a second special symbol display 372 (second special symbol display unit), and a normal symbol. A display 373 and a hold number display 374 are provided. The arrangement of the main display unit 37 may be the lower left part or the lower right part of the game board 31.

  The first special symbol display 371 is a 7-segment display that displays the lottery result in the big win lottery for the winning to the first start port 314. The symbol displayed on the 7-segment display as the first special symbol display 371 is referred to as a first special symbol. In addition, in order to display the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in response to winning at the first start opening 314, the first special symbol display 371 displays a stop after the first special symbol is variably displayed. It is called pattern game.

  The second special symbol display 372 is a 7-segment display that displays the lottery result in the big win lottery with respect to the winning at the second start port 315. The symbol displayed on the 7-segment display as the second special symbol display 372 is referred to as a second special symbol. In addition, in order to display the lottery result in the jackpot lottery with respect to the winning at the second start opening 315, displaying by stopping after changing the second special symbol is referred to as a second special symbol game.

  In addition, a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be named generically, and may only be called a special symbol. In addition, the “special symbol” may be abbreviated as “special symbol”. For example, “first special graphic” and “second special graphic” are abbreviations of “first special graphic” and “second special graphic”, respectively, and “first special graphic game” and “second special graphic game”. "Is an abbreviation for" first special symbol game "and" second special symbol game ", respectively. Further, the first special symbol display 371 and the second special symbol display 372 are not limited to the 7-segment display, and for example, an LED group in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a linear shape, a circular shape, an arc shape, a matrix shape, or the like. It may be.

  The normal symbol display 373 determines whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 (ordinary electric accessory) in the main control unit 331 in response to winning in the through gates 318 and 319 (whether or not to enter the support state). Clarify the lottery result in the lottery per regular symbol. The normal symbol display 373 includes a pair of LED lamps, and the lottery result is clearly indicated by a normal symbol which is a combination of lighting and extinguishing of these LED lamps. The normal symbol display 373 may be constituted by another display including a 7-segment LED or the like instead of the LED lamp pair.

  In the number-of-holds indicator 374, the number N of the special symbol variable display generated by winning the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 has a plurality of LED lamps in a row (8 in this embodiment). Displayed by the number of lights. Such display processing for the hold number N is executed based on the hold number N stored in the special figure hold number storage area NA in the special figure hold storage area 412b of the RAM 412 to be described later with reference to FIG.

  The distribution device 35 is provided at the lower center of the game board 31. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5A, the sorting device 35 includes an introduction port 350, a sorting member 38, a first passage 351, and a second passage 352. In this sorting apparatus 35, the game ball 99 that has entered through the introduction port 350 moves to the left (counterclockwise in FIGS. 4 and 5A) and right (see FIGS. 4 and 5) of the sorting member 38. 5 (A) in the clockwise direction) are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352.

  The introduction port 350 is a part that allows a game ball to enter the sorting device 35. The introduction port 350 is arranged directly below the life nail (navel nail) 31H of the game board 31. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the nail 31H is introduced into the introduction port 350. A game ball is led to the life nail 31H mainly by the road nail 31M from the windmill 31F. In addition, a guiding portion 31E is provided above the life nail 31H for guiding the game ball dropped on the stage 31S to the life nail 31H via a warp port 31W provided on the left side of the game board 31. Therefore, the game ball dropped on the stage 31S is also guided to the life nail 31H. Here, the windmill 31 </ b> F and the warp port 31 </ b> W are provided on the left side of the game board 31. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 collects the game balls on the life nail 31H by so-called left-handed operation by operating the firing handle 22 so that the game balls sent to the game board 31 pass through the left side of the game board 31, A game ball can be introduced into the sorting apparatus 35 via 350. In the gaming machine 10, when the game handle sent out to the game board 31 is operated to the right so as to pass the right side of the game board 31, so-called right-handed, the game ball is placed in the variable winning opening 316 b. The nails are arranged in the life nail 31H so as not to collect the game balls. In the case of right-handed hitting, the introduction of the game balls from the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35 cannot be expected. Therefore, it is easier to receive a big hit lottery by using the sorting device 35 than making a right strike, and a play state in which a left strike is more advantageous to the player than a right strike (in this embodiment, modes A to C described later) (See FIG. 13 (B))), it is encouraged to play left-handed games.

  The distribution member 38 distributes the game balls introduced from the introduction port 350 to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352. The first passage 351 is opened downward, and the game balls distributed to the first passage 351 are discharged in a direction toward the left first start port 314L provided immediately below the first passage 351. The second passage 352 is opened downward, and the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 are discharged in a direction toward the right first starting port 314R provided immediately below the second passage 352.

  As shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the sorting member 38 includes a rotating shaft 381, a partition piece 382, a ball receiving and guiding piece 383, and an eccentric portion 384. In the sorting member 38, the partition piece 382, the ball receiving and guiding piece 383, and the eccentric portion 384 are integrally rotated around the rotation shaft 381. The partition piece 382 extends perpendicularly to the ball receiving and guiding piece 383 from the center of the ball receiving and guiding piece 383. The ball receiving guide piece 383 includes a left ball receiving guide piece 385 on the left side of the partition piece 382 and a right ball receiving guide piece 386 on the right side of the partition piece 382.

  The eccentric portion 384 changes the center of gravity of the sorting member 38, and includes a moving member 387 and an accommodating portion 388 that accommodates the moving member 387. The moving member 387 is, for example, a spherical body, a cylindrical body, or the like, and moves the housing portion 388 left and right according to the attitude of the sorting member 38. When the distribution member 38 is in the right inclined posture in which the partition piece 382 is inclined to the right side with respect to the vertical direction (the state of the solid line in FIGS. 5A and 5B), the moving member 387 is the accommodating portion 388. The center of gravity of the sorting member 38 is decentered to the right of the center by the moving member 387. Thereby, the distribution member 38 can maintain a right inclination attitude | position. On the other hand, when the dividing member 38 is in the left inclined posture in which the partition piece 382 is inclined to the left with respect to the vertical direction (the state of the imaginary line in FIGS. 5A and 5B), the moving member 387 is Located on the left side of the housing portion 388, the center of gravity of the sorting member 38 is eccentric to the left side of the center. Thereby, the distribution member 38 can maintain the left inclined posture.

  In such a sorting member 38, the game ball 99 that has entered the sorting device 35 is placed between the partition piece 382 and the left sphere receiving guide piece 385, and between the partition piece 382 and the right sphere receiving guide piece 386. Accepted in the middle. For example, as shown in FIGS. 6A and 6B, when the sorting member 38 is in the right inclined posture, the game ball 99 is received between the partition piece 382 and the left ball receiving and guiding piece 385. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 6C and 6D, when the sorting member 38 receives the game ball 99 between the partition piece 382 and the left ball receiving guide piece 385, the load of the game ball Is turned to the left (counterclockwise direction) to change to a left inclined posture. Thereby, the game ball 99 received by the partition piece 382 and the left sphere receiving and guiding piece 385 is guided to the left side (first passage 351 side) along the left sphere receiving and guiding piece 385.

  As shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the game ball 99 guided to the left side along the left sphere receiving guide piece 385 falls along the first passage 351, It is possible to easily win a prize at the first left starting port 314L arranged immediately below. In FIG. 4 and the like, the first passage 351 is linear, but the first passage 351 is non-linear such as a bent shape, a curved shape, an inclined shape, or a combination of two or more thereof. It may be. In the case of such a non-linear first passage 351, the left first starting port 314L is a position where the game ball that has passed through the first passage 351 can easily win according to the position and shape of the outlet of the first passage 351. Placed in.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8A, when the sorting member 38 is in the left inclined posture, the game ball 99 is received between the partition piece 382 and the right ball receiving and guiding piece 386. Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, when the distribution member 38 receives the game ball 99, the distribution member 38 rotates to the right (clockwise direction) due to the load of the game ball and changes to the right inclined posture. As a result, the game ball 99 received by the partition piece 382 and the right ball receiving and guiding piece 386 is guided to the right side along the right ball receiving and guiding piece 386 and falls along the second passage 352. At this time, the game ball 99 passes through the first through gate 318. The fact that the game ball 99 has passed through the first through gate 318 is detected by a ball entering sensor 318a (see FIG. 10). This gives an opportunity to perform a lottery per ordinary symbol as to whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 (ordinary electric accessory), and when the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol is a win, the electric support member 36 Is activated. In addition, the probability that the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol wins, and the operation time of the electric support member 36 when the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery wins depends on the gaming state (mode) as will be described later. (See FIGS. 13B to 13D).

  As shown in FIG. 8B and FIG. 8C, the game ball 99 guided to the right along the right ball receiving and guiding piece 386 falls along the second passage 352, and the second ball 352 It moves toward the right first starting port 314R arranged immediately below.

  Here, a second start port 315 is disposed between the left first start port 314L and the right first start port 314R. The second start port 315 is provided at the center of the ball receiving portion 391 formed between the left first start port 314L and the right first start port 314R, and the game ball 99 that has dropped onto the ball receiving portion 391. Wins the second starting port 315. In addition, a plate-like electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory is disposed between the second passage 352 and the right first start port 314R. The electric support member 36 restricts the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R and to the second starting port 315 by driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. An operating position (first position) that supports the winning of the game balls of the player, and a standby position that restricts the winning of the game balls to the second starting opening 315 and allows the winning of the gaming balls to the right first starting opening 314R ( The second position is moved in the front-rear direction at the opening 360 provided in the game board 31.

  As shown in FIG. 8C, when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position, the electric support member 36 does not protrude from the game board 31, so that the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R is electric. Since it is not limited by the support member 36, the game ball falling along the second passage 352 can easily win the right first starting port 314R. The design of the second passage 352 can be changed in the same manner as the first passage 351, and the arrangement of the right first start port 314R is appropriately changed according to the shape of the second passage 352 and the like.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the electric support member 36 protrudes from the game board 31 and the right first start port Since 314R is blocked by the opening / closing part 362 of the electric support member 36, the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R is restricted. When the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the game ball 99 that has dropped along the second passage 352 is guided above the ball receiving portion 391 by the guide portion 363 of the electric support member 36, and then It falls to the part 391. The game ball 99 that has fallen on the ball receiving portion 391 wins the second start opening 315. In addition, game balls that flow down from above the stage 310 and the electric support member 36 provided below the variable winning device 316 and are received by the electric support member 36 can also win the second starting port 315. That is, in this embodiment, both the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and the game ball 99 launched into the right region of the game board 31 are A ball can enter the start port 315.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 9C, the electric support member 36 is located on the left side between the left side of the stage 310 provided below the variable winning device 316 and the upper side of the first right starting port 314R. It is the plate-shaped member arrange | positioned downward. Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, a pair of wall portions 361 projecting above the edge in the width direction are provided. These wall portions 361 function as a guide for guiding the game ball 99 from the upstream end portion on the right side (upstream side) to the downstream end portion on the left side (downstream side). A plurality of delay guides 364 (four in this embodiment) are provided in a region on the left side (downstream side) of the central portion of the electric support member 36. The plurality of delay guides 364 extend in a staggered manner from the wall portion 361, and the tip portion is formed in an inclined shape located on the left side (downstream side) compared to the base end portion. Therefore, the plurality of delay guides 364 (delay units) move the game ball 99 from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) along a path meandering back and forth. Here, when the delay guide 364 is provided in the electric support member 36, it is possible to prevent the game machine 10 from obtaining more profit than planned, but this point will be described later.

  The configuration of the electric support member 36 can be variously changed. For example, the delay portion of the electric support member 36 is not limited to a configuration in which a plurality of inclined delay guides 364 are arranged in a staggered manner, and the electric support member 36 is not necessarily a plate-like member. In addition, the typical modification of the electrically-driven support member 36 is later mentioned as 13th-29th embodiment with reference to FIGS. 55-63.

  By the way, as described above, the electric support member 36 is used for a normal symbol that is triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball at the through gates 318 and 319 in the special figure game state in which the special figure game is executed. It operates when the lottery result in the lottery is a win. The operation time of the electric support member 36 (the time when the electric support member 36 is not in the standby position, or the time from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 to the start of return) is when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. Is determined according to the mode type (mode A to mode E (see FIG. 13B) described later) of the special figure gaming state, and the operation time of the electric support member 36 in mode A to mode C is short (for example, 0 .6 seconds), in mode D and mode E, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is long (for example, 6 seconds). The operating time of the electric support member 36 in the mode A to the mode C is such that the game ball passing through the second passage 352 can be guided to the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36, while being electrically driven from the stage 310 when it is hit right. A time when the game ball moved to the support member 36 or a game ball guided to the electric support member 36 by being guided by a first retraction guide nail 393 and a second retraction guide nail 394, which will be described later, cannot win the second start port 315 (for example, 0 .6 seconds). In addition, when one or both of the first through gate 318 and the second through gate 319 are detected to pass the game ball, the electric support member 36 may be operated without performing a lottery per normal symbol.

  Here, the game balls introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handing are distributed to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352, and the game balls in the first passage 351 win the first left starting port 314L, The game ball in the two passages 352 falls toward the first right starting port 314R. The game ball falling from the second passage 352 enters the right first start port 314R if the electric support member 36 is not operated, and the second start by the support by the electric support member 36 if the electric support member 36 is operated. Guided to mouth 315. On the other hand, the game ball that flows down on the right side of the sorting device 35, such as when making a right-hand hit, is not introduced into the sorting device 35 and therefore does not win the first starting port 314, and the electric support member. If the operation time of the electric support member 36 is short even when it is received by the operation at 36 (mode A to mode C), the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position before the game ball reaches the second start port 315. However, the second start opening 315 is not won. Specifically, since the electric support member 36 has a plate shape extending between the stage 310 and the right first starting port 314R and has a delay guide 364, the electric support member 36 has moved from the stage 310 to the electric support member 36. The time for the game ball at the right end of the support member 36 to reach the left end of the support member 36 is longer than the operation time of the electric support member 36 in mode A to mode C. Therefore, in the modes A to C where the operation time of the electric support member 36 is short, the player collects the game balls on the life nail 31H, and uses the sorting device 35 to use the first start port 314 or the second start port 315. Left-handed is encouraged to win game balls. On the other hand, in the mode D and the mode E, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is longer than the time when the game ball at the right end of the support member 36 moved from the stage 310 to the electric support member 36 reaches the left end of the support member 36. Therefore, it is more likely that the game ball will win the first start port 314 when the game ball is passed through the second through gate 319 and the electric support member 36 wins the game ball at the second start port 315. It is more advantageous to the player than using 35. Therefore, in the mode D and the mode E in which the operation time of the electric support member 36 is long, right-handed is encouraged.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is an apparatus including a sorting device that alternately distributes game balls to a first starter and a second starter having a function different from that of the first starter. However, when game balls are alternately distributed to the first starter and the second starter by the distribution device, there is a concern that the game becomes monotonous and the interest of the game is reduced.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a distribution device 35 that alternately distributes game balls to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, and unlike the conventional gaming machine, A first start port 314 having the same function is provided below each outlet of the passage 351 and the second passage 352. In the distribution device 35, the first through gate 318 is provided only in the second passage 352 of the first passage 351 and the second passage 352. Then, when the passing of the game ball to the second passage 352 is detected by the through gate 318, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to operate the electric support member 36. Therefore, when left-handed in order to use the sorting device 35, the game ball is guided to the left first start port 314L by the first passage 351, and the game ball wins the left first start port 314L, The second passage 352 can enter a state where a game ball wins the right first start port 314R, and the second passage 352 and the electric support member 36 can lead the game ball to the second start port 315. In addition, when the player makes a right strike, the game ball is not won by the sorting device 35, and the electric support member 36 is actuated by the passage of the game ball to the second through gate 319. A game ball may be guided to the start port 315. As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a monotonous one that distributes the gaming balls to two types of starting parts (first starting part and second starting part) having different functions like a conventional gaming machine. In contrast, the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36 can achieve a plurality of states in which a game ball can win a prize at the first start port 314 or the second start port 315, and the game becomes monotonous. It is difficult and can improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, as a conventional gaming machine, the first starting unit is arranged at a position where a winning can be made when left-handed, while the second starting unit is placed on the right side of the game board together with ordinary electric accessories such as a through gate and an electric support member. There are many things arranged in. Such a game machine can win a game ball in the first starter when left-handed, whereas a game ball does not win in the second starter located on the right side of the game board. Thus, when a right strike is made, a game ball can be won in the second starter portion arranged on the right side of the game board, while no game ball is won in the first starter portion. In general, it is more advantageous to win a jackpot in the jackpot lottery performed with the winning of a game ball to the second starter as compared to winning the game ball to the first starter. For example, in the jackpot in the jackpot lottery performed with the winning of the game ball to the second starter, the ratio of jackpot type advantageous to the player such as a jackpot with a large number of rounds in the jackpot game is high. And for gaming machines with different start-up functions that can be awarded for left-handed and right-handed, the game state has a low jackpot winning probability and normal symbol winning probability change, and the special figure change time and normal figure change It has a normal mode with a long time, and a short probability change mode when the probability of winning a jackpot and a normal symbol is high, and the special figure change time and the normal figure change time are short. Further, in the normal mode, not only the winning probability per normal symbol is low, but also the normal variation time is long, and the support time of the normal electric accessory for the normal symbol is short. For this reason, in the normal mode, the support time of the ordinary electric accessory for the winning of the game ball to the second starting portion triggered by the passing of the game ball to the through gate is short, and the support of the ordinary electric accessory is infrequent. You can only receive it. That is, in the normal mode, not only can you hardly receive the benefits of the support of the ordinary electric accessory even if you make a right strike, but you can not expect the winning of the game ball to the first starting part, so you can play the game with the left strike It is a good idea to do it. On the other hand, in the time probability variation mode, not only the winning probability per normal symbol is high and the normal variation time is short, but also the support time of the ordinary electric accessory for the normal symbol is long. For this reason, in the short-time probability change mode, the support time of the ordinary electric accessory for the winning of the game ball to the second starting portion triggered by the passing of the game ball to the through gate is long, and the support of the ordinary electric accessory is increased. Can be received at a frequency. In other words, in the short-time probability variation mode, it is better to win the second starting part by making a right strike, compared to the case where the first starting part wins a game ball by making a left strike. In other words, left-handed in the normal mode allows the first starting unit to win the game ball and plays the first special figure game, while the second special-fed game can be done by making a right-hand shot in the short-term accuracy change mode. The profit for the player is maximized. In addition to the short-time probability variation mode, there is a gaming machine having a so-called latent probability variation mode in which the probability variation mode is not specified as the probability variation mode. The latent probability changing mode has a high probability of winning a jackpot like the short-time probability changing mode, but in general, the support for the ordinary electric utility is the same as the normal mode. That is, in the latent probability changing mode, the variation time of the normal symbol with respect to the normal symbol lottery triggered by the passing of the game ball to the through gate is long, and the winning probability of the normal electric accessory operation in the normal symbol lottery is low. It is possible to receive the support of the ordinary electric accessory for winning the game ball to the starter only in a low time and with a low frequency. For this reason, in the latent probability changing mode, when the player hits the right hand, almost no winning to the second starting part can be expected. Therefore, as in the normal mode, the first starting part is made to win the first starting part by winning the game ball. It is encouraged to play special figure games. Not only in the normal mode and the latent probability changing mode, but in a gaming state in which left-handed is encouraged, it is preferable to eliminate the advantage of right-handed, for example, making it difficult to receive support from a normal electric accessory.

  On the other hand, although the gaming machine 10 includes the allocating device 35, it is not clearly shown that the special figure gaming state is the probability variation mode (high probability mode) like the conventional gaming machine, and left-handed is encouraged. In mode C, the electric support member 36 operates in a short time when the lottery result of the normal symbol lottery is a win. Therefore, even in the gaming machine 10, it is preferable to prevent the game ball from winning a prize at the second start port 315 even when the electric support member 36 is operated by right-handing in the mode C. In the gaming machine 10, a plurality of delay guides 364 as delay portions are provided on the electric support member 36 as an ordinary electric accessory. Here, when the electric support member 36 is not provided with a plurality of delay guides 364 as delay portions, the game balls 99 of the electric support member 36 are linearly routed from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side). Move in the direction toward. On the other hand, when the delay guide 364 is provided in the electric support member 36 as in the present embodiment, the game ball 99 of the electric support member 36 is meandering in the electric support member 36 while the right side (upstream side) to the left side ( Move toward (downstream). Therefore, by providing the delay guide 364 in the electric support member 36, the moving distance in the electric support member 36 is increased, and as a result, it is possible to secure a long residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36. The time until the game ball reaches the second start port 315 can be made longer than the operation time of the electric support member 36 in mode C. As a result, when the special figure gaming state is the above-described mode C, or in the case of the mode A and the mode B in which left-handed is encouraged like the mode C, that is, the mode in which the operation time of the electric support member 36 is short. In such a case, even if the player makes a right strike or the like and the game ball is received by the electric support member 36, the electric support member 36 is moved before the game ball is guided to the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36. Returning to the standby state makes it difficult to win the game ball at the second start port 315. This makes it difficult for a game ball to be won at the second start opening 315 when a hitting method (right hitting) other than the recommended hitting method (left hitting) is performed. In other words, the gaming machine 10 can positively make the player left-handed by eliminating the advantage of right-handing in a gaming state in which left-handedness is encouraged.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5A, the electric support member 36 is formed with a plurality of nails between the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and the distribution device 35. A first retraction guide nail 393 and a second retraction guide nail 394 (retraction guide portion) are provided. These evacuation guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36, which is the right region of the allocating device 35, in the direction of evacuating from the allocating device 35. That is, the retraction guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the second start port 315. Therefore, when the first retraction guide nail 393 and the second retraction guide nail 394 are provided, the game ball flowing down from above can be received at a position away from the second start port 315 in the electric support member 36. It is possible to ensure a long time until the second start port 315 is reached. Thereby, similarly to the case where the delay guide 364 is provided in the electric support member 36, the game ball received by the electric support member 36 is returned to the standby position from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 in the modes A to C. It is possible to prevent the second dynamic start port 315 from being reached in a short period of time, so that it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the electric support member 36 when an unintentional strike is performed. Further, in the gaming machine 10, since a large number of nails are driven on the game board 31, it is possible to provide the first retraction guide nail 393 and the second retraction guide nail 394 when driving these nails. Become. Therefore, when the electric support member 36 operates for a short time while suppressing the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retraction guide portions (the first retraction guide nail 393 and the second retraction guide nail 394). The support by the electric support member 36 can be made difficult to receive.

  In addition, it is also conceivable to employ a block-like member formed by resin molding, metal processing, a combination of these, or the like, instead of the retraction guide nails 393 and 394, as the retraction guide portion.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery triggered by the passing of the game ball through the through gates 318 and 319 in mode D and mode E is a win, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is long (for example, 6 Seconds). For example, a game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 has a short distance from the first through gate 318 to the most downstream end of the electric support member 36, and the electric support member 36 is operated for a short time as in mode C. However, since the second start opening 315 can be won, the second start opening 315 is also won in the mode D and the mode E in which the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time. On the other hand, a game ball that has passed through the second through gate 319 or a game ball that has been fired before and after the game ball has a long distance from the second through gate 319 to the most downstream end of the electric support member 36. Since the operation time of the member 36 is long, even if the electric support member 36 is provided with the delay portion 364, the second start port 315 is won. In this way, when the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time, not only the game ball that falls through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 but also the game ball that flows down the right region of the sorting device 35. Alternatively, the game ball dropped on the stage 310 below the variable winning opening 316b can be guided to the second start opening 315 by the electric support member 36. However, since the game balls introduced into the sorting device 35 are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 as described above, the electric support member 36 is in a gaming state in which the electric support member 36 operates for a long time. Left-handed in mode D and mode E cannot fully benefit from the support of the electric support member 36. Therefore, in modes D and E, which are gaming states in which the electric support member 36 is operated for a long time, the player passes the game ball through the second through gate 319 disposed on the game board 31 so that the electric support member is passed. In order to activate 36, it is encouraged to operate the firing handle 22 to play a right-handed game.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

  The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

  As shown in FIG. 10, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts electric power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies it to a control device and driving means provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. Main controller 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for shifting to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main controller 4 is equipped with an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer and is an example of the main control means of the present invention. The MPU 41 includes a ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. In addition, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the incoming ball sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a, the main display unit 37, and the like. Then, the MPU 41, based on the detection signals from the ball entering sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a, the general winning port 313, the left first starting port 314L, the right first starting port 314R, the second starting It is determined whether or not a ball is entered into the mouth 315, the variable winning opening 316b, and the through gates 318 and 319. The input / output I / F 42 is connected to an audio lamp control device 5, a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, a power supply control device 9, and the like.

  Then, the MPU 41 outputs a command such as a variation pattern command and a shift command to the sound lamp control device 5.

  The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is a special diagram variation start process of FIG. 22 based on information stored in a special symbol storage area 412b described later when symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 and the main display unit 37 is started. Is set in step S1808. The variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery or the jackpot type is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

  The shift command is a sound lamp control indicating that the special figure winning / notifying information indicating the lottery result in the big win lottery in the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 is shifted when the holding number N decreases. This command notifies the device 5. The shift command is set in step S1704 in the data setting process of FIG.

  It should be noted that commands other than those described above may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but description thereof will be omitted.

  The main controller 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of a later-described main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 is determined by a clock signal output from the frequency divider circuit.

  In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency divider circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 receives a main timer allocation which will be described later each time the clock signal rises (or falls). Suppose that the process is started and executed. Note that the oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply an operation clock mainly controlled by the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

  The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various kinds of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 or the like. The RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  Here, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a big hit lottery or the like will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a and the special figure holding storage area 412b of the RAM 412 to execute the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time.

  The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for the jackpot winning, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining the outage type. included. In addition, the lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a variation type counter CS1 that determines the variation display time in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a is used for setting the initial values of the random symbol counter C4 for normal symbols used for lottery of whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory and the random number counter C4 for normal symbols. And an initial value counter CIN2 per ordinary symbol. Hereinafter, when these plural types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

  The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value by the MPU 41 at short time intervals and the value returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when the big hit lottery and the setting of the variable display time are performed.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 738, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the counter value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the counter value (random number value) at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 314 or the second start port 315 is stored in the special figure storage area 412b. On the other hand, when the counter value (random number value) is acquired, the counter value of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 is set as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is determined by the low probability mode (mode A, mode B and mode D described later) with a low probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot based on the winning / notifying table stored in the hit / fail table storage area in the ROM 411. (See FIG. 13B)), and a high probability mode (mode C and mode E described later (see FIG. 13B)) having a high probability of winning a jackpot. Here, FIG. 12A is a diagram showing an example of a low probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 12B is an example of a high probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the high probability mode. In the example shown in FIG. 12A and FIG. 12B, the number of random number values in which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit in the low probability mode (mode A, mode B and mode D) is three (0 to 0). 2), and the jackpot probability is 3/739 (= about 1 / 246.3). On the other hand, in the high probability mode (mode C and mode E), the number of counter values (random values) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is 30 (0 to 29), and the jackpot probability is 10 in the low probability mode. It is 30/739 (= about 1 / 24.6) which is double. Here, in the low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table, the three random number values (0 to 3) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot are common, but they may not be common. Further, the random value for winning the jackpot need not be a continuous value, and may be a partly or entirely discrete value. If the counter value (random number) of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the counter value (random number) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is lost.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 19, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the counter value of the big hit type counter C2 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 314 or the second start port 315 is stored in the special figure holding storage area 412b. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is set individually for each jackpot of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game by the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area in the ROM 411. ing. That is, in the gaming machine 10, a jackpot for winning the game ball to the first starting port 314 (first special figure jackpot) and a jackpot for winning the game ball to the second starting slot 315 (second special figure jackpot) ) And different jackpot types. Here, FIG. 12C and FIG. 12D are diagrams showing an example of the jackpot type distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 12C, in the case of a jackpot in the first special symbol game triggered by winning the first starting port 314, 2R probability variation jackpot (first determination result) and 2R normal jackpot ( (Second determination result). The number of random numbers that are 2R probability variable jackpots is 15 from 0 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are 2R regular jackpots is 15 to 19, and random numbers that are 5R regular jackpots, 5R probability jackpots, and 16R probability jackpots. Does not exist. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 12D, in the case of a big win in the second special symbol game triggered by winning the second starting port 315, the 5R probability variation jackpot (first determination result), 16R probability variation jackpot (first 1 determination result) and 5R normal jackpot (second determination result). The number of random numbers for 5R probability variation is 5 from 0 to 4, the number of random numbers for 16R probability variation is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers to be 5R normal success is 5 from 15 to 19. Yes, there are no random numbers for 2R normal jackpot and 2R probability variable jackpot. In this embodiment, the probability of probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot) in the first special symbol game is 75% (15/20), and probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol game (5R probability variation jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot). Is 75% (15/20). In other words, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probability changing machine in which the probability of probability variation is the same in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the distribution of the jackpot type differs between the first special figure jackpot and the second special figure jackpot, but the number of round games in the jackpot game is larger for the first special figure jackpot than the first special figure jackpot. The second special figure jackpot is more advantageous for the player in terms of the number of round games.

  In the present embodiment, a game ball is awarded to the first start opening 314 that triggers execution of the first special symbol game, and a game ball to the second start opening 315 that triggers execution of the second special symbol game. An individual jackpot type allocation table is set for each of the winnings, and the jackpot type allocation probability varies depending on whether the game ball has won the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315. However, it is also conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same between the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop probability changing machine, and may be configured as a gaming machine having a specification different from that of a loop probability changing machine such as a so-called limit machine, ST machine, V-ST machine, or a kind of two-kind mixing machine. . Note that examples in which the gaming machine 10 is applied to a limit machine, an ST machine, a V-ST machine, and a kind-two-mixer will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 to 50 as third to sixth embodiments. .

  Then, the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 2R normal jackpot (second determination result), 2R probability change based on the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the special figure execution area AE. Whether the jackpot (first determination result), 5R probability variation jackpot (first determination result), 5R normal jackpot (second determination result), 16R probability variation jackpot (first determination result), or disengagement is determined. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a 2R normal big hit, a 2R probability variable big hit or a miss for the winning for the first start port 314, and the second start port 315. With respect to winning a prize, it is determined whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot or miss.

  Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 2R probability variable jackpot or 2R normal jackpot, the opening / closing execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316b is opened is repeated twice is executed. When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an opening / closing execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316b is opened is repeated five times. When the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 16R probability variable jackpot, an opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times is executed.

  When the jackpot game ends, the mode is changed from the jackpot game state to a mode (game state) according to the jackpot type. Here, FIG. 13A is a mode transition table that defines a transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In the example shown in FIG. 13A, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 2R normal jackpot, the mode shifts to the mode B after the jackpot game ends. When the lottery result is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the mode shifts to mode C after the jackpot game ends. When the lottery result is a 5R normal jackpot, the mode D is entered after the jackpot game ends. When the lottery result is 5R probability variation jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot, the mode shifts to mode E after the jackpot game ends. In other words, since the jackpot type in the case of winning the winning for the first starting port 314L, 314R is 2R normal jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 12C), the winning in the winning for the first starting port 314L, 314R In jackpot, after the jackpot game is over, the mode B or mode C is entered. On the other hand, since the jackpot type in the case of winning the winning for the second starting port 315 is 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot (see FIG. 12 (D)), in the winning for the second starting port 315 In jackpot, after the jackpot game ends, the mode shifts to mode D or mode E.

  Here, FIG. 13B shows a mode type (mode A to mode E) in a special figure game state in which a special symbol fluctuates due to a winning of a game ball to the start opening 314L, 314R, 315 in the gaming machine 10. It is a mode data table which prescribes | regulates the content.

  Mode A is a mode that is shifted to when the upper limit number of special figure games is completed in Mode B or Mode D, which is a limited time reduction mode, which will be described later, that is, when the time reduction ends, which is also apparent from the following description. However, it is the gaming state that is most disadvantageous to the player among Mode A to Mode E. In the gaming machine 10, the gaming state is also set to mode A when the contents of the RAM 412 are cleared when the main power is turned on. Note that the gaming state when the contents of the RAM 412 are not cleared when the main power is turned on is the gaming state stored in the RAM 412 when the main power is turned off.

  Mode A (first gaming state) is a jackpot low probability mode with a low probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot. Is called. The mode A is a non-time reduction mode in which there is no shortening (short time) of the normal symbol fluctuation display time, and the normal symbol fluctuation display time is the normal fluctuation display time (for example, 30 seconds). Therefore, in mode A, when the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 passes the position of the electric support member 36, the normal symbol is being changed and displayed, and the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a win. Even if the electric support member 36 is actuated, it is not possible to expect winning in the second start port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36. Further, the mode A is a low probability mode per normal symbol in which a lottery per normal symbol is performed based on a normal symbol low probability success / failure table having a low probability of winning the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery. Therefore, in the mode A, the first special figure game is executed except for an irregular case where the game ball accidentally passes the second passage 352 at the operation timing of the electric support member 36, and the second special figure game is executed. Is practically not executed.

  Here, FIG. 13C shows an example of a normal symbol low probability success / failure table. In the normal symbol low probability success / failure table shown in FIG. 13C, one counter value (of random symbol counter C4 (see FIG. 11) per ordinary symbol consisting of 200 counter values (random number values) from 0 to 199 (see FIG. 11). 199) corresponds to the winning of the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery, and the remaining 199 counter values (0 to 198) correspond to the losing of the lottery result. That is, in the normal symbol low probability success / failure table, the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery will be won is set to 0.5% (1/200). Therefore, in mode A, the probability that the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol is won is low, and the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol is win, so that the electric support member 36 supports the second start port 315. Expectation for winning game balls is low. In addition, the probability that the lottery result in the normal winning lottery based on the normal symbol low probability winning / failing table is a win will be especially if there is a clear probability difference from the probability that the lottery result based on the normal symbol high probability winning / failing table described later will be a hit. There is no limit, and the probability of winning the lottery result may be 0%. In mode A, it may be considered that the lottery is not performed per ordinary symbol. In mode A, when a game ball passes through the first through gate 318, a lottery per normal symbol is performed, while when a game ball passes through the second through gate 319, a lottery per normal symbol is not performed. It can also be considered.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, in mode A, the operation time of the electric support member 36 when the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol is a win is short (for example, 0.6 seconds). As described above, above the electric support member 36, a retraction guide nail 393 for guiding the game ball flowing down from above the electric support member 36 in a direction to retreat from the sorting device 35 (second start port 315). 394 (see FIGS. 4 and 5A) is provided. For this reason, in the mode A, even when the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a winning as described above, the operating time of the electric support member 36 for the game ball flowing down the right side of the game board 31 by right-handing Therefore, it is difficult to support the winning to the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36 in the case of right-handed. In addition to this, the probability of winning the lottery result in the above-mentioned lottery per normal symbol is low, and in mode A, the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 315 that is distributed to the jackpot type advantageous to the player is made. Can hardly be expected. Further, in the right-handed hit, not only the support of the electric support member 36 cannot be expected, but also the introduction of the game ball to the sorting device 35 cannot be expected. Therefore, in the mode A, the game ball is caused to flow down on the left side of the game board 31 by left-handed, the game ball is introduced into the distribution device 35, and a big hit lottery is received by winning the game ball to the first start ports 314L and 314R. It is encouraged.

  As described above, in mode A, left-handed is encouraged, the probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery will win is low, and the operation timing of the electric support member 36 is different from the passing timing of the game ball. For this reason, it is almost impossible to expect a winning of a game ball to the second start port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36. Therefore, in mode A, most of the jackpot lottery is performed for winning the game balls to the first starting openings 314L and 314R, and the jackpot type in mode A is mostly 2R normal jackpot or 2R probability variation jackpot. As a result, from mode A, it is very easy to shift to mode B or mode C after the jackpot game is over, and mode D and mode E are not substantially shifted.

  Mode B (fourth game state) is a mode that shifts after the end of the 2R normal jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13A), and is a mode (game state) that is more advantageous to the player than mode A. is there.

  Mode B is a jackpot low probability mode with a low probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot similarly to mode A, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the low probability mode determination table (see FIG. 12A). . In addition, unlike mode A, mode B is a time reduction mode in which the normal symbol change display time is a reduced change display time that is shorter than the normal change display time (for example, 30 seconds) of the non-time reduction mode. The mode is continued at the maximum until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 50 times). In other words, mode B is a mode that is more advantageous than mode A because it is a time-shortening mode, although it is a time-limited time-shorting mode in which an upper limit is provided for the number of time reductions. Here, the shortened variation display time is set to a time during which the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 can win the second start port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36, and the first through gate 318 and the electric support member 36. And the operation time of the electric support member 36, for example, about 0.004 seconds to 0.2 seconds. In the present embodiment, an effect that clearly indicates the mode B (time reduction mode) may be executed by the effect means such as the symbol display unit 341. In this case, the production means may produce an opportunity as a chance zone that suggests the possibility of being probable. Note that in mode B, if the maximum number of special figure games is played without the big win lottery result being a big win, the mode A is entered.

  Furthermore, in mode B, a lottery per normal symbol is performed based on a normal symbol high probability success / failure table with a high probability of winning the lottery result per normal symbol. is there. Here, FIG. 13D shows an example of a normal symbol high probability success / failure table. In the normal symbol high probability success / failure table shown in FIG. 13 (D), 199 (0 to 198) of the counter values (random numbers) of the random number counter C4 (see FIG. 11) per normal symbol are lottery per normal symbol. Corresponding to the winning of the lottery result, the remaining one (199) corresponds to losing the lottery result. That is, in the normal symbol high probability success / failure table, the counter value (random number value) of winning and losing is opposite to that of the normal symbol low probability success / failure table, and the probability of winning the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol is 99.5. % (199/200). Therefore, in the mode B, it can be expected that the game ball wins the second start port 315 with the support of the electric support member 36 due to the fact that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a win. In addition, the probability that the lottery result in the normal winning lottery based on the normal symbol low probability winning / failing table is not necessarily 99.5%, and may be another percentage. Also, in mode B, when a game ball passes through the first through gate 318, a lottery per normal symbol is performed, whereas when a game ball passes through the second through gate 319, a lottery per normal symbol is not performed. It can also be considered. In mode B, the winning probability in the lottery per normal symbol when a game ball passes through the first through gate 318 may be 100%, and the normal symbol when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318. The electric support member 36 may be operated for a short time without performing a winning lottery. In this case, in the mode B, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, so that the entrance ratio between the left first start port 314L and the second start port 315 is 50%: 50. %become.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, in mode B, the operating time of the electric support member 36 when winning a lottery per normal symbol is short as in mode A (for example, 0.6 seconds) The winning of the game ball to the second start port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36 is not expected. Therefore, in mode B, left-handed is encouraged as in mode A.

  Thus, in mode B, left-handed rather than right-handed is encouraged because the operation time of the electric support member 36 is short, but unlike mode A, the probability that the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol will be a hit. Therefore, the game ball passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 can be expected to win the game ball to the second start port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36. Specifically, when game balls are introduced into the sorting device 35 as described above, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352. The game balls distributed to the first passage 351 win the first left starting port 314L. On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 pass through the first through gate 318. At this time, in the mode B, the lottery per normal symbol is performed based on the normal symbol high probability acceptance table per normal symbol when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318. Therefore, the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 and passing through the first through gate 318 receive the support of the electric support member 36 with high probability (99.5% in this embodiment) and enter the second start port 315. Win a prize. In addition, when the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol is out of play, the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 win the right first start opening 314R.

  In the mode B, the big hit lottery wins the game ball to the second start port 315 with a probability of 49.75% with respect to the game ball win to the left first start port 314L with a probability of 50%. On the other hand, it is performed with respect to the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R with a probability of 0.25%. As a result, about half (50.25%) of the jackpots in mode B are 2R normal jackpots or 2R probability variable jackpots, and the mode shifts to mode B or mode C after the jackpot game for these jackpots ends. In addition, about half (49.75%) of the jackpots in Mode B are 5R normal jackpots, 5R probability variable jackpots or 16R chance jackpots, and after the jackpot game for 5R regular jackpots, the mode shifts to mode D, and 5R probability jackpots and After the jackpot game for the 16R probability variable jackpot is over, the mode E is entered (see FIG. 13A). That is, in the mode B, since the jackpot lottery with respect to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315 is received in about half of the special figure games by the support of the electric support member 36, the 5R normal jackpot with a large expected number of acquisitions, It can be expected to win the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot, and after the jackpot game with respect to these jackpots is over, as will be described later, the electric support member 36 is shifted to the mode D and the mode E in which the operation time is long. Therefore, in mode B, unlike mode A, there is a possibility of winning a jackpot advantageous to the player, and after the jackpot game for the advantageous jackpot is over, the mode shifts to a mode more advantageous than mode B. This is also a mode (game state) that is more advantageous for the player than mode A.

  Mode C (second game state) is a mode that shifts after the end of the 2R probability variation big hit game as described above (see FIG. 13A), and is a mode (game) that is more advantageous to the player than modes A and B. State). Mode C is a jackpot high probability mode (probability variation gaming state) in which the probability of winning a lottery in the jackpot lottery is high, and the jackpot lottery is performed based on the high probability mode determination table (see FIG. 12B). In this respect, the mode (game state) is more advantageous to the player than the mode A and the mode B. The mode C is a time-shortening mode like the mode B, but unlike the mode B, the time-shortening mode is continued until the lottery result in the big win lottery becomes a big hit. That is, the mode C is a jackpot guaranteed short time mode in which the next jackpot is guaranteed, and is also a mode (gaming state) that is more advantageous than the mode B in this respect. In the present embodiment, the mode C (high probability mode) is not clearly indicated in the production by the production means such as the symbol display unit 341 for the special figure game or the jackpot game. That is, mode C is a so-called latent probability variation mode. Of course, in mode C, it may be clearly indicated in the effect means that it is a high probability mode, and the effect means is indicated in the effect means as in mode B, suggesting the possibility of probability change. Production may be performed in the production means as a chance zone.

  Furthermore, in mode C, as in mode B, the lottery per normal symbol is performed based on the normal symbol high probability winning / failing table, but as in mode A and mode B, the electric support when the lottery per normal symbol is won Since the operation time of the member 36 is short (for example, 0.6 seconds), it is not possible to expect a winning of the game ball to the second start port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36 in the right hand. Therefore, left-handed is also encouraged in Mode C. In Mode C, when a game ball passes through the first through gate 318, a lottery per normal symbol is performed, while when a game ball passes through the second through gate 319, a lottery per normal symbol is not performed. It can also be considered. In mode C, the winning probability in the lottery per normal symbol when a game ball passes through the first through gate 318 may be 100%, and when the game ball passes through the first through gate 318, the normal symbol may be set. The electric support member 36 may be operated for a short time without performing a winning lottery. In this case, in mode C, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352, so that the entrance ratio between the left first start port 314L and the second start port 315 is 50%: 50. %become.

  Thus, in mode C, as in modes A and B, left-handed is encouraged because the operation time of the electric support member 36 is short. However, there is a probability that the lottery result in the lottery per normal symbol will be a hit. Therefore, the game ball passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 can be expected to win the game ball to the second start port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36. This is an advantageous mode (game state). In mode C, as in mode B, the jackpot lottery is given a 49.75% probability to the second start port 315 with a 50% chance of winning the game ball to the left first start port 314L. The game ball is awarded to the right first start port 314R with a probability of 0.25%. For this reason, the jackpot type expected in jackpot in mode C and the mode of the transition destination after the jackpot game are the same as mode B. That is, in Mode C, as in Mode B, about half of the special figure games can receive a jackpot lottery for winning the game ball to the second starting port 315, so the 5R normal jackpot, 5R, which has a high expected number of winnings, is received. It can be expected that the winning jackpot and the 16R probability changing jackpot will be won, and after the jackpot game with respect to these jackpots is over, as will be described later, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is shifted to the mode D and the mode E. Therefore, in mode C, unlike mode A, and similarly to mode B, there is a possibility of winning a jackpot advantageous to the player.

  Mode D (fourth game state) is a mode that shifts after the end of the 5R normal jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13A), and is a mode (game) that is more advantageous to the player than modes A and B. State). Mode D is a jackpot low probability mode with a low probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot similarly to the modes A and B, and the jackpot lottery is based on the low probability mode determination table (see FIG. 12A). Done. Further, mode D is a limited number of times reduction mode similar to mode B, and transitions to mode A when the upper limit number of special figure games is performed. Further, the mode D is performed based on a high-probability acceptance table with a high probability that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery will be a win, and this point is also similar to the mode C. In mode D, it is clearly indicated that the mode is the time reduction mode in the production by the production means such as the symbol display unit 341. In this case, the production means may produce an opportunity as a chance zone that suggests the possibility of being probable.

  However, mode D differs from mode A to mode C in that the operation time of the electric support member 36 is longer (for example, 6 seconds) when winning a lottery per normal symbol, which is advantageous over modes A to C in this respect. Mode (game state). In mode D, since the operation time of the electric support member 36 is long, as described above, the game ball flowing down the right region of the sorting device 35 and the game ball falling on the stage 310 below the variable winning opening 316b are electrically driven. The support member 36 may guide the second start port 315. For this reason, right-handed driving is encouraged in order to operate the electric support member 36 by passing the game ball through the second through gate 319 disposed on the right side of the game board 31. In Mode D, when the player makes a right-hand shot, it is difficult to introduce the game ball to the sorting device 35. Therefore, the game ball hardly wins the first start opening 314L, 314R, and has a high probability (approximately 100%). Then, a game ball wins at the second start opening 315 and a big hit lottery is performed. Therefore, the jackpot in mode D is a 5R normal jackpot or 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot with a high probability (approximately 100%). When the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot, the mode shifts to mode D after the jackpot game for the jackpot ends. When the jackpot type is 5R probability variable jackpot or 16R probability jackpot, the mode after the jackpot game for these jackpots ends The process shifts to E (see FIG. 13A). That is, in the mode D, unlike the modes A to C, as described above, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is long, and the jackpot lottery can be received exclusively for winning the game ball to the second start port 315. it can. Therefore, in the mode D, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot, the type of jackpot is either 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot with a large expected number of game balls, and these Since the operation time of the electric support member 36 is shifted to the mode D or the mode E after the end of the jackpot game for the jackpot, the mode (game state) is more advantageous than the modes A to C in these respects.

  Mode E (the third gaming state) is a mode that shifts after the end of the 5R probability variation jackpot game or the 16R probability variation jackpot game as described above (see FIG. 13A), and the most games among the modes A to E This mode is advantageous to the user. Mode E is a jackpot high probability mode (probability game state) in which the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is high, as in mode C, and the jackpot lottery is a high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 12B). ) And a jackpot guarantee short time mode in which the next jackpot is guaranteed. In mode E, it is clearly indicated that the game state is the probability variation gaming state (high probability mode) in the production by the production means such as the symbol display unit 341.

  However, unlike the mode C, the mode E has a long operation time of the electric support member 36 (for example, 6 seconds) when the lottery per normal symbol is won like the mode D. Therefore, right-handed mode E is encouraged in the same way as mode D. In mode E, when the player makes a right-hand shot, it is difficult to introduce the game ball to the sorting device 35. Therefore, the game ball hardly wins the first start opening 314L, 314R and has a high probability (approximately 100%). Then, a game ball wins at the second start opening 315 and a big hit lottery is performed. Therefore, the mode of the jackpot type expected in jackpot in mode E and the transition destination mode after the jackpot game is the same as mode D. That is, in Mode E, a big hit lottery is received only for winning a game ball to the second starting port 315, so there is a high probability of either 5R normal big win, 5R positive variable big win or 16R positive variable big win with a large expected number of acquisitions. Win (approximately 100%).

  It is also conceivable that the electric support member 36 operates a plurality of times for a single symbol lottery. For example, in the mode D and the mode E, the total operation time of the electric support member 36 may be set to 6 seconds by performing the operation for operating the electric support member 36 for 1.2 seconds five times. However, the operation time and the number of operations of the electric accessory 36 described above are merely examples, and can be changed as appropriate. Of course, the operation time of the electric support member 36 in the mode D and the mode E is not limited to 6 seconds and can be changed as appropriate. Also, when winning a normal jackpot such as 5R normal jackpot in mode E, the mode A is not the mode D, but the mode A which is a non-short-time mode or the mode B in which the operating time of the electric accessory 36 is short is shifted. May be. In these cases, mode D is omitted.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, the normal electric combination such as an electric support member operates frequently and for a long time so that the second start port is easy to win, and the normal electric combination is a low frequency and short operation. Some have a non-short-time mode. In this type of gaming machine, the non-time-saving mode is set in the normal gaming state where the jackpot lottery probability is low, and the time-saving mode is set in the probability changing gaming state where the jackpot lottery probability is high.

  However, the conventional game machines have a fixed theoretical probability of being able to receive support from the ordinary electric utility in the short-time mode, and the gameability in the short-time mode is poor, and it is difficult to create a new playability. .

  On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 includes mode A, mode C, and mode E as special figure gaming states. These mode A, mode C, and mode E differ in the expected value of the entrance ratio of the first starter and the second starter. Specifically, in the mode A, the entering ratio with respect to the first starting port 314 is about 100%, and in the mode C, the entering ratio between the first starting unit and the second starting unit is about 50%: 50%. In mode E, the entrance ratio with respect to the second start port 315 is approximately 100%. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 10, the gameability is improved based on the three modes A, C, and E, which have different expected values of the entrance ratio between the first starter and the second starter. It becomes possible to create playability.

  For example, although the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a loop probability changing machine, in a conventional loop probability changing machine, a mode in which the entrance ratio with respect to the first start port 314 is approximately 100% and an entrance into the second start port 315 The ratio of the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 as in the mode C of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is approximately 50%: 50. % Mode. On the other hand, the mode E that is most advantageous to the player who wins the jackpot to which a large amount of game value is given is typically shifted to the mode C of the high probability mode by the first hit in the mode A. It is necessary to win a jackpot in a jackpot lottery triggered by winning the second starting port 315 with a probability of approximately 50%. That is, in the gaming machine 10, it is necessary to go through the stage of acquiring a big hit at the second start port 315 in the mode C before shifting to the mode E, and there is a barrier to be overcome in order to shift to the most advantageous mode E. A new gameability of having is added to the loop probability changing machine. Thereby, game property and interest can be improved, suppressing that a game becomes monotonous.

  In addition, since the gaming machine 10 further includes the mode B and the mode D, which are time-limited modes with a limited number of times as the special figure gaming state, it becomes easy to create new gaming properties with improved gaming properties. Specifically, the mode E is typically shifted from the mode C in the high probability mode as described above, but is also shifted from the modes B and D in the low probability mode. That is, there is a possibility that the mode E is shifted from the mode B and the mode D that are shifted when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot. Since mode B and mode D are low-probability modes, the probability of winning a lottery in the big win lottery is lower than in mode C, so the mode B and mode D are shifted to mode E. Needs to overcome higher barriers than when switching from mode C to mode E. In mode D, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is long, whereas in mode B, the operation time of the electric support member 36 is short. Therefore, in the mode B and the mode D, it is easy to win the second start port 315. Therefore, the height of the barrier to be overcome in order to shift to mode E differs between mode B and mode. As described above, by having the mode B and the mode D as the special figure gaming state, the gaming property having a plurality of barriers (three types of barriers in the present embodiment) having different difficulties to be overcome in order to shift to the mode E can be achieved. It is given to the loop probability change machine. Thereby, game property and interest can be improved more, suppressing that a game becomes monotonous.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 11, the reach random number counter C <b> 3 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the special figure storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 314 or the second start port 315.

  In the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is out of the range, the type of the variable display stop result in the symbol display unit 341 is selected by the reach random number counter C <b> 3. Specifically, the outage type table stored in the outage type table storage area in the ROM 411 causes a back-and-forth outreach, in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after a reach occurs, and the reach is also generated. After that, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is set for each of the three types of outliers, ie, the reach other than before and after detachment where the final stop symbol is other than before and after the reach symbol, and the complete detachment where no reach occurs. Here, “reach” indicates a state in which the symbol combination of the main symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won easily becomes a symbol combination after the symbol display on the symbol display unit 341 is started until the symbol is stopped. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two stop positions among the three stop positions on the active line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbols corresponding to the remaining one stop position are in a state of fluctuating. In addition, during the reach fluctuation state in the symbol display unit 341, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed and suggests an expectation degree, or a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect. A person participation type operation effect process or the like is executed. In addition, during execution of these effect processes, it is also conceivable that the variable display in the symbol display unit 341 is not displayed, and the display is reduced or enlarged.

  The variation type counter CS1 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 199, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines rough variation types such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and special reach as special figure game effects. The variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process described later with reference to FIG. 17 is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the special figure holding storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first start port 314 or the second start port 315.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and a preset fluctuation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 refers to the variation table storage area of the ROM 411 while referring to the low probability mode jackpot variation table, high probability mode jackpot variation table, or outlier variation table stored in advance according to the lottery result. Specify the type. Note that these variation tables may be provided depending on whether the current gaming state is the low probability mode or the high probability mode, or may be provided individually for each of the modes A to E.

  And if MPU41 specifies the variation pattern which shows the variation display time by the 1st special symbol display 371 of the main display part 37, the 2nd special symbol display 372, and the symbol display unit 341, the variation pattern and the jackpot lottery A variation pattern command indicating the lottery result is input to the sound lamp control device 5. Thereby, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the variation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the variation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation pattern and the lottery result. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in the above are determined. Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform variable display based on the details of the determined variation mode, reproduces sound from the speaker 26 according to the variable display, and turns on and blinks the illumination unit 27. Turn off the light.

  Accordingly, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process for determining a variation pattern (variation display time) based on the variation type counter CS <b> 1 and the variation table for the variation display in the symbol display unit 341. It will be. Therefore, even if the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably perform the big hit lottery. Moreover, since the details of the variation mode that is actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, various variation modes can be selectively executed as the variation mode.

  The normal symbol per random number counter C4 is used for a lottery per normal symbol as to whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated for a predetermined time. For example, the random number counter C4 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 199 and reaches the maximum value. It is a loop counter that is reset to 0 after the operation. The regular symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated in step S1003 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 14 described later, and the counter value (random number) is acquired at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. Based on this counter value (random number value), a lottery per ordinary symbol is performed. The normal symbol lottery means that the normal symbol is not variably displayed at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319 (the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 is not blinking), and the jackpot game is played. This is performed each time a game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319 on the condition that it is not executed and the electric support member 36 is not operated. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the lottery per normal symbol is not put on hold like the jackpot lottery. On the other hand, when the count value (random number value) of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol is acquired for the lottery per normal symbol, the counter value of the random number initial value counter CIN2 per normal symbol is set as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol. .

  The special figure reservation storage area 412b includes the first special figure reservation area RE1, the second special figure reservation area RE2, the third special figure reservation area RE3, the fourth special figure reservation area RE4, the fifth special figure reservation area RE5, the sixth It includes a special figure reservation area RE6, a seventh special figure reservation area RE7, an eighth special figure reservation area RE8, a special figure reservation number storage area NA, and a special figure execution area AE.

  When a game ball enters the first start port 314 or the second start port 315, the special figure success / failure information is stored in any of the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8. The game balls won for the first start port 314 and the game balls won for the second start port 315 are stored in the order of winning without distinction. The special figure success / failure information includes numerical information which is a counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired at the time of winning the game ball to the start ports 314 and 315, Mode when starting port information (special drawing information) that can distinguish whether it is for winning a prize to the first starting port 314 or a winning for the second starting port 315, and special figure success / failure information is acquired Mode information for the type (mode A to mode E).

  It should be noted that a lottery counter 412a (a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, and a variation type counter CS1 corresponding to the winning for the first starting port 314 and the winning for the second starting port 315, respectively. Etc.) may be provided individually.

  Thus, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 is one of the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8. Stored in In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the special figure game executed based on the special figure success / failure information stored in the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8, it is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. It is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the start opening 314, 315, the special figure success / failure information includes first special figure reservation area RE1, second special figure reservation area RE2, third special figure reservation area RE3, fourth The special figure reservation area RE4, the fifth special figure reservation area RE5, the sixth special figure reservation area RE6, the seventh special figure reservation area RE7, and the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 are stored in vacant areas. In the special figure reservation number storage area NA, the number of special figure success / failure information stored in the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 is stored as the reservation number N. That is, in the gaming machine 10, a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of reservations in the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 are used as winning histories of game balls to the start ports 314 and 315. It is possible to hold up to eight special figure success / failure information in order of winning.

  The special symbol execution area AE is a memory used to move special symbol success / failure information stored in the first special symbol reservation area RE1 when the symbol variation display in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. It is an area. Then, at the start of one first special figure game or second special figure game, the MPU 41 performs a big hit lottery based on numerical information and mode information stored as special figure success / failure information in the special figure execution area AE. When the lottery result is a jackpot, a lottery sort by lottery is performed based on the start opening information (special map information) stored as the special chart success / failure information. Also, when the special figure success / failure information of the first special figure reservation area RE1 is moved to the special figure execution area AE, the special figure success / failure information of the second special figure reservation area RE2 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 is prioritized. It shifts to the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the seventh special figure reservation area RE7 with one higher rank. In other words, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special figure success / failure information is stored in the first special figure reservation area RE1 in the order of winning regardless of whether the game ball wins the first start opening 314 or the game ball wins the second start opening 315. The special figure success / failure information is stored in the eighth special figure holding area RE8, and the special figure success / failure information is in the special figure execution area in the order of winning regardless of the winning of the game ball for the first starting port 314 and the winning of the game ball for the second starting port 315. By shifting to AE, the special figure game for the special figure success / failure information is executed. As described above, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is referred to as a so-called MAX8 with regard to the reservation and reservation digest (execution of the special figure game) of the special figure success / failure information.

  The normal random number storage area 412c has a random symbol counter C4 per ordinary symbol acquired by the MPU 41 at the timing when the passing of the game ball is detected by the incoming sensors 318a and 319a when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. This is a storage area for storing the counter value (random value). The normal random number storage area 412c does not store the counter value (random number value) of a plurality of random counters C4 per ordinary symbol, and the normal symbol changes at the timing when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319. The through gate 318 is provided on the condition that it is not displayed (the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 is not blinking), the jackpot game is not executed, and the electric support member 36 is not operated. , 319, the counter value (random value) of the random symbol counter C4 per ordinary symbol is stored each time the game ball passes. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the lottery per normal symbol is not put on hold like the jackpot lottery. Further, when the count value (random number value) of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol is acquired, the counter value of the random value initial value counter CIN2 per normal symbol is set as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol.

[Sub-control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 10, the sub-control unit 332 includes an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and a symbol variation display and symbol display on the symbol display unit 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331. The effect display is executed.

[Audio lamp control device 5]
The sound lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 51 includes a ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

  The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as voices used in special figure game effects, jackpot game effects, and lamp blink patterns. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The sound lamp control device 5 executes a process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, so that a command is sent to the display control device 6 based on a command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (Control signal) is output and the display of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled. The audio lamp control device 5 also controls the audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, when executing the game effect, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27.

  The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the sound lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5. Further, the sound lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the sound lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. In addition, a configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both functions of the sound lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also conceivable as another embodiment.

  The input / output I / F 52 is connected to a speaker 26, an electrical decoration unit 27, and a motor driver 39c. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the electrical decoration unit 27, and the like based on the command input from the main control device 4. Further, an operation switch 20a is connected to the input / output I / F 52. Thereby, MPU51 detects that operation was performed with respect to the operation button 20, and based on the detection result, the game effect performed by the symbol display part 341, the audio | voice output from the speaker 26, and an electrical decoration part It is also possible to control 27 blinking modes and the like.

  The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a hold command, and a shift command input from the main control device 4.

  Specifically, when a variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern and an effect type based on the variation pattern command, for example, and transmits a display variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern to the display control device 6. Then, the variation display of the main symbol in the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, in the symbol display unit 341, when the variation pattern command is a big hit lottery and the lottery result indicates a failure, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the loss is displayed. On the other hand, when the variation pattern command is a jackpot lottery and the lottery result indicates a jackpot, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. When the MPU 51 includes information on the jackpot type in the variation pattern command, the MPU 51 stores the information on the jackpot type in the RAM 512. When receiving the jackpot game start command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot game effect in the RAM 512. Refer to the stored information about the jackpot type.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a display variation pattern command or the like input from the sound lamp control device 5, thereby executing the main symbol variation display and the effect display. .

  The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and the audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. The voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 may be capable of bidirectional communication.

  The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 includes a ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  In the ROM 611, in addition to the control program, the opening used for the changing symbols such as the main symbols used in the symbol changing display of the symbol display unit 341, the notice effect image, the reach effect image, the jackpot effect image, the losing effect image, and the jackpot game effect. A plurality of types of images such as effect images, opening / closing execution effect images, and ending effect images are stored. Note that images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 include still images and moving images. The ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type of image to be used and the display timing, but also the change display time of change symbols. In the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays the image on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation display pattern command, thereby realizing the variation display and the effect display of the main symbol.

  The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (working area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Discharge Control Device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 includes a ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

  The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various types of information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

  As described above, the payout device 132 pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and a driving unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member that switches whether or not the game balls are paid out; A payout sensor 132b for individually detecting the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b.

  The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in accordance with an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to an amount set in advance within the range of the amount of money being lent to the player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 so that a predetermined number of game balls are received. To be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium incorporating an IC chip. The ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball launching mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated, thereby playing the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 into the launch rail 321. Feed on top. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the launch handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation amount, thereby directing the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. To fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that is switched ON / OFF at a preset period (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, one game ball is launched toward the game area every 0.6 sec.

  Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 determines that the launch intensity of the game ball from the game ball launching mechanism 32 increases as the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 22. The applied voltage to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so as to increase.

  Furthermore, the launch handle 22 includes a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for performing an operation for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The firing control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the game ball launching mechanism 32 stops firing the game ball. Thereby, for example, the shooting handle 22 is fixed in a state of being rotated, and a game in a situation where the player is not touching the shooting handle 22 is prevented. Further, the player can stop the launch of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at any timing with the thumb or the like while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power supply control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, a drive unit, and the like, a + 5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. The power supply control device 9 supplies the generated + 12V or + 5V voltage to the main control device 4, the audio lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, and the like.

  The power supply control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when returning the gaming machine 10 to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

  In addition, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that is charged by the power supplied from the power supply facility. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Moreover, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is interrupted, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

  Further, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply is cut off, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset 24V DC voltage based on the power supplied from the power supply facility, the power supply control device 9 is in a power outage state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22V. Judge. When the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like receive a power failure signal from the power supply control device 9, the current control is interrupted and a predetermined NMI interrupt process is executed.

[Process of main controller 4]
Next, processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is executed at the time of power-on startup processing, main processing executed after startup processing, periodically started main timer interrupt processing, and power failure. NMI interrupt processing or the like is executed. In the present embodiment, the description of the startup process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like is omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process are described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 14 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed every 2 msec, for example.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S <b> 1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining a detection state of a sensor or switch connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the incoming sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, 319a, etc. are determined. At this time, when the passing of the game ball is detected by any of the ball entering sensors 313a, 314La, 314Ra, 315a, 316a, 318a, and 319a, the MPU 41 stores the information as winning detection information in the RAM 412.

<Step S1002>
In step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol random number initial value counter CIN2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is set to 0. To do.

<Step S1003>
In step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the regular symbol random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to each of the counter values in the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the regular symbol random number counter C4, and these counter values reach the maximum value. If this happens, the counter value is set to zero.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
The MPU 41 executes a start winning process associated with winning a prize to the first starting port 314 or the second starting port 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control process (step S1005). Details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the launch control process, the game ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. Is a process of enabling On the other hand, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is processing to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch a game ball when the game ball launch is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 executes through gate processing. In the through gate process, the MPU 41 monitors whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, and when the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319, the MPU 41 stores the normal random number storage area 412c in the RAM 412. Update stored information. Details of the through gate processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Start-up winning process]
Here, the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has won a winning opening 314, 315 based on the detection results of the ball sensors 314La, 314Ra, 315a. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the start opening 314, 315 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined that the game ball has not won the start opening 314, 315. Then (step S1101: No), the start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number N stored in the special figure hold number storage area NA of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (8 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of reservations N is the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and moves the process to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, if the number of reservations N is not the maximum number of reservations (step S1102: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of reservations N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 stores the special figure success / failure information in an empty reserved area with a high priority among the first special figure reserved area RE1 to the eighth special figure reserved area RE8 of the special figure reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 that are updated in step S1003 of FIG. 14, and a variation type counter that is updated in step S1302 in the main process of FIG. The counter value with CS1 is acquired, and these counter values (numerical information) are stored in the special reserved / unusual information in the empty reserved area with high priority among the first special figure reserved area RE1 to the eighth special figure reserved area RE8 in the RAM 412. Store as. Further, the MPU 41 determines whether the current start winning is for the left first start port 314L, the right first start port 314R, or the second start port 315 based on the detection results of the ball entering sensors 314La, 314Ra, 315a. In addition to specifying whether or not there is, the start port information for the specified start ports 314 and 315 is stored in the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 as special figure success / failure information. Further, the MPU 41 turns on the gaming state (mode A to mode E) in the reserved game from which the numerical information has been acquired in steps S1912, S1919, S1923, S1928, and S1931 of the gaming state transition process shown in FIGS. The mode is specified based on the set mode type flag (mode A flag to mode E flag), and the mode information for the specified mode is used as the special figure success / failure information as the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure. Store in the reserved area RE8.

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 sets the contents of the special figure success / failure information before the special figure success / failure information acquired in step S1104 becomes the target of the jackpot success / failure determination in S1802 or S1803 of the special figure fluctuation start process shown in FIG. A hold command setting process for checking and setting a hold command based on the check result is executed. When the process in step S1105 is completed, the start winning process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S1005 in FIG.

[Through gate processing]
Here, the through gate process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1006 of FIG. 14 will be described with reference to FIG. In the through gate processing, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319 is monitored, and when the game ball passes through the through gates 318 and 319, the normal random number storage area 412c of the RAM 412 has a normal symbol hit. The counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C4 is stored.

<Step S1201>
First, in step S1201, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319 based on the detection results of the ball entering sensors 317a and 318a. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has passed through the through gates 318 and 319 (S1201: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1202, and when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has not passed through the through gates 318 and 319 ( S1201: No), the through gate process is terminated.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 displays the normal symbol in a variable display (the LED lamp of the normal symbol display 373) based on the normal symbol variable display flag set to ON in step S1412 of the normal symbol control process of FIG. It is determined whether the pair is blinking). When the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is being variably displayed (S1202: Yes), the through gate processing is terminated. That is, the MPU 41 does not execute the lottery per normal symbol during the normal symbol variation display, and does not start the operation of the electric support member 36. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol is not being variably displayed (S1202: No), the process proceeds to step S1203.

<Step S1203>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric support member 36 is in operation based on the electric agent in-operation flag set to ON in step S1508 of the ordinary electric agent control process of FIG. to decide. When the MPU 41 determines that the electric support member 36 is in operation (S1203: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the through gate process. That is, the MPU 41 does not execute the lottery per normal symbol while the electric support member 36 is operating. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the electric support member 36 is not operating (S1203: No), the process proceeds to step S1204.

<Step S1204>
In step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a jackpot game is being played. Whether or not the jackpot game is being played is determined based on whether or not the jackpot game state flag set to ON in step S1907 of the game state transition process of FIG. 23 is set to ON. When the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game is being played (S1204: Yes), the through gate process is terminated. That is, the MPU 41 does not execute the lottery per normal symbol during the big hit game, and does not start the operation of the electric support member 36. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that it is not in the jackpot game (S1204: No), the process proceeds to step S1205.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery per normal symbol in the jackpot game and the operation of the electric support member 36 are stopped, but the lottery per normal symbol and the electric support member 36 in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game are stopped. The operation may be stopped, and the lottery per normal symbol and the operation of the electric support member 36 may be stopped in the opening and opening / closing execution modes. That is, in the ending, the lottery per normal symbol and the operation of the electric support member 36 may be performed.

<Steps S1205 and S1206>
When the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S1202: No), the electric support member 36 is not in operation (S1203: No), and the jackpot game is not being played (S1204: No), the MPU 41 uses the random symbol counter C4 per normal symbol. Counter value (random value) is acquired (step S1205), this counter value (random number value) is stored in the regular random number storage area 412c (step S1206), and the through gate processing is terminated. That is, in order to perform a lottery per ordinary symbol for determining whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 on the condition that the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the electric support member 36 is not in operation, and is not in a big hit game. The random number value is obtained and stored.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, the main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main process, main control processes for the progress of the variable game and the jackpot game are executed. In the main process, the process of steps S1301 to S1308 is executed as a periodic process with a period of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps S1309 to S1311 is executed with the remaining time from the end of the process of steps S1301 to S1308 to the next period. The

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transmits an output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 14 or the previous main process to a control device such as the sub control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. Execute the process. For example, when a command such as a variation pattern command, a hold command, or a shift command is set in the RAM 412, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. If a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process in step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value in the variation type counter CS1, and sets the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S <b> 1303, the MPU 41 sets a prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred at the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316b, or the like based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. If a winning has occurred, a winning ball command indicating the number of winning balls to be paid out according to the winning is set in the RAM 412. Further, when the MPU 41 determines that a winning is occurring in the variable winning slot 316b based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 sets a variable winning slot winning command in the RAM 412. The variable winning award winning command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the main process. Thereby, the MPU 51 of the sound lamp control device 5 can display the number of game balls to be paid out (out of ball display) on the symbol display unit 341 in the big hit game.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a normal symbol control process. In the normal symbol control process, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 based on the counter value (random number value) of the random number counter C4 per normal symbol stored in the normal random number storage area 412c. Win a lottery. The details of the normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a normal electric accessory control process. In the normal electric accessory control process, the MPU 41 executes a process of operating the electric support member 36 for the operation time corresponding to the mode type (mode A to mode E) of the special figure gaming state. The details of the ordinary electric accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a special figure game control process for controlling a game in the variable game. The details of the special figure game control process will be described later. In the special figure game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and a variation pattern command necessary for the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 includes the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 14, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in steps S1302 and S1311. Based on each value, a variation pattern command indicating the variation display time and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is set in the RAM 412, and the variation display of the first special symbol display 371 and the second special symbol display 372 of the main display unit 37 is performed. And stop display control.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the big hit game control process, an opening / closing execution mode for controlling opening / closing of the opening / closing door 316c is executed. In this opening / closing execution mode, a round game that allows a game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316b is executed a plurality of times according to the jackpot type. Thereby, the player can acquire many game balls in the jackpot game. In addition, in the jackpot game control process, at the start of the jackpot game (when the opening starts), at the start of the opening / closing execution mode, at the end of the opening / closing execution mode (at the start of ending), at the end of the jackpot game (at the end of the ending) ) Etc., various flags and commands are set. For example, the MPU 41 sets commands such as a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, an opening / closing execution mode start command, an opening / closing execution mode end command, etc. in the RAM 412 according to the progress of the jackpot game, and the jackpot game start flag, jackpot game It controls on / off of flags such as an end flag, an opening / closing execution mode start flag, and an opening / closing execution mode end flag.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state based on the determination result of the jackpot lottery in step S1804 in the special figure variation start process of FIG. In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 41 transitions the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state and modes A to E when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 determines whether it is the next main process execution timing, that is, whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process. If the MPU 41 determines that it is the next main process execution timing (step S1309: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1301 and executes each process after S1301 described above. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that it is not the execution timing of the next main process (step S1309: No), until the next main process execution timing arrives, that is, until the next main process execution timing is reached. During the remaining time, steps S1309 to S1311 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that it is the execution timing of the next main process (step S1309: Yes).

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol random number initial value counter CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values in the jackpot random number initial value counter CIN1 and the normal symbol random number initial value counter CIN2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the MPU 41 sets the counter value to 0. To.

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value in the variation type counter CS1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is set to 0. Then, after updating the variation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the process to step S1309.

[Normal symbol control processing]
Here, FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the normal symbol control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. In the normal symbol control process, the MPU 41 determines whether to operate the electric accessory 36 based on the counter value (random number value) of the normal hit random number counter C4 stored in the normal random number storage area 412c. A lottery is performed and the display of fluctuations in normal symbols is controlled.

<Steps S1401 and S1402>
First, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value (random number value) of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal random number storage area 412c. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to perform a lottery per normal symbol as to whether or not to operate the electric support member 36. When the counter value (random number value) of the normal hit random number counter C4 is stored in the normal random number storage area 412c (step S1401: Yes), the MPU 41 stores the counter value (random number value) stored in the normal random number storage area 412c. ) Is deleted (step S1402), and the process proceeds to step S1403. On the other hand, when the counter value (random number value) of the normal hit random number counter C4 is not stored in the normal random number storage area 412c (step S1401: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1413.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode type is mode A, that is, whether or not the normal symbol lottery is performed based on the normal symbol low probability determination table (see FIG. 13C). When the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is mode A (step S1403: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the lottery per normal symbol is performed based on the normal symbol low probability determination table (see FIG. 13C), The processing moves to step S1404. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is not mode A (step S1403: No), that is, any of mode B to mode E, the normal symbol high-probability acceptance table (FIG. 13D) If it is determined that the process is performed based on ()), the process proceeds to step S1407.

<Steps S1404 to S1406>
When it is determined that the mode type is mode A (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the counter value of the non-short-time mode in the normal symbol variation display counter (step S1404). This counter value defines the normal symbol fluctuation display time in the non-short-time mode, and is set, for example, as a value corresponding to 30 seconds. Then, the MPU 41 performs lottery per normal symbol based on the normal symbol low probability acceptance table (see FIG. 13C) (step S1405), and determines whether or not the lottery result is a win (step S1406). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result is a win based on whether or not the counter value (random number) stored in the normal random number storage area 412c is 199.

  Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a win (step S1406: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1410, and when the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result is out (step S1406). : No), the process proceeds to step S1411.

<Steps S1407 to S1409>
When it is determined that the mode type is not mode A (step S1403: No), that is, when it is determined that the gaming state is any of mode B to mode E, the MPU 41 sets the counter value of the short time mode in the normal symbol variation display counter. Is set (step S1407). This counter value defines the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol in the short time mode, and the time during which the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 318 can win the second start port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36, For example, it is set to about 0.004 seconds to 0.2 seconds. Then, the MPU 41 performs lottery per normal symbol based on the normal symbol high probability acceptance table (see FIG. 13D) (step S1408), and determines whether or not the lottery result is a win (step S1409). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result is a win based on whether or not the counter value (random number) stored in the normal random number storage area 412c is 0 to 198.

  Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a win (step S1409: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1410, and when the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result is out (step S1409). : No), the process proceeds to step S1411.

<Step S1410>
If it is determined that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a win (Yes in step S1406 or step S1409), the MPU 41 sets the common symbol flag indicating that the lottery result is a win (step S1410). ). The common figure hit flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not to operate the electric support member 36 in step S1503 of the ordinary electric accessory control process of FIG.

<Steps S1411 and S1412>
In step S1411, the MPU 41 starts normal symbol fluctuation display (flashing of the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol indicator 373), sets the normal symbol fluctuation display flag to ON (step S1412), and controls the normal symbol control. End the process. The normal symbol variation display started here is the variation of the normal symbol set according to the mode type when the counter value of the variation symbol display time counter of the normal symbol set in step S1404 or step S1407 becomes zero. After the elapse of the display time, it is stopped and displayed in step S1415 described later.

<Step S1413>
When the counter value (random number value) of the normal hit random number counter C4 is not stored in the normal random number storage area 412c (step S1401: No), the MPU 41 displays the normal symbol variable display time set in step S1404 or step S1407. It is determined whether or not the counter value is 0 (step S1413). If the value of the variable display time counter is 0 (step S1413: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1414. If the value of the variable display time counter is not 0 (step S1413: No), the process proceeds to step S1418. .

<Step S1414>
When it is determined that the counter value of the normal symbol variation display time counter is 0 (step S1413: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the normal symbol variation display flag is set to ON (step S1414). . The normal map change display flag indicates whether or not the normal symbol is changing, and is set to ON in step S1412. In other words, when the counter value of the normal symbol variation display time counter is 0 (step S1414: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the normal diagram variation display flag is set to ON. Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the normal symbol. The MPU 41 proceeds with the process to step S1415 when the normal map change display flag is set to ON (step S1414: Yes), and when the normal map change display flag is set to OFF (step S1414: No), the normal map control process is terminated.

<Steps S1415 to S1417>
When the counter value of the normal symbol variation counter is 0 (step S1413: Yes) and the normal symbol variation display flag is set to ON (step S1414: Yes), it is the normal symbol stop display timing, so the MPU 41 The normal symbol is stopped and displayed by turning on or off the LED lamp pair of the normal symbol display 373 (step S1415). That is, the MPU 41 clearly indicates the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery in step S1405 or S1408 by the normal symbol stop display symbol. In addition, the MPU 41 sets a normal map change display flag indicating that the normal symbol is changing to OFF (step S1416), and sets a normal figure change stop flag to ON (step S1417). The normal figure fluctuation stop flag is a flag indicating that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol has been stopped, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing for operating the electric support member 36 in step S1501 of the normal electric accessory control process described later. Referenced to determine.

<Step S1418>
If the counter value of the normal symbol fluctuation counter is not 0 (step S1413: No), it is not the normal symbol stop display timing, so the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the normal symbol fluctuation display time counter, and the normal symbol. The control process ends.

[Normal electric accessory control processing]
Here, FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ordinary electric accessory control process executed in step S1305 in the main process of FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory control process, the MPU 41 executes a process of operating the electric support member 36 as the ordinary electric accessory for the operation time corresponding to the mode type (modes A to E).

<Step S1501>
First, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the general symbol variation stop flag set to ON in step S1417 of the normal symbol control process of FIG. 18 is set to ON, that is, at the timing of operating the electric support member 36. Judge whether there is. The MPU 41 sets the normal fluctuation stop flag to off (step S1502) when the usual figure fluctuation stop flag is set on (step S1501: Yes), and shifts the processing to step S1503. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1509 when the normal fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1501: No).

<Steps S1502 and S1503>
When the usual figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the normal fluctuation stop flag to OFF (step S1502), and whether or not the usual figure hit flag is set to ON. Is determined (step S1503). The normal symbol hit flag indicates that the lottery result in the normal symbol lottery is a win, and is set to ON in step S1410 of the normal symbol control process of FIG. The MPU 41 proceeds with the process to step S1504 when the flag for the usual figure is set to ON (step S1503: Yes), and when the flag for the usual figure is set to OFF (step S1503: Yes). The normal electric accessory control process is terminated.

<Steps S1504 to S1506>
If the usual hit flag is set to ON (step S1503: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether the mode type is any of mode A to mode C. When the MPU 41 determines that the mode type is any one of the modes A to C (step S1504: Yes), the MPU 41 performs a short operation of the electric support member 36 as the initial value of the electric accessory operation counter. A value is set (step S1505), and the process proceeds to step S1507. The initial value in the case of short operation is a value corresponding to, for example, 0.6 seconds. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode type is not any of mode A to mode C (step S1504: No), that is, when it is mode D or mode E, the electric support is used as the initial value of the counter value of the electric accessory operation counter. A value for operating the member 36 for a long time is set (step S1506), and the process proceeds to step S1507. The initial value in the long operation is set to a value corresponding to 6 seconds, for example.

<Steps S1507 and S1508>
In step S1507, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the electric support member 36, and further sets the electric accessory operating flag to ON (step S1508). The electric accessory operating flag indicates that the electric support member 36 is operating. In step S1511 to be described later, it is determined whether or not the electric support member 36 is to be returned from the operating position to the standby position. Referenced.

  Here, when the operation of the electric support member 36 is started, the electric support member 36 moves to the operation position protruding from the game board 31, and the right first start port 314R is covered by the electric support member 36 (FIG. 9 ( B)). In this state, the winning of the game ball released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 to the right first starting port 314R is restricted. On the other hand, the game ball released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 can be received by the electric support member 36. When the game ball released from the second passage 352 is received by the electric support member 36, the game ball is guided to the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36. In addition, the game balls flowing down the right side of the sorting device 35 can be received by the electric support member 36.

<Steps S1509 and S1510>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the electric accessory actuating counter whose initial value is set in step S1505 or S1506 is 0 when the usual figure change stop flag is set to OFF (step S1501: No). Determination is made (step S1509). The electric accessory operation counter indicates the remaining time for which the electric support member 36 is operated. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric support member 36 is not operating and the electric support member 36 is in the standby position. When the counter value of the electric accessory actuating counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1511. On the other hand, if the counter value of the electric accessory actuating counter is not 0 (step S1509: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the electric accessory actuating counter (step S1510) and ends the normal electric accessory control process. To do.

<Step S1511>
When the counter value of the electric accessory actuating counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes), that is, when the electric support member 36 that is an ordinary electric accessory is not operating, the MPU 41 turns on the electric accessory operating flag. It is determined whether it is set (step S1511). The electric accessory operating flag indicates that the electric support member 36 is operating, and is set to ON in step S1508. In other words, the MPU 41 determines whether the electric agent operating flag is set to ON when the counter value of the electric agent operating counter is 0 (step S1509: Yes). It is determined whether it is time to end the operation of the support member 36, that is, whether it is time to return the electric support member 36 from the operating position to the standby position. When the electric agent operating flag is set on (step S1511: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1512 and when the electric accessory operating flag is set off (step S1511: No), the ordinary electric accessory control process is terminated.

<Steps S1512 and S1513>
When the electric accessory operating flag is set to ON (step S1511: YES), the MPU 41 returns the electric support member 36 from the operating position to the standby position (step S1512). That is, the MPU 41 restricts the game ball from winning the second start port 315. Further, the MPU 41 sets the electric accessory operating flag indicating that the electric support member 36 is operating to OFF (step S1513), and ends the normal symbol control process.

  Here, when the electric support member 36 is returned to the standby position, the right first start port 314R is opened by the electric support member 36 (see FIG. 8C). In this state, the game ball released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 is allowed to win the right first starting port 314R but cannot be received by the electric support member 36. Therefore, the game balls released from the second passage 352 are restricted from entering the second start port 315. Also, the game ball flowing down the right side of the sorting device 35 cannot be received by the electric support member 36, and the ball entering the second start port 315 is restricted.

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine, as a starting unit that triggers a big hit lottery for shifting to a big hit game, a first starting unit capable of entering a game ball without receiving support of a normal electric accessory, Some have a second starter that allows a game ball to enter with the support of an ordinary electric accessory. In addition, as a gaming machine, there is a game machine in which game balls are alternately distributed to a first starter and a second starter by a sorting device.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game balls are distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution device 35, and the game balls are distributed to the second passage 352 by the distribution device 35. When the electric support member 36 is operated, the entry of the game ball into the right first start port 314R and the second start port 315 is permitted or restricted depending on whether or not the electric support member 36 is activated. Specifically, the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 are in the standby position without the electric support member 36 operating (see FIG. 8C), and the game balls to the right first starting port 314R. Is allowed to enter the second start port 315, while the game ball is restricted from entering. Further, when the electric support member 36 is activated and is in the operating position (see FIG. 9B), the entry of the game ball to the right first start port 314R is restricted while the second start port 315 is entered. Entering game balls is allowed. When the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, in addition to the game ball launched into the right region of the game board 31, the game ball released from the distribution device 35 also guides the second start port 315. be able to. As described above, the gaming machine 10 is different from the game machine 10 in which the game balls are distributed to the first start port and the second start port by the conventional sorting device. Further, the electric support member 36 of the gaming machine 10 is distributed to the second passage 352 as well as allowing or restricting the entry of the game ball into the second start port 315, unlike the conventional ordinary electric accessory. The game ball is allowed or restricted to enter the right first start port 314R of the game ball at the same time. Further, the single electric support member 36 can guide the game ball in the second passage 352 and the game ball that has been hit to the right to the second start port 315. And the gaming machine 10 can vary the entrance ratio of the right first starting port 314R and the second starting port 315 by the cooperation of the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the monotonousness of the game is reduced and the entertainment having new gaming characteristics is improved according to the control mode of the operation of the electric support member 36. For example, in the modes A to C, the electric support member 36 is short-actuated, and in the modes D and E (see FIG. 13B), the mode E most advantageous to the player as described above. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can be provided with a gaming property having a plurality of barriers with different difficulties. The electric support member 36 is a plate-like member and can be easily formed by resin molding or the like. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-described effects can be realized at a low cost with a simple configuration.

[Special figure game control processing]
Here, the special game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure game control process, the control of the special symbol variable display and stop display on the first special symbol display 371 or the second special symbol display 372, the setting of the data in the special figure storage area 412b, the management of the number of time reductions The process which performs etc. is performed.

<Step S1601>
In step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in the big hit game, and if it is in the big hit game (step S1601: Yes), the variable game control process is terminated, and the big hit game is not in progress. In the case (step S1601: No), the process proceeds to step S1602. For example, whether or not a jackpot game is executed is determined based on a jackpot game execution flag that the MPU 41 turns on at the start of the jackpot game and turns off at the end of the jackpot game.

<Step S1602>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed. If the symbol variability is being displayed (step S1602: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1603. If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1602: No), the process proceeds to step S1607. For example, whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner is set to ON in step S1810 in the special diagram fluctuation start process of FIG. 22 described later, and when the variable display time has elapsed (step S1603: Yes), This determination is based on whether or not the special figure fluctuation display flag that is set to OFF in step S1605 is set to ON.

<Step S1603>
In step S1603, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time since the start of the special symbol variation display has passed the variation display time determined according to the lottery result in the special symbol jackpot lottery. If it is determined that the time has elapsed (step S1603: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1604. If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1603: No), the special figure game control process. Exit.

<Steps S1604 to S1606>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1603: Yes), the MPU 41 uses the special symbol display units 371 and 372 that are currently displaying the variable in the first special symbol display unit 371 and the second special symbol display unit 372. The symbol corresponding to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery corresponding to the special figure game is stopped and displayed (step S1604). Furthermore, the MPU 41 sets the special figure fluctuation display flag to OFF (step S1605), and sets the special figure fluctuation stop flag indicating that the special symbol fluctuation has been stopped to ON (step S1606).

<Step S1607>
When the special symbol is not being variably displayed (step S1602: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of holds N stored in the special figure holding number storage area NA of the special figure holding storage area 412b is zero. (Step S1607). Here, the MPU 41 ends the special game control process when the number N of holds is 0 (step S1607: Yes). On the other hand, when the number N of holds is not 0 (step S1607: No), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1608.

<Step S1608>
In step S1608, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the special figure determination information stored in the special figure hold storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 ends the process of step S1608, the process proceeds to step S1609. Details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1609>
In step S1609, the MPU 41 causes the special symbol display units 371 and 372 to execute the variation display based on the special symbol success / failure information stored in the special symbol execution area AE, and causes the symbol display unit 341 to perform the variation display based on the special symbol success / failure information. A variation start process for setting a variation pattern command for execution is executed, and the special figure game control process is terminated. Details of the special figure variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1608 of FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG. In the data setting process, the data in the special figure hold storage area 412b of the RAM 412 is updated and the process is executed.

<Steps S1701 and S1702>
First, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the holding number N stored in the special figure holding number storage area NA of the special figure holding storage area 412b (step S1701), and further the first special figure holding area of the special figure holding storage area 412b. The special figure success / failure information is moved from RE1 to special figure execution area AE (step S1702).

<Step S1703>
In step S1703, the MPU 41 shifts the special figure success / failure information of the second special figure reservation area RE2 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 one by one. Specifically, in step S1703, the special figure success / failure information in the second special figure reservation area RE2 is moved to the first special figure reservation area RE1, and the special figure success / failure information in the third special figure reservation area RE3 is retained in the second special figure reservation area. Move to the area RE2, move the special figure holding information of the fourth special figure holding area RE4 to the third special figure holding area RE3, and change the special figure holding information of the fifth special figure holding area RE5 to the fourth special figure holding area RE4. , Move the special figure success / failure information of the sixth special figure reservation area RE6 to the fifth special figure reservation area RE5, and move the special figure success / failure information of the seventh special figure reservation area RE7 to the sixth special figure reservation area RE6. Then, the special figure success / failure information of the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 is moved to the seventh special figure reservation area RE7.

<Step S1704>
In step S1704, the MPU 41 sets in the RAM 412 a shift command indicating that the special figure success / failure information of the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 has been shifted. The shift command set in step S1704 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 41. Thereby, the display number etc. of the pending | holding symbol displayed on the symbol display part 341 are changed. When the process of step S1704 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process, and shifts the process to the special figure change start process of step S1609 of FIG.

[Special figure change start processing]
Here, an example of the special figure variation start process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1609 in FIG. 20 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Steps S1801 to S1803>
First, based on the mode information in the special figure success / failure information stored in the special figure execution area AE of the special figure reservation storage area 412b of the RAM 412, the MPU 41 determines whether the gaming state at the time of acquisition of the validity information is mode C or mode E. It is determined whether or not (step S1801). Here, in the mode C and the mode E, the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the special figure success / failure information stored in the special figure execution area AE is selected based on the high probability mode success / failure table. In this mode, it is determined whether or not the value is a corresponding value (see FIGS. 12B and 13B). That is, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the mode is a mode in which the determination is made based on the high probability mode determination table (see FIG. 12B). When the special figure gaming state is mode C or mode E (step S1801: Yes), the MPU 41 makes a determination of success / failure based on the high probability mode determination table (see FIG. 12B) (step S1802). On the other hand, when the gaming state is not mode C or mode E (step S1801: No), that is, when the gaming state is mode A, mode B or mode D, based on the low probability mode determination table (see FIG. 12A). A hit / no-go determination is made (step S1803).

<Steps S1804 and S1805>
In step S1804, the MPU 41 determines whether the determination result in step S1802 or S1803 is a big hit. When the result of the determination of success / failure is a jackpot (step S1804: Yes), the MPU 41 receives the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2 included as numerical information in the special chart success / failure information stored in the special figure execution area AE, and the special figure. Based on the start port information (special map information) included in the success / failure information, the jackpot type is sorted, and the process proceeds to step S1806. For example, when the starting port information (special map information) indicates the first starting port (first special diagram), it is set to either 2R normal jackpot or 2R probability jackpot depending on the counter value of the jackpot type counter C2. Sort the jackpot type. In addition, when the start port information (special drawing information) indicates the second start port (second special view), the 5R normal big hit, the 5R positive change big hit, and the 16R positive change big hit according to the counter value of the big hit type counter C2 The jackpot type is assigned to one of these. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big win (step S1804: No), that is, if the lottery result is out of play, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1806 without performing the big hit type distribution (step S1805).

<Step S1806>
In step S1806, the MPU 41 performs a lottery result flag setting process for setting a lottery result flag according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, that is, whether or not the winning determination is made in step S1802 or S1803, and the jackpot type distribution result in step S1805. Run. In this lottery result flag setting process, when the lottery result in the big win lottery is a 2R normal big hit, the 2R normal big hit flag is 2R positive variable big hit, and when the 2R positive variable big hit flag is 5R normal big hit, 5R. When the normal jackpot flag is 5R probability variation jackpot, the 5R probability variation jackpot flag is set. When the 16R probability variation jackpot is set, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set. Here, the 2R normal jackpot flag, the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 5R normal jackpot flag, the 5R probability variable jackpot flag and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag are flags indicating the lottery result and the jackpot type, as shown in FIGS. In the game state transition process, it is referred to when the game state is shifted from the jackpot game state to the mode B to the mode E after the jackpot game ends, and is set to OFF when the target mode is shifted to after the jackpot game ends. The Further, the out flag indicates that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is out, and is set to OFF in step S1813 described later. In step S1806, when the lottery result flag is set, the stop display symbols of the special figure indicators 371 and 372 of the main display unit 37 are also set according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery.

<Steps S1807 and S1808>
In step S1807, the MPU 41 displays a variation pattern indicating the variation display time of the special symbol on the special symbol display devices 371 and 372 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the special symbol game, and the reach random number counter C3 and the variation type counter. It is determined based on the counter value of CS1. Then, the MPU 41 sets a variation pattern command in the RAM 412 based on the variation pattern determined in step S1807 (step S1808). This variation pattern command may include a lottery result in a jackpot lottery for the special figure game. Of course, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery may be set as a command different from the variation pattern command without being included in the variation pattern command. The variation pattern command set in step S1808 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in step S1301 (see FIG. 17) of the next main process executed by the MPU 41. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 5 executes symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 based on the variation pattern command.

<Steps S1809 and S1810>
When the variation pattern is set, the MPU 41 starts the variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol indicators 371 and 372 (step S1809), and sets the special diagram variation display flag to ON (step S1810). The special symbol for which the variable display has been started is stopped after the variable display time (variation pattern) set in step S1807 has elapsed in the special figure game control process of FIG. 20 (step S1603: YES in FIG. 20). S1604). At this time, the special symbol stops at the stop display symbol set in step S1806 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery.

<Step S1811>
In step S1811, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time reduction flag set to ON in S1917 or S1926 in the gaming state transition process of FIG. 23 and FIG. 24 described later is set to ON, and the time reduction flag is set to ON. If it is set (step S1811: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1812, and if the time reduction flag is set to OFF (step S1811: No), the special figure variation start process is terminated.

<Step S1812>
When the time reduction flag is set to ON (step S1811: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the detachment flag is set to ON (step S1812: Yes). When the removal flag is set to ON (step S1812: Yes), that is, when the determination result in step S1802 or S1803 is failure, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1813. On the other hand, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1817 when the off flag is set to off (step S1812: No), that is, when the result of the determination in step S1802 or S1803 is a big hit.

<Steps S1813 to S1816>
When the out flag is set to ON (step S1812: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the out flag to OFF (step S1813), and S1917 or S1926 in the game state transition process of FIG. 23 and FIG. 24 described later. 1 is subtracted from the counter value of the hour / hour counter set when the hour / hour flag set to ON is set to ON (step S1814), and it is determined whether or not the counter value of the hour / hour counter after the subtraction is zero. (Step S1815). The counter value of the time reduction counter indicates the remaining number of time reductions. The MPU 41 sets the time reduction end flag to ON when the counter value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1815: Yes), that is, when the remaining time reduction count is 0 and it is necessary to end the time reduction mode. (Step S1816), the process proceeds to Step S1817. The time reduction end flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1909 of the gaming state transition process of FIG. 23 in order to determine whether or not to end the time reduction mode. On the other hand, when the counter value of the time counter after the subtraction is not 0 (step S1815: No), the MPU 41 ends the special figure variation start process.

<Step S1817>
The MPU 41, when the off flag is set to off (step S1812: No), that is, when the lottery result in the big win lottery is a big hit, or when the short time end flag is set to on (step S1816), the short time flag Is set to OFF (step S1817), and the special figure variation start process is terminated.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, the gaming state transition process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1308 in the main process of FIG. 17 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the gaming state transition process, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the gaming state is shifted from the special game state consisting of the modes A to E to the jackpot gaming state including the opening / closing execution mode, and in the jackpot gaming state After the end of the jackpot game, a process of shifting from the jackpot gaming state to any one of modes B to E in the special figure gaming state is executed according to the type of jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state ( (See FIG. 13A). In the game state transition process, in the special figure game state mode B or mode D, after executing the upper limit number of special figure games, a process of shifting to mode A is executed (see FIG. 13A). Since details of modes A to E have already been described, descriptions of modes A to E are omitted here.

<Steps S1901 and S1902>
First, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special figure variation stop flag set to on in step S1606 of the special figure game control process of FIG. 20 is set to on, that is, the special figure game has ended. It is determined whether or not it is time to shift the gaming state to another gaming state. If the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to on (step S1901: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the special figure fluctuation stop flag to off (step S1902), and the process proceeds to step S1903. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1901: NO), the process proceeds to step S1914.

<Step S1903>
In step S1903, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the variable display of the special symbol whose variation display has been stopped is a jackpot. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state. Whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot is determined by whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag, the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 5R regular jackpot flag, the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 16R chance variable are set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure variation start process of FIG. Judgment is made based on whether any one of the jackpot flags is set to ON.

  When the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result is a jackpot (step S1903: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1904, and when the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result is not a jackpot (out), (step S1903: No). The processing moves to step S1909.

<Steps S1904 and S1905>
In step S1904, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hourly flag set to ON in later-described step S1917 or S1926 is set to ON. The time reduction flag indicates that the time reduction mode is limited in number of times. If the MPU 41 determines that the time reduction flag is set on (step S1904: Yes), that is, if it is a big hit in mode B or mode D, the time reduction flag is turned off to end the time reduction mode limited in number of times. (Step S1905), and the process proceeds to step S1906. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the time reduction flag is set to OFF (step S1904: No), that is, if it is a big hit in mode A, mode C, or mode E, the process proceeds to step S1906.

<Steps S1906 and S1907>
In step S1906, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, and further sets the jackpot gaming state flag to ON (step S1907). The jackpot game state flag indicates that a jackpot game is being played, and is referred to, for example, to determine whether a jackpot game is being played in step S1204 in the through gate process of FIG.

<Step S1908>
In step S1908, the MPU 41 sets the mode type flag to OFF (step S1908), and sets the mode type flag to OFF (step S1908). The mode type flag indicates whether the mode type in the special figure gaming state is the mode A to the mode E. In this step S1908, the mode type flag is set to ON when shifting to the jackpot gaming state. Set the mode type flag to off.

  Note that the mode type flag is set to ON in step S1912 and is a mode A flag indicating mode A, is set to ON in step S1919 and is mode B flag to indicate mode B, and in step S1923. A mode C flag indicating ON and mode C is set, a mode D flag (see FIG. 24) indicating ON and mode D is set in step S1928, and ON in step S1931 And a mode E flag (see FIG. 24) indicating mode E is included.

<Step S1909>
If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the short time end flag set to ON in step S1816 of the special figure variation start process of FIG. 22 is set to ON. Is determined (step S1909). The time reduction end flag indicates that the upper limit number of special symbols has been executed in the time reduction mode with a limited number of times (the remaining number of time reductions is 0), and is a flag for ending the time reduction mode.

  If the MPU 41 determines that the time reduction end flag is set to ON (step S1909: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1910. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the time reduction end flag is set to OFF (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 ends the gaming state transition process without shifting to the mode A.

<Steps S1910 to S1913>
If it is determined that the time reduction end flag is set on (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time reduction end flag off (step S1910). Then, the MPU 41 shifts the mode type from mode B or mode D, which is the time reduction mode, to mode A (step S1911). At this time, the MPU 41 sets the mode A flag to ON (step S1912), and also sets the mode B flag or the mode D flag indicating the mode before shifting to mode A to OFF (step S1913). End the migration process.

<Steps S1914 and S1915>
In step S1914, when the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 is set to on in the jackpot game control process of step S1307 in the main process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the jackpot game end flag is set to ON, that is, whether or not it is a timing to shift to any of mode B to mode E when the jackpot game ends.

  When the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game end flag to OFF (step S1915), and the process proceeds to step S1916. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot game end flag is set to OFF (step S1914: No), the MPU 41 ends the game state transition process without performing the transition from the mode B to the mode E.

<Step S1916>
In step S1916, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag that is turned on in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type of the jackpot game that has ended is a 2R normal jackpot. When the 2R normal jackpot flag is set on (step S1916: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1917, and when the 2R normal jackpot flag is set off (step S1916: No) Goes to step S1921.

<Steps S1917 to S1920>
In step S1917, the MPU 41 sets a time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction mode is limited to the number of times to ON. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit number of time reductions as a time reduction counter. The number of time reductions is, for example, 50. In this case, “50” is set as the time reduction counter. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode B (step S1918) and sets the mode B flag to ON (step S1919). Further, the MPU 41 sets the 2R normal jackpot flag to OFF (step S1920), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Step S1921>
In step S1921, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the 2R probability variation jackpot flag that is set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure change start process in FIG. 22 is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type of the jackpot game that has ended is a 2R probability variation jackpot. When the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set on (step S1921: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1922, and when the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set off (step S1921: No), the process is performed. Goes to step S1925 of FIG.

<Steps S1922 to S1924>
In step S1922, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode C, and further sets the mode C flag to ON (step S1923). Then, the MPU 41 sets the 2R probability variation jackpot flag to OFF (step S1924), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Step S1925>
In step S1925 shown in FIG. 24, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure variation start process of FIG. 22 is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the type of the jackpot game that has ended is a 5R normal jackpot. When the 5R normal jackpot flag is set on (step S1925: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S1926, and when the 5R normal jackpot flag is set off (step S1925: No) Goes to step S1930.

<Steps S1926 to S1929>
In step S1926, the MPU 41 sets the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction mode is limited in number of times to ON. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the upper limit number of time reductions as a time reduction counter. The number of time reductions is, for example, 50. In this case, “50” is set as the time reduction counter. Then, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode D (step S1927) and sets the mode D flag to ON (step S1928). Further, the MPU 41 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to OFF (step S1929), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Steps S1930 to S1932>
In step S1930, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to mode E, and further sets the mode E flag to ON. That is, when the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes), when both the 2R normal jackpot flag, 2R probability variable jackpot flag and 5R normal jackpot flag are set to OFF (steps S1916, S1921 and S1925). No), it can be determined that either the 5R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is set to ON. Therefore, in step S1930, the MPU 41 shifts to the mode E that is the transition destination mode after the end of the 5R probability variable big hit game and the 16R probability variable big hit game, and sets the mode E flag to ON. Then, the MPU 41 sets the 5R probability variation jackpot flag or 16R probability variation jackpot flag that is set to off (step S1932), and ends the gaming state transition process.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of the voice lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51. For example, the MPU 51 executes the sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a period of 1 msec.

  As shown in FIG. 25, the MPU 51 performs an operation button operation detection process (step S2001), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S2002), a counter update process (step S2003), and a command determination process (steps) in the sub timer interrupt process. S2004), special figure game effect processing (step S2005), and jackpot game effect processing (step S2006) are executed.

[Operation detection processing]
In the operation detection process of step S2001, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the operation button 20, and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times, for example. In the gaming machine 10, when the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 51, the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in this embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt period of the sub timer interrupt process. The presence or absence of is determined.

[Operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the operation detection pattern determination process in step S2002, the MPU 51 sets an operation pattern flag corresponding to the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history for the past three times, for example. The operation state for the operation button 20 can be determined by the operation pattern flag. Examples of the operation state include an operation start state for the operation button 20, an operation continuation state for the operation button 20, an operation end state for the operation button 20, and a non-operation state in which the operation button 20 is not operated.

[Counter update processing]
In the counter update process in step S2003, the MPU 51 updates the effect type counter, the fluctuation display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the effect type counter, and sets the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the variation type and the effect type based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This variation display counter is for measuring the variation display time of the decorative symbol in the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value in the variation display counter is set to 0 when the remaining variation display time becomes zero. Is set. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variation display time, that the decorative symbol is changing, that the decorative symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 has ended, and the like.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process of step S2004, the MPU 51 determines a command received from the main control device 4, and executes a process corresponding to the command. For example, commands received from the main control device 4 include a variation pattern command, a hold command, a shift command, and the like. Commands other than these commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the sound lamp control device 5, but description of these commands will be omitted.

  The variation pattern command is a command indicating a variation display time and a lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is obtained when the special symbol display units 371 and 372 start the variation display of the special symbol based on the information stored in the special diagram storage area 412b. It is set in step S1808. When the MPU 51 receives the variation pattern command, the MPU 51 determines a special figure game effect or a jackpot game effect to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the like according to the content specified by the variation pattern command.

  The hold command is a command indicating the lottery result, the variation pattern, and the hold number N in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold when the hold number N stored in the special figure hold storage area 412b increases. The hold command is set in step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. 15 based on the information stored in the special figure hold storage area 412b when the number of holds N increases.

  The shift command is a command indicating that the special figure winning / notifying information indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first special figure reservation area RE1 to the eighth special figure reservation area RE8 is shifted when the number of reservations N decreases. is there. The shift command is set in step S1704 in the data setting process of FIG.

[Special figure game effect processing]
In the special figure game effect process of step S2005, in the special figure game, for example, the special figure game effect determined when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. Let it run.

[Big hit game effect processing]
In the jackpot game effect process of step S2006, in the jackpot game, for example, a jackpot game effect (opening effect, opening / closing execution mode effect and ending effect) determined when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. This is executed by the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a conventional game provided with a distribution device that distributes game balls to the first starter and the second starter having different functions from the first starter. Unlike the machine, a first start port 314 having the same function is disposed below the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. The gaming machine 10 is provided with an ordinary electric accessory (electric support member 36) as in the conventional gaming machine, but this electric support member 36 is downstream of the stage 310 where game balls are collected when the player strikes the right. The second passage 352 is formed in a plate shape having a delay portion 364 extending in series between the lower side of the game ball outlet of the second passage 352 (above the right first start port 314R). As a result, the electric support member 36 allows the game balls introduced to the sorting device 35 and distributed to the second passage 352 when left-handed to win the second start port 315 and at the stage when right-handed. The game balls collected in 310 can be awarded to the second starting port 315. In other words, the electric support member 36 allows or restricts the winning of the game ball to the second start port 315 according to the presence or absence of the operation, and simultaneously limits or restricts the winning of the game ball to the right first start port 314R. Tolerate. In other words, the electric support member 36 is different from the conventional electric machine of the gaming machine in that the game ball is awarded to the right first starting port 314R by restricting the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315. On the other hand, the winning of the game ball to the right first starting port 314R is limited by allowing the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315. In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a normal mode (mode A), a latent probability changing mode (mode C), and a short-time probability changing mode (mode E), which are adopted in the conventional gaming machine, as special figure gaming states. By cooperating with the device 35 and the electric support member 36, the playability in the latent probability changing mode (mode C) is improved.

  Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, left-handed is encouraged in modes A and C. When left-handed, a game ball enters the sorting device 35, and those game balls enter the first passage 351. And the second passage 352 are alternately distributed. On the other hand, in mode E, right-handed is encouraged, and by right-handed, the support by the electric support member 36 can be received for a long time and with high frequency. Only special figure games are executed. That is, in the mode E, the rate of entering the second start port 315 is 100% as in the short-term probability variation mode of the conventional gaming machine in which the high probability mode is executed by using the right hand without using the sorting device 35. It is.

  In mode A, the game balls distributed to the first passage 351 win the left first starting port 314L. Further, since the mode A is not the time reduction mode, the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 win the first right starting port 314R before the electric support member 36 operates. That is, in mode A, although the game balls are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution device 35, the game balls introduced into the distribution device 35 are the first start port 314 (left The first start opening 314L or the right first start opening 314R) is won. Therefore, in the mode A, the rate of entering the first start port 314 is 100%, as in the normal mode of the conventional gaming machine.

  On the other hand, in mode C, as in mode A, left-handed is encouraged. When left-handed, a game ball enters the sorting device 35, and these game balls are connected to the first passage 351. When the game balls are distributed alternately to the second passage 352 and the game balls are distributed to the first passage 351, the game balls win the left first starting port 314L. Further, since the mode C is a time reduction mode unlike the mode A, the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 are restricted from entering the right first starting port 314R by the operation of the electric support member 36. As a result, the second start opening 315 is won. That is, in the mode C, by left-handing, the distribution device 35 alternately distributes the game balls to the first start port 314 (left first start port 314L) and the second start port 315. Therefore, while the mode C is the latent probability changing mode, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first starting port 314 (left first starting port 314L) and the second starting port 315, and the first starting port (first left port 1 The entrance ratio between the starting port 314L) and the second starting port 315 is 50%: 50% unless the lottery result is out of the normal range.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the mode A (expected value is 0%), the mode C (expected value is 50%), and the expected values of the entrance ratios of the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315 are different. It has three game states of mode E (expected value is 100%). Therefore, it is possible to create a new gameability with improved gameplay based on three game states in which the expected value of the entrance ratio between the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 is different. In particular, since the gaming machine 10 is configured as MAX8, the hold is digested in the order of winning, so in mode C, the big win lottery at the first start port 314 and the big win lottery at the second start port 315 are alternately performed. The jackpot type can be received by winning the second start port 315 with a probability of 1/2, and the jackpot type can be sorted by winning the first start port 314 with a probability of 1/2. Can receive.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 enter the right first start port 314R in the mode A, and enter the second start port 315 in the mode C. Sphere. This is because the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 are allowed to enter the right first starting port 314R while being in a standby position where the electric support member 36 is not operated. 2 When the entry of the game ball into the start port 315 is restricted and the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the entry of the game ball into the right first start port 314R is restricted while the second start This is realized by arranging the electric support member 36 so that the game ball can enter the mouth 315 and different operating times of the electric support member 36 in mode A and mode C. . Thus, the electric support member 36 not only allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the second start port 315, but also allows the game ball distributed to the second passage 352 to enter the right first start port 314R. Simultaneously allow or restrict game balls. That is, in the mode A and the mode C, the ratio of the game balls entering the right first start port 314R and the second start port 315 is made variable by the cooperation of the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36. be able to. Thereby, the monotonousness of a game can be reduced, and the highly interesting game machine which has new game property according to the control aspect about operation | movement of the electric support member 36 can be provided.

  In the gaming machine 10, the delay guide 364 is provided in the electric support member 36 that guides the game ball to the second start port 315, so that, for example, in the gaming state (mode A or mode C) where left-handed is encouraged Even if a game ball is received by the electric support member 36 by making a right strike or the like, the delay guide 364 can ensure a long time until the game ball reaches the second start port 315. Accordingly, the game ball received by the electric support member 36 from the start of operation of the electric support member 36 to the return to the standby position can be prevented from reaching the second start port 315. By eliminating the advantage of right-handed in the state, the player can be actively left-handed.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. In the following other embodiments, the same configuration and the same procedure as the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals and the same step numbers, and The description below is omitted. It should be noted that the configurations and processing procedures of the first embodiment described above and the other embodiments described below may be selected and arbitrarily combined.

[Second to sixth embodiments]
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the game machine 10 is configured as a loop probability change machine and the special symbol game is executed in any one of the five game states of mode A to mode E has been described. On the other hand, the second to sixth embodiments are different from the first embodiment in the specifications of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the second to sixth embodiments will be individually described.

<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any one of the five game states of mode A to mode E has been described. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a special symbol game is executed in any of the three game states of mode A, mode C, and mode E. That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the special game state does not include the mode B and the mode D, which are time-limited modes with a limited number of times. In addition, since the special figure gaming state is composed of three modes A to C, the mode transition is also different from that of the first embodiment.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 26 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type allocation table, FIG. 26 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, and FIG. 26 (C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table. FIG. 26D is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, and FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of game state transition processing executed in the main processing of FIG.

  The jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. 26A is the same as that in the first embodiment. That is, also in this embodiment, the jackpot in the first special figure game due to the winning at the first starting port 314 is distributed to either the 2R probability variation jackpot or the 2R normal jackpot, and the first winning at the second starting port 315 is the first. The jackpot in the 2 special figure game is divided into 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot. Of course, the jackpot type distribution may be different from that in the first embodiment, and for example, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds of the jackpot game open / close execution mode can be changed as appropriate.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot type allocation table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C and mode E. The contents of these modes A, C and E are the same as those in the first embodiment. The game state is advantageous to the player in the order of mode E, mode C, and mode A.

  The mode transition table shown in FIG. 26C defines a transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. When the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are 2R regular jackpots and 5R regular jackpots, the mode shifts to mode A after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as an opportunity. When the lottery result is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the mode shifts to mode C after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as an opportunity. When the lottery results are 5R probability variation jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot, the mode E is entered after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as an opportunity. In other words, after the jackpot game executed when the lottery result is a jackpot, the mode is shifted to mode A in the case of a normal jackpot, and in the case of a promising jackpot in the winning for the first start ports 314L and 314R. The mode is shifted to mode C, and the mode E is shifted to the case where the probable big hit in the winning with respect to the second starting port 315 is made.

  FIG. 26D shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by making a left turn, and the distribution of the big hit type in the first special figure game is 2R normal big hit is 25%, 2R probability variable big hit is 75%. Therefore, mode A is basically shifted to mode A or mode C after the end of the jackpot game, the transition probability to mode A is 25%, and the transition probability to mode C is 75%.

  In mode C, the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately by left-handed. In addition, as described above, the distribution of the jackpot type in the first special figure game is 25% for the 2R normal jackpot and 75% for the 2R probability variation jackpot. On the other hand, in the distribution of the jackpot type in the second special figure game, the 5R probability variation jackpot is 25%, the 16R probability variation jackpot is 50%, and the 5R normal jackpot is 25%. Therefore, from mode C, it is possible to shift to any of mode A, mode C, and mode E after the jackpot game ends, the transition probability to mode A is 25%, and the transition probability to mode C is 37.5%. The probability of transition to mode E is 37.5%.

  In mode E, the second special figure game is executed by making a right-hand hit, and the distribution of the big hit type in the second special figure game is 25% for 5R probability variable jackpot, 50% for 16R probability variable jackpot, and 25 for 5R normal jackpot %. Therefore, mode C is basically shifted to mode A or mode E after the end of the jackpot game, the transition probability to mode A is 25%, and the transition probability to mode E is 75%.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, since the gaming machine 10 does not execute the mode B and the mode D, which are time-limited modes with a limited number of times, in the gaming state transition process of the present embodiment shown in FIG. When the special figure variation stop flag set to ON is set to ON (step S1900: Yes), steps S1903 and S1904 (see FIG. 23) regarding the time reduction flag in the gaming state transition process of the first embodiment described above. ) Is omitted, and when the lottery result is out, the game state transition process is terminated without performing the mode transition.

  On the other hand, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to off (step S1900: No), when the big hit game end flag set to on in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. 17 is set to on ( (Step S1914: Yes), the jackpot game end flag is set to OFF (step S1915), and processing for shifting from the jackpot game state to any one of mode A, mode C and mode E is executed according to the jackpot type (step S1915). S2001-S2009). Hereinafter, steps S2001 to S2009 will be described.

<Steps S2001 to S2003>
If the MPU 41 turns off the jackpot game flag when the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes, step S1915), the MPU 41 is the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state. It is determined whether the lottery result is a normal jackpot (2R normal jackpot or 5R normal jackpot) (step S2001). Whether or not the lottery result is a normal jackpot is determined by whether or not the 2R normal jackpot flag or the 5R normal jackpot that is set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure change start process in FIG. 22 is set to ON. .

  When the lottery result is a normal jackpot (step S2001: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts from the jackpot gaming state to the mode A of the special figure gaming state (step S2002), and sets the mode A flag to ON (step S2003). ), And the process proceeds to step S2009. On the other hand, when the lottery result is not normally a big hit (step S2001: No), the process proceeds to step S2004.

<Steps S2004 to S2006>
When the lottery result is not the normal jackpot (step S2001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 2R probability variable jackpot (step S2004). ). Whether or not the lottery result is a 2R probability variation jackpot is determined based on whether or not the 5R probability variation jackpot flag set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure variation start process of FIG. 22 is set to ON.

  When the lottery result is a 2R probability variation jackpot (step S2004: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts from the jackpot gaming state to the mode C of the special figure gaming state (step S2005), and sets the mode C flag to ON (step S2005). S2006), the process proceeds to step S2009. On the other hand, when the lottery result is not the 2R probability variation big hit (step S2004: No), the process proceeds to step S2007.

<Steps S2007 and S2008>
The MPU 41 can determine that the lottery result is a 5R-probable big hit or a 16R-probable big win if the lottery result is not usually a big jackpot (step S2001: No) and not a 2R probability variable big hit (step S2004: No). Therefore, the MPU 41 shifts from the jackpot gaming state to the mode E of the special figure gaming state (step S2007), sets the mode E flag to ON (step S2008), and shifts the processing to step S2009.

<Step S2009>
When the MPU 41 sets the mode type flag to ON (steps S2003, S2006, and S2008), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag to OFF (step S2009). That is, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag set to ON among the 2R normal jackpot flag, the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 5R normal jackpot flag, the 5R chance variable jackpot flag, and the 16R probability jackpot flag. When the jackpot type flag is set to OFF, the MPU 41 ends the gaming state transition process.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the special figure gaming state includes three modes of mode A, mode B, and mode E, and there is no time-limited mode (mode B, mode D) with a limited number of times. Further, when the lottery result is a normal jackpot, after the jackpot game with respect to the jackpot ends, the mode shifts to mode A which is a non-time-saving mode. For this reason, in this embodiment, the staying rate in the short-time mode is lower than that in the first embodiment described above. On the other hand, the time reduction mode is a mode in which a game ball can be expected to win the second start port 315 by the support of the electric support member 36, and therefore a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot that triggers the transition to the mode E is expected. it can. For this reason, since the staying rate in the time-saving mode becomes low, it is difficult to shift to the mode E that is the time-saving mode, and the game property is easily dropped to the mode A. Thereby, there is a sharpness with respect to the mode transition, and it is possible to provide a clear gaming machine with respect to the winning ball obtained by the player.

  In the present embodiment, the case where there are three modes of mode A, mode C and mode E has been described. However, in the case of three modes, three modes of mode A, mode B and mode D, mode A, mode B and There may be three modes of mode E, or three modes of mode A, mode C, and mode D. The special gaming state may be 4 modes or 6 modes or more. As an example when the special gaming state is 4 modes, 4 modes of mode A, mode B, mode C and mode D, 4 modes of mode A, mode B, mode C and mode E, mode A, mode B and mode There are four modes, D and mode E.

  The special figure game state may include modes other than the modes A to E. For example, in addition to Mode A and Mode E, the special figure game state includes a time reduction mode in which the number of time reductions is limited, for example, a time reduction number of about 1/40 to 1/10 of the jackpot probability. Also good. The fine time / short mode may include a difficult support time / short mode that is difficult to receive the support of the electric support member 36 and an easy support fine time / short mode that is easy to receive the support of the electric support member 36. The mode shifts to the hard support short time mode after the jackpot game for the jackpot in the mode A, and the easy support mode short time mode shifts to the jackpot game for the jackpot in the hard support mode. In addition, the mode A is shifted to after a predetermined number of special figure games have been consumed in the minute time reduction mode, and the mode E is a big hit lottery with a winning of a game ball to the second starting port 315, and the lottery result is a big hit. In this case, the game is shifted to after the jackpot game for the jackpot. The gaming machine 10 having the special game state 4 mode including the hard support fine time / short mode and the easy support fine time / short mode, for example, can be fallen from mode E to mode A so that the high-probability mode is determined as a jackpot winning / failing table. It is preferable to configure as ST or V-ST which has an upper limit on the number of times of lottery lottery based on the table.

<Third Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special figure gaming state is composed of five modes, Mode A to Mode E, and there is no upper limit on the number of continuations per probability variation is described. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the special figure gaming state is mode A, mode C and mode E, and the low probability mode determination table (see FIG. 12A). This is different from the first embodiment described above in that the number of big hits from the first hit, which is a big hit, continues up to a predetermined upper limit. That is, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a limit machine configured with three special mode game modes, Mode A, Mode C, and Mode E.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 28A shows an example of a jackpot type allocation table, FIG. 28B shows an example of a mode data table, and FIG. 28C shows an example of a mode transition table. FIG. 28D is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special figure change start process executed in step S1609 of the special figure game control process of FIG. 20, and FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the game state transfer process performed by step S1308 of a main process.

  The jackpot type distribution table shown in FIG. 28A defines the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. Unlike the first embodiment, there are three types of jackpot types in this embodiment: 2R probability variation jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot, and all jackpots are probability variation jackpots. However, when the number of jackpots from the beginning reaches the upper limit, the jackpot is normally treated as a jackpot, and after the jackpot game ends, the jackpot lottery based on the low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 12A) The mode is forcibly shifted to the mode A in which is performed.

  In addition, the jackpot in the first special figure game by winning the first starting port 314 is divided into either 2R probability variation jackpot or 5R probability variation jackpot, and the allocation ratio between 2R probability variation jackpot and 5R probability variation jackpot is 75:25. is there. That is, in the big win in the first special figure game, there is no distribution of 16R probability variation big hit that can be expected to acquire a large amount of game balls, and the distribution of 2R probability variation big hit with a small expected value of the obtained game balls is large, We cannot expect a lot of game balls. On the other hand, the jackpot in the second special figure game by winning the second starting port 315 is distributed to either 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, and the allocation ratio between 5R probability variation jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot is 50:50. is there. That is, in the big win in the second special figure game, there is no distribution of the 2R probability variation big hit, and a large amount of game balls can be expected.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (B), the mode data table specifies the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot type allocation table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C and mode E. The contents of these modes A, C and E are the same as those in the first embodiment. The game state is advantageous to the player in the order of mode E, mode C, and mode A.

  The mode transition table shown in FIG. 28C defines a transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the jackpot corresponding to the number of jackpots set at the time of first win is won, and the mode shifts to mode A after the last jackpot game ends. It should be noted that until the jackpot number corresponding to the number of jackpots set at the time of the first win is won, the player does not fall into mode A unless the remaining jackpot number stored in the RAM 412 is erased. Further, except after the end of the last jackpot game, the mode shifts to the mode C after the jackpot game with respect to the jackpot in the first special figure game by winning the first start port 314, and by the winning to the second start port 315 After the jackpot game for the jackpot in the second special figure game is over, the mode E is entered.

  FIG. 28D shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, as described above, it is not possible to expect a winning at the second starting port 315, and the first special figure game by winning at the first starting port 314 is executed. Except for, shift to 100% mode C. In addition, since it shifts to mode A after the end of the last jackpot game, it does not shift to mode A after the jackpot game for the jackpot in mode A ends.

  In mode C, the first special figure game by winning the first start port 314 and the second special figure game by winning the second start port 315 are executed alternately by left-handed. Therefore, except for the end of the last jackpot game, in the case of a big win in the first special figure game, the mode shifts to the mode C after the big hit game ends, and the second special figure game by winning the second start opening 315 In the case of a big hit, the mode E is entered after the big hit game ends. In mode C, since the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately, the transition probability to mode C is 50% and the probability of transition to mode E, except in an irregular case. Is 50%.

  In mode E, the second special figure game is executed by making a right strike. Therefore, the mode E shifts to the mode E after the end of the big hit game.

[Special figure change start processing]
Since the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a limit machine, the special figure change start process is different from the special figure change start process (FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure variation start process of the present embodiment, steps S1811 to S1817 related to the time reduction flag and the time reduction counter are omitted in the special figure fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above. When the special figure variation display flag is set to ON (step S1810), the gaming state transition process is terminated. The special figure variation start process of the present embodiment includes step S1805 for distributing the jackpot type in the special figure fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above, and a variation pattern setting process (step S1807). In the case of the lottery result flag setting process (step S1807), when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, the special figure type for setting the big hit type flag and the special figure type that is the target of the big hit lottery The difference is that a flag is set (steps S2101 and S2102), and further, the step of monitoring the number of probability variation big hits (steps S2103 to S2107) is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the special figure game state does not include the mode B and the mode D which are time-limited modes with a limited number of times, and therefore, in the special figure variation start process of the present embodiment, the special figure of the first embodiment described above. Hereinafter, steps S2101 to S2107 in the variation start process will be described.

<Step S2101>
The MPU 41 sets a jackpot type flag when the jackpot type is sorted (step S1805) (step S2101). Specifically, the MPU 41 sets any of the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to ON according to the jackpot type assigned in step S1805. Note that in this step S2101, unlike the lottery result flag setting process in step S1806 in the special figure variation start process in FIG. 22 in the first embodiment described above, the out flag required for counting the number of time reductions is set. Not.

<Step S2102>
The MPU 41 sets a special figure type flag that identifies the special figure type that is the target of the big hit lottery (step S2102). Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the first special figure jackpot flag to ON when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first special figure game is a big jackpot, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the second special figure game. Is a jackpot, the second special figure jackpot flag is set to ON.

<Steps S2103 to S2107>
In step S2103, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the remaining set number M with respect to the jackpot upper limit number (initial set number Mmax) set in next step S2104 is zero. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current jackpot is the first hit. When the remaining set number M is 0 (step S2103: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the initial set number Mmax as the remaining set number M (step S2104), and the process proceeds to step S1807. The initial set number Mmax is, for example, a predetermined number of sets from a range of 3 to 10 times.

  On the other hand, when the remaining set number M is not 0 (step S2103: No), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the remaining set number M (step S2105), and whether the remaining set number M after subtraction is 0 or not. Is determined (step S2106). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current jackpot is the final jackpot with the initially set jackpot. The MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to ON when the remaining set number M after the subtraction is 0 (step S2106: Yes), that is, when the current jackpot is the final jackpot with the initially set jackpot. (Step S2107), the process proceeds to step S1807. The jackpot limit flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot of the number of times corresponding to the initial set number Mmax set in step S2104 is won, that is, the current jackpot is the final jackpot in the initially set jackpot. This jackpot limit flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not to shift to mode A in step S2202 in the gaming state transition process of FIG. The MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to ON when the remaining set number M after subtraction is not 0 (step S2106: No), that is, when the current jackpot is not the final jackpot that was initially set. Then, the process proceeds to step S1807.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment does not include the mode B and the mode D, which are time-limited modes with a limited number of times, as the special figure gaming state. Therefore, in the gaming state transition process of the present embodiment shown in FIG. In the gaming state transition process (see FIG. 23) of the first embodiment, the step relating to the time reduction mode is omitted, and the step of shifting to the mode B and the mode D is omitted. Also, in the gaming state transition process of the present embodiment, when the final jackpot with the initially set jackpot, the mode shifts to mode A, and the jackpot lottery that triggers the transition to the jackpot gaming state is performed Accordingly, the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the mode is shifted to the mode C or the mode E (steps S2201 to S2212). Hereinafter, steps S2201 to S2212 will be described.

<Step S2201>
If the jackpot game flag is turned off when the jackpot game end flag is set to on (step S1914: Yes, step S1915), the MPU 41 is set to on at step S2101 of the special figure change start process of FIG. The big hit type flag is set to OFF (step S2001). That is, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type flag set to ON among the 2R probability variable jackpot flag, the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to be turned off when the jackpot game ends.

<Steps S2202 to S2205>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot limit flag set to ON in step S2105 of the special figure variation start process of FIG. 29 is set to ON (step S2202). That is, the MPU 41 is the final jackpot for the initial set number Mmax set in step S2104 of the special figure variation start process of FIG. 29, and the MPU 41 is in the mode A of the special figure gaming state after the jackpot game is finished. It is determined whether or not the big hit limit flag for shifting to is set to ON. When the jackpot limit flag is set to on (step S2202: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the jackpot limit flag to off (step S2203) and shifts from the jackpot gaming state to mode A (step S2204). The A flag is set to ON (step S2205), and the gaming state transition process ends.

<Steps S2206 to S2009>
In the MPU 41, the jackpot limit flag is set to off (step S2202: No), and the first special figure jackpot flag set to on in step S2102 in the special chart fluctuation start process of FIG. 29 is set to on. It is determined whether or not there is (step S2206). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition of the jackpot game is for the first special figure game.

  When the first special figure jackpot flag is set to on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the first special figure jackpot flag to off (step S2207), and mode C in the special figure gaming state. (Step S2208), the mode C flag is set to ON (step S2209), and the gaming state transition process is terminated. On the other hand, when the first special figure jackpot flag is set to OFF (step S2206: No), the process proceeds to step S2010.

<Steps S2210 to S2212>
When the first special figure jackpot flag is set to off (step S2206: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the second special figure jackpot flag is set to on, so the second special figure jackpot flag is turned off. In addition to setting (step S2210), the mode is shifted to the mode E of the special figure gaming state (step S2211), the mode E flag is set to ON (step S2212), and the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  Thus, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the special figure gaming state is the three modes of mode A, mode C, and mode E, which have different advantages for the player, and the jackpot number from the beginning is pre-set. Continue to the upper limit set. The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a different mode transition destination depending on whether it is a big hit in the first special figure game or a big hit in the second special figure game. For this reason, in this embodiment, with the remaining number of sets after the first hit (initial set number Mmax-1), in mode E in which a large amount of game balls can be expected, how many sets of jackpots remain. It is possible to provide the gaming machine 10 having a game characteristic of shifting to the 16R jackpot game after shifting to mode E.

  In this embodiment, when the big win is made in the first special figure game in the mode A, 100% is transferred to the mode C after the big jackpot game is finished. However, in the case of the big win in the first special figure game in the mode A, It is also possible to shift to mode C at a constant rate, for example, 50%, and loop mode A at the remaining rate. By doing so, it is possible to provide a game property in which mode A, which is disadvantageous for the player, may be looped. As a result, when the mode is shifted to mode C, how much a large number of sets remain with a big hit. Not only the game characteristic of shifting to mode E where the acquisition of game balls can be expected, but also the game characteristic of how to shift to mode C that can be expected to shift to mode E while leaving a big hit of the number of sets Can be provided.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any one of the five game states of mode A to mode E has been described. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as a special figure gaming state, in addition to mode A, mode C ′ and mode E ′, which are high probability modes with a high probability of winning a lottery result in jackpot lottery and time-limited modes with a limited number of times, are set. 3 modes including. In addition, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is an ST machine that shifts to a time-limited mode (mode C ′ or mode E ′) with a limited number of times after the jackpot game is over while all jackpot types have a probable big hit.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. Here, FIG. 31 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type allocation table, FIG. 31 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a mode data table, and FIG. 31 (C) is a diagram showing an example of a mode transition table. FIG. 31D is a diagram showing an example of mode transition, and FIGS. 32 and 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the game state transition process executed in step S1308 of the main process of FIG.

  As shown in the jackpot type allocation table in FIG. 31 (A), the jackpot in the first special figure game due to winning the first starting port 314 is distributed to the 2R probability variation jackpot, and according to the winning to the second starting port 315 The jackpot in the second special figure game is distributed to 16R probability variation jackpot. That is, in this embodiment, all jackpots are probable variation jackpots, and the jackpot type is distributed according to the special figure type. Of course, in the jackpot type distribution, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game can be appropriately changed. It is also possible to be distributed at the rate of.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C 'and mode E'. The contents of mode A are the same as in the first embodiment. The mode C ′ and the mode E ′ are the same as the mode C and the mode E of the first embodiment except that the mode is a time-saving mode with a limited number of times. That is, the mode C ′ and the mode E ′ are a high-probability mode and a time-limited mode in which the number of lottery results in the jackpot lottery is high and the number of times is limited. Here, the upper limit number of time reductions in mode C ′ and mode E ′ is set to be approximately the same as the upper limit number of time reductions in mode B and mode D of the first embodiment described above, and is, for example, 50 times. The game state is advantageous to the player in the order of mode E ′, mode C ′, and mode A.

  The mode transition table shown in FIG. 31C defines a transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In the mode C ′ and the mode E ′, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot gaming state, the mode A is shifted to. When the lottery result is a 2R probability variation jackpot, the mode C 'is entered after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as an opportunity. If the lottery result is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the mode E 'is entered after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as an opportunity. That is, after the time-limited mode with a limited number of times is completed, the mode C 'or the mode E' falls from the mode A to the mode A. In the case of a 16R probability variation jackpot in winning a prize for the start port 315, the mode E 'is entered.

  FIG. 31D shows an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for an irregular case, the first special figure game is executed by making a left turn, and the distribution of the big hit type in the first special figure game has a 2R probability variable big hit of 100%. Therefore, the mode A shifts to the mode C ′ after the jackpot game executed with the jackpot as an opportunity.

  In mode C ', the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately by left-handed. Further, as described above, in the first special figure game, 100% is allocated per 2R probability variation jackpot, and in the second special figure game, 100% is allocated per 16R probability variation jackpot. Therefore, from the mode C ′, when the lottery result is a big hit before the time-saving mode ends, the mode is shifted to either the mode C ′ or the mode E ′ after the big hit game executed with the big hit as an opportunity. The As described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed in the mode C ′ without shifting to the jackpot gaming state, the mode C ′ is shifted to the mode A.

  In mode E ′, the second special figure game is executed by making a right-hand hit. Since the jackpot type distribution in the second special figure game is 100R probability variable jackpot is 100%, from mode E ′, After the jackpot game executed at the end of the game, the mode E ′ is entered. As described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot gaming state in the mode E ′, the mode E ′ is shifted to the mode A.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that there are two types of jackpot types, a 2R probability variation jackpot and a 16R probability variation jackpot. Depending on the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, either a 2R probability variation jackpot flag, a 16R probability variation jackpot flag or a miss flag is set as the lottery result flag. Further, in the present embodiment, the special figure gaming state is the three modes of mode A, mode C ′ and mode E ′. Therefore, in the gaming state transition process of the present embodiment shown in FIGS. The game state transition process (see FIGS. 23 and 24) of the embodiment is different from the process for mode transition (steps S2301 to S2308). Hereinafter, steps S2301 to S2308 will be described.

<Step S2301>
In step S2301 shown in FIG. 32, when the time reduction mode ends and the MPU 41 shifts from mode C ′ or mode E ′ to mode A (steps S1908 to S1912), the mode C ′ flag or mode set to ON. Set the E 'flag off.

<Steps S2302 to S2305>
In step S2302 shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag and the time reduction when the jackpot game end flag set to ON in the jackpot game control process in step S1307 of the main process in FIG. When the flag is set to OFF (step S1914: YES, steps S1915 and S1917), it is determined whether or not the 2R probability variation jackpot flag set in step S1806 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 22 is set to ON. . That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 2R probability variation jackpot.

  When the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON (step S2302: Yes), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 2R probability variable jackpot, The mode is shifted to mode C ′ in the gaming state (step S2303), and the mode C ′ flag is set to ON (step S2304). Next, the MPU 41 sets the 2R probability variation jackpot flag to OFF (step S2305), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Steps S2306 to S2308>
When the 2R probability variable jackpot flag is set to off (step S2302: No), that is, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is 16R probability variable jackpot, The mode is shifted to mode E ′ in the gaming state (step S2306), and the mode E ′ flag is set to ON (step S2307). Next, the MPU 41 sets the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to OFF (step S2308), and ends the gaming state transition process.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in order to shift to the mode E ′ that is most advantageous to the player, it is necessary to go through the mode C ′. That is, in order to shift to the mode E ′, it is necessary to make a big hit in the second special figure game after the shift to the mode C ′ at the beginning and before the end of the time-saving mode. And since the jackpot in the first special figure game in mode A and the first special figure game in mode C ′ is a 2R probability variation jackpot, a small amount of game balls can be obtained in the jackpot game and stay in mode A and mode C ′. In the meantime, an increase in game balls cannot be expected. On the other hand, in the right-handed mode E ', since 100% 16R probability variation jackpot, a large amount of game balls can be expected in the jackpot game. Therefore, in this embodiment, after shifting to the mode C ′ after the first hit, how quickly the jackpot is acquired in the second special figure game and the mode E ′ in which a large amount of game balls can be expected is transferred. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that has game characteristics, and further has a game characteristic of how many jackpots are acquired in a time-saving mode after a transition to mode E ′ to acquire a large amount of game balls.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any one of the five game states of mode A to mode E has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, the special game state is the three modes of mode A, mode C ′ and mode E ′ as in the fourth embodiment described above. In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment shifts to the time reduction mode with a limited number of times after the end of the probabilistic jackpot game, on condition that the game ball wins the V winning opening of the special variable winning device in a specific round of the probable jackpot game. It is a V-ST machine.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 34 is a front view showing an example of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and FIGS. 35 (A), 35 (C) and 35 (E) are the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. FIG. 35 (B) and FIG. 35 (D) are plan views showing the main part of the special variable winning device 82, and FIG. 36 (A) is a jackpot type allocation table. FIG. 36B is a diagram showing an example of the mode data table, FIG. 36C is a diagram showing an example of the mode transition table, and FIG. 36D is a diagram showing an example of the mode transition. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game control process executed in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. 17, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are the procedures of the opening / closing execution mode control process executed in the jackpot game control process of FIG. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of And Figure 41 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a gaming state transition processing executed in step S1308 of the main process of FIG. 17.

As shown in FIG. 34, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a special variable winning device 82 provided on the gaming board 31. The special variable winning device 82 is provided below the variable winning opening 316b.
As shown in FIGS. 35 (A) to 35 (D), the special variable prize-winning device 82 has an inlet 821 for introducing the game ball 99 into the special variable prize-winning device 82, and a closure for closing the inlet 821. Between the position and the open position where the introduction port 821 is opened, a movable tongue 822 that is advanced and retracted with respect to the game board 31 by a drive means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back surface of the game board 31 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 35 (A) and 35 (B), when the movable tongue 822 is in the standby position and the introduction port 821 is closed by the movable tongue 822, the game ball 99 is a special variable winning device. 82 is not introduced inside. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 35 (C) and 35 (D), when the movable tongue 822 is in the open position and the introduction port 821 is opened, the game ball 99 is inside the special variable winning device 82. Can be introduced. In addition, in a state where the special variable prize winning port 39 is not operated, the introduction port 821 is closed by the movable tongue 822. On the other hand, the introduction port 821 is opened by operating the movable tongue 822 in the V winning round described later in the jackpot game.

  As shown in FIGS. 35 (C) and 35 (E), inside the special variable winning device 82, a movable claw portion 823, a V winning port 824, and a normal winning port 825 are provided. Each of the V winning port 824 and the normal winning port 825 is provided with a ball sensor (not shown), and it is detected by these ball sensors that a game ball has won the V winning port 824 or the normal winning port 825. Is done. The movable claw portion 823 is rotated by a driving means such as a solenoid (not shown) between a left inclined position for guiding the game ball 99 to the V winning opening 824 and a right inclined position for guiding the game ball 99 to the normal winning opening 825. Is done. In a state where the special variable winning opening 39 is not actuated, the movable claw portion 823 is in a left inclined state and stands by in a state where the game ball 99 is guided to the V winning opening 824. The movable claw portion 823 changes from the left inclined state to the right inclined state when it is detected that the game ball 99 has won the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round to be described later that operates the special variable winning device 82. It is rotated. When the V winning round for operating the special variable winning device 82 is completed, the movable claw portion 823 returns to the left inclined state and stands by in a state where the game ball 99 is guided to the V winning opening 824.

  As shown in the jackpot type allocation table in FIG. 36 (A), the jackpot in the first special figure game by winning the first start port 314 is allocated to the 4R normal jackpot or the 5R probability variable jackpot. In the 4R normal jackpot game, the first to fourth round games are executed as a game in which a game ball is won in the variable winning opening 316b, and the V winning round game in which the special variable winning device 82 wins the game ball is not executed. . Therefore, in the 4R normal jackpot game, the game ball cannot be won in the V winning opening 824, and the mode does not shift to the time reduction mode. On the other hand, in the 5R probability variable big hit game, for example, the first to fourth rounds are executed as a game in which a game ball is won in the variable winning opening 316b (see FIG. 4), and the fifth round game is a V prize. It is executed as a round game. Therefore, in the 5R probability variable jackpot game, the player can shift to the short-time mode after the jackpot game is ended by winning the game ball 99 in the V winning port 824 of the special variable winning device 82 in the fifth round game. it can. In addition, if the fifth round game is executed as a V winning round game, whether or not the 5R round game which is a V winning round game is executed after the end of the fourth round game is 4R normal big hit or 5R You can know if it is a promising jackpot. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced by executing a promotion effect (including a failure effect) after the end of the four-round game.

  On the other hand, the jackpot in the second special figure game due to the winning at the second start port 315 is distributed to 10R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot. In the 10R probability variable jackpot game and the 16R probability variable jackpot game, a specific round game is a V winning round game. There may be at least one specific round game, and there may be two or more. Further, when the jackpot type in the mode E ′ is 10R probability variation jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot, for example, 10 rounds are set as a specific round game. By doing this, it is possible to know after the end of the V winning round game whether there are 11 rounds after the V winning round game is executed, that is, whether the jackpot type is 10R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game by executing a promotion effect from 10R probability variation jackpot to 16R probability variation jackpot after the execution or termination of the 10 round game. Note that in the jackpot type distribution, the number of jackpot types and the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game can be changed as appropriate.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (B), the mode data table defines the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C 'and mode E'. The contents of mode A are the same as in the first embodiment. Further, in mode A, the first special figure game is executed by making a left turn, so the probability change expectation when the lottery result is a big hit in mode A is 50%. The mode C ′ and the mode E ′ are the same as the mode C and the mode E in the first embodiment described above except that they are time-limited modes with a limited number of times, and are the same as those in the fourth embodiment described above. . In mode C ′, game balls are alternately distributed to the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 by left-handed, so the probability change expectation when the lottery result is a big hit in mode C ′ is 75%. In the mode E ′, the second special figure game is executed by making a right strike, and therefore the probability variation expectation when the lottery result is a big hit in the mode E ′ is 100%. Thus, in the present embodiment, there are three modes with different probability of expected change, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player in the order of mode E ′, mode C ′, and mode A.

  The mode transition table shown in FIG. 36C defines the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. In the mode C 'and the mode E', when the special figure game of the upper limit number is executed without shifting to the jackpot game state, when the lottery result is 4R probability variable jackpot, when the jackpot game is finished, and when the lottery result is the probability change jackpot In this case, when the big hit game is finished without the game ball 99 winning the V winning opening 824, the mode A is entered. When the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot, the game shifts to the mode C ′ after the jackpot game is completed on condition that the game ball 99 wins the V prize opening 824 in the V prize round game of the jackpot game. When the lottery result is a 10R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the game shifts to the mode E ′ after the jackpot game is completed on condition that the game ball 99 wins the V prize opening 824 in the V winning round game of the jackpot game.

  FIG. 36D illustrates an example of mode transition from each mode. In mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by making a left turn, and the distribution of the big hit type in the first special figure game is 50% for 5R regular big hit, 50%. Therefore, the mode A is shifted to the mode A at a rate of 50% and the mode C ′ at a rate of 50% after the jackpot game is over.

  In mode C ', the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately by left-handed. In addition, as described above, in the first special figure game, it is distributed at a rate of 50% per 4R normal jackpot, 50% per 5R probability variation jackpot, and in the second special figure game it is 25% per 10R probability variation jackage and 75% per 16R probability variation jackpot. It is distributed at the rate of. Therefore, from the mode C ′, when the lottery result is a big hit before the time reduction mode ends, the mode shifts to any one of the mode A, the mode C ′, and the mode E ′ after the big hit game ends. As described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot gaming state in the mode C ′, the mode C ′ is shifted to the mode A.

  In mode E ′, the second special figure game is executed by making a right stroke, and the distribution of the jackpot type in the second special figure game is 25% for 10R probability variation jackpot and 75% for 16R probability variation jackpot. From E ′, on the condition that the game ball 99 wins the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round game of the jackpot game, the mode shifts to the mode E ′ after the end of the jackpot game. Note that, as described above, the game ball 99 wins the V winning opening 824 when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot gaming state in the mode E ′ and in the V winning round game of the jackpot game. If the big hit game is finished without any change, the mode E ′ is shifted to the mode A.

[Big hit game control processing]
Here, in the present embodiment, there are four types of jackpot types, 4R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 10R probability variation jackpot, and 16R probability variation jackpot, which are different from those of the first embodiment described above. In the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the start process, according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery, as the lottery result flag, the 4R normal big hit flag, the 5R positive variable big hit flag, the 10R positive variable big hit flag, the 16R positive variable big hit flag, and the off flag Is set. In the jackpot game control process shown in FIG. 37, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it is possible to enter the game ball into the variable winning slot 316b or the special variable prize winning device 82 according to the jackpot type. A control for performing a jackpot game in which a round game is executed a plurality of times is executed.

<Step S2401>
In step S2401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the jackpot game start flag set to ON in step S2600 of the game state transition process of FIG. 40 described later is on, that is, whether or not it is the timing to start the jackpot game. to decide. If the MPU 41 determines that it is time to start the jackpot game (step S2401: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2402, and if it is determined that it is not time to start the jackpot game (step S2401: No), the process is performed. The process proceeds to step S2407.

<Steps S2402 to S2404>
When it is time to start the jackpot game (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 41 identifies the jackpot type (step S2402), and determines whether or not the jackpot type is a promiscuous jackpot (step S2403). The jackpot type is a jackpot type flag (4R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, 10R probability variable jackpot flag, and 16R probability variable jackpot set in the lottery result flag setting process in step S1806 in the special figure variation start process of FIG. Flag) is specified based on whether it is set to ON.

  When the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is a probable jackpot (step S2403: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a V winning round that activates the special variable winning device 82 in accordance with the number of probable jackpot rounds (step S2404). ), And the process proceeds to step S2405. For example, the MPU 41 sets 5 rounds as V winning rounds in the case of 5R probability variation jackpots, and sets 10 rounds as V winning rounds in the case of 10R probability variation jackpots and 16R probability variation jackpots. On the other hand, if the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is not a probabilistic jackpot (step S2403: No), the process proceeds to step S2405 without setting the V winning round for operating the special variable winning device 82.

<Steps S2405 and S2406>
In step S2405, the MPU 41 is based on the jackpot type flag (4R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, 10R probability variable jackpot flag and 16R probability variable jackpot flag) that is set to ON in step S1806 of the special figure variation start process of FIG. Thus, the round game number R executed in the jackpot game open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the round game number R to “4” when the 4R normal jackpot flag is on, sets the round game number R to “5” when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag is on, and changes the 10R probability. The round game number R is stored in the RAM 412 as “10” when the jackpot flag is on, and the round game number R is stored as “16” when the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is on. Thus, the MPU 41 executes a round game with the number R of round games corresponding to the jackpot type in the opening / closing execution mode control process in step S2416 described later. Next, the MPU 41 sets the opening flag to ON (step S2406), and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening flag is referred to in order to determine whether or not to start the opening time in step S2407 described later.

<Step S2407>
In step S2407, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening flag set to ON in step S2406 is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not opening is started. When the opening flag is set on (step S2407: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2408, and when the opening flag is set off (step S2407: No), the process proceeds to step S2415. Transition.

<Step S2408>
When the opening flag is set to ON (step S2407: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening time at which timing is started in step S2409 described later is being measured (step S2408). When the opening time is being measured (step S2408: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2410. When the opening time is not being measured (step S2408: No), the process proceeds to step S2409.

<Step S2409>
In step S2409, the MPU 41 starts measuring the opening execution time, and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening time at which the timing is started in step S2409 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not to end the opening and shift to the opening / closing execution mode in step S2410 described later.

<Step S2410>
In step S2410, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening time at which the timing is started in step S2409 has reached a predetermined time required for performing the opening. If the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S2410: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2411. If the opening time has not reached the predetermined time (step S2410: No), the jackpot game control process Exit.

<Steps S2411 to S2414>
When the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S2410: Yes), the MPU 41 finishes counting the opening time (step S2411), and sets the opening flag to OFF (step S2412). Next, the MPU 41 sets the opening / closing execution mode flag to ON (step S2413), and sets the one-round start flag to ON (step S2214). The opening / closing execution mode flag is referred to when determining whether or not to shift to the opening / closing execution mode processing in step S2415 described later. The 1-round start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the first round of the opening / closing execution mode in step S2501 of the opening / closing execution mode processing of FIG.

<Step S2415>
In step S2415, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening / closing execution mode flag set to ON in step S2413 is set to ON. When the opening / closing execution mode flag is set to on (step S2415: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2416, and when the opening / closing execution mode flag is set to off (step S2415: No), processing is performed. Goes to step S2417.

<Step S2416>
In step S2416, the MPU 41 executes an opening / closing execution mode control process. In the opening / closing execution mode control process, the MPU 41 executes a round game for operating the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82 a plurality of times according to the jackpot type. Details of the opening / closing execution mode control processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.

<Step S2417>
In step S2417, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending flag set to ON in step S2524 in the opening / closing execution mode control process of FIG. 39 described later is set to ON. When the ending flag is set on (step S2417: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2418, and when the ending flag is set off (step S2417: No), the jackpot game control process Exit.

<Step S2418>
When the ending flag is set to ON (step S2417: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time at which time measurement is started in step S2419 described later is being measured (step S2418). If the MPU 41 is measuring the ending time (step S2418: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2420. If the ending time is not being measured (step S2418: No), the process proceeds to step S2419.

<Step S2419>
In step S2419, the MPU 41 starts measuring the ending time after starting the ending, and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time counted in step S2419 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not to end the ending (big hit game) in step S2420 described later.

<Step S2420>
In step S2420, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time at which timing is started in step S2419 has reached a predetermined time required for executing the ending. If the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S2420: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2421, and if the ending time has not reached the predetermined time (step S2420: No), the jackpot game control process Exit.

<Steps S2421 to S2423>
When the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S2420: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the ending flag set to ON in step S2524 in the opening / closing execution mode control process of FIG. 39 described later to OFF (step S2421). ). Further, the MPU 41 finishes counting the ending time (step S2422), sets the jackpot game end flag to ON (step S2423), and ends the jackpot game control process. Thereby, the MPU 41 can end the ending, that is, the jackpot game. Note that the jackpot game end flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1914 in the gaming state transition process of FIG. 41, and the MPU 41 determines the jackpot type when the jackpot game end flag is set to ON (step S1914: Yes). Accordingly, the gaming state is shifted from the jackpot gaming state to any one of mode A, mode C ′ and mode E ′.

[Open / close execution mode control processing]
In the opening / closing execution mode control process shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the round game that operates the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82 as described above is executed a plurality of times according to the jackpot type.

<Steps S2501 and S2502>
In step S2501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the 1-round start flag set to ON in step S2414 of the jackpot game control process in FIG. 37 is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether to start the opening / closing execution mode (whether to start the first round in the round game). When the one-round start flag is set to on (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2506 after setting the one-round start flag to off (step S2502). On the other hand, when the one-round start flag is set to OFF (step S2501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2503.

<Step S2503>
In step S2503, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning opening opening flag set to ON in step S2510 of the opening / closing execution mode control process is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning opening 316b of the variable winning device 316 is open. When the variable winning opening opening flag is set to ON (step S2503: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S2511 in FIG. 39, and when the variable winning opening opening flag is set to OFF (step S2503). : No), the process proceeds to step S2504.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special variable winning device operation flag set to ON in step S2508 of the opening / closing execution mode control process is set to ON. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special variable winning device 82 is operating. The MPU 41 proceeds to step S2514 in FIG. 39 when the special variable winning device operating flag is set to ON (step S2504: YES), and when the variable winning a prize opening release flag is set to OFF (step S2504). S2504: No), the process proceeds to step S2505.

<Step S2505>
When the variable winning opening opening flag is set to OFF (step S2503: No) and the special variable winning device operation flag is set to OFF (step S2504: No), the MPU 41 starts timing in step S2522 of FIG. It is determined whether the interval time to be exceeded has exceeded a predetermined time (step S2505). Here, the interval time is a pause time from the end of the round game to the start of the next round game. That is, in step S2505, the MPU 41 determines whether to end the interval and start the round game. When the MPU 41 determines that the interval time exceeds the predetermined time (step S2505: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2506, and when the MPU 41 determines that the interval time does not exceed the predetermined time (step S2505: No), the interval The opening / closing execution mode control process is terminated.

<Steps S2506 to S2508>
When the interval time exceeds the predetermined time (step S2505: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the scheduled round game is the V winning round set in step S2404 of the jackpot game control process of FIG. Step S2506). When the MPU 41 determines that it is a V winning round (step S2506: Yes), the MPU 41 activates the special variable winning device 82 (step S2507). Specifically, the MPU 41 moves the movable tongue 822 of the special variable prize-winning device 82 from the standby position where the introduction port 821 is closed to the open position where the introduction port 821 is opened. Further, the MPU 41 sets the special variable winning device operation flag to ON (step S2508), and ends the opening / closing execution mode control process. The special variable winning device operation flag is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not the special variable winning device 82 is in operation in step S2504 described above.

<Steps S2509 and S2510>
When the scheduled round game is not the V winning round (step S2506: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the scheduled round game is a round game that opens the variable winning opening 316b, so the open / close door of the variable winning device 316 By operating 316c, the variable winning opening 316b is opened (step S2509). Further, the MPU 41 sets the variable winning opening opening flag to ON (step S2510), and ends the opening / closing execution mode control process. The variable prize opening opening flag is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether or not the variable prize winning device 316 is operating in the above-described step S2503 (whether or not the variable prize opening 316b is opened).

<Step S2511>
When the variable winning opening opening flag is set to ON (step S2503: Yes), in step S2511 in FIG. 39, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a condition for closing the variable winning opening 316b is established. . Specifically, whether the MPU 41 has passed a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the variable winning opening 316b is opened, or has the number of game balls won in the variable winning opening 316b exceeded a predetermined number (for example, 9)? Judge whether or not. When the condition for closing the variable prize opening 316b is satisfied (step S2511: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2512 and the condition for closing the variable prize opening 316b is not satisfied. (Step S2511: No), in order to maintain the open state of the variable winning opening 316b, the opening / closing execution mode control process is terminated.

<Steps S2512 and S2513>
When the conditions for closing the variable winning opening 316b are satisfied (step S2511: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316b by returning the open / close door 316c (step S2512), and further the variable winning opening. The release flag is set to off (step S2513).

<Steps S2514 to S2516>
When the special variable winning device operation flag is set to ON (step S2504: YES in FIG. 38), in step S2514, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the game ball has won the V winning port 824 of the special variable winning device 82. Judging. Whether or not a game ball has won the V winning opening 824 is determined based on a detection result of a ball receiving sensor (not shown) provided in the V winning opening 824. In the special variable winning device 82, since the variable claw portion 393 is inclined to the left at the start of operation, the first game ball introduced into the special variable winning device 82 is the left inclined variable claw portion 393. To the V prize opening 824. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the V winning opening 824 (step S2514: YES), the MPU 41 sets the V winning flag to ON (step S2515) and tilts the variable claw portion 393 of the special variable winning device 82 to the left. The state is rotated to the right inclined state (step S2516). That is, when the winning of the game ball to the V winning opening 824 is confirmed, the MPU 41 is guided to the normal winning opening 825 by the variable claw portion 393 in the right tilt state with the game ball introduced into the special variable winning device 82. .

<Step S2517>
When a game ball has not won the V prize opening 824 (step S2514: No), or when a game ball has won the V prize opening 824, the V prize flag is set to ON and the movable claw portion 823 is tilted to the right. When it is operated to the state (step S2514: YES and steps S2515 and S2516), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a condition for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 is satisfied (step S2517). Specifically, the MPU 41 has a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the operation of the special variable winning device 82 is started (after the operation of the movable tongue 822 is started and the introduction port 821 is opened). It is determined whether or not the number of game balls introduced to the special variable winning device 82 (the total number of game balls won in the V winning port 824 and the normal winning port 825) exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 9). . When the condition for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 is satisfied (step S2517: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2518, and the condition for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82. Is not established (step S2517: No), the opening / closing execution mode control process is terminated in order to continue the operation of the special variable winning device 82.

<Steps S2518 to S2520>
When the condition for stopping the operation of the special variable winning device 82 is established (step S2517: Yes), the MPU 41 stops the operation of the special variable winning device 82 (step S2518). Specifically, the MPU 41 closes the introduction port 821 by returning the movable tongue portion 822 and returns the movable claw portion 823 to the left inclined state. The ball is guided to the V winning opening 824. Further, the MPU 41 sets the special variable winning device operation flag to OFF (step S2519), and the process proceeds to step S2520.

<Steps S2520 and S2521>
When the variable winning opening opening flag is set to OFF (step S2513), or when the special variable winning device operation flag is set to OFF (step S2519), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the round game number R stored in the RAM 412. (Step S2520), it is determined whether or not the round game number R after subtraction is “0” (step S2521). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the previously ended round game is the final round game in the opening / closing execution mode. When the round game number R after subtraction is “0” (step S2521: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2523, and when the round game number R after subtraction is not “0” (step S2521: No). ), The process proceeds to step S2522.

<Step S2522>
When the round game number R after the subtraction is not “0” (step S2521: No), the MPU 41 starts counting the interval time until the next round game is executed (step S2522), and the opening / closing execution mode control process Exit. The interval time at which timing is started in step S2522 is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S2505 of FIG. 38 in order to determine whether or not it is the timing for operating the variable winning device 316 or the special variable winning device 82.

<Steps S2523 and S2524>
When the round game number R after the subtraction is “0” (step S2521: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that the previously ended round game is the final round game in the open / close execution mode. In order to end the mode, the opening / closing execution mode flag is set to OFF (step S2523), the ending flag is set to ON (step S2524), and the opening / closing execution mode control process is ended. This ending flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S2417 in the jackpot game control process of FIG. 37 in order to determine whether to start the ending.

[Game state transition processing]
Here, in this embodiment, since there are two types of jackpot types, 2R probability variation jackpot and 16R probability variation jackpot, in step S1806 of the special figure variation start process of FIG. 22, according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery As the result flag, any one of the 2R probability variation jackpot flag, the 16R probability variation jackpot flag, and the out flag is set. In the present embodiment, a flowchart regarding the procedure of the special figure variation start process is omitted. Further, in the gaming state transition process of the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming start flag is set on after the jackpot gaming state flag is set on in step S1906 (step S2600 in FIG. 40). The jackpot game start flag indicates that a jackpot game is started, and is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S2401 of the jackpot game control process shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the special figure gaming state is the three modes of mode A, mode C ′, and mode E ′. Therefore, in the gaming state transition process of the present embodiment shown in FIGS. The game state transition process (see FIGS. 23 and 24) of the embodiment differs from the process for mode transition (steps S2601 to S2610). Hereinafter, steps S2601 to S2610 will be described.

<Step S2601>
In step S2601 shown in FIG. 40, when the time reduction mode ends and the mode shifts from mode C ′ or mode E ′ to mode A (steps S1908 to S1912), the MPU 41 sets the mode C ′ flag or mode set to ON. Set the E 'flag off.

<Steps S2602 to S2604>
In step S2602 shown in FIG. 41, when the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game (step S1914: YES and steps S1915 and S1917), the V winning flag set to ON in step S2515 of the opening / closing execution mode control process of FIG. It is determined whether or not is set to ON (step S2602). When the V winning flag is not set on (step S2602: No), the MPU 41 shifts to the mode A in the special figure gaming state (step S2603), and further sets the mode A flag on (step S2604). ), The process proceeds to step S2610. That is, in the case of 4R normal jackpot or when there is no game ball winning in the V winning opening 824 in the V winning round in the probable jackpot game, the MPU 41 is not in the short-time mode or the high probability mode after the jackpot game ends. To migrate.

<Steps S2605 to S2607>
When the V winning flag is ON (step S2602: YES), the MPU 41 sets the 5R probability variation jackpot flag set to ON in the lottery result flag setting process in step S1806 in the special figure variation start process in FIG. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S2605). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is a 5R probability variation jackpot. When the 5R probability variation jackpot flag is set on (step S2605: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts to the mode C ′ in the special figure gaming state (step S2606), and further sets the mode C ′ flag on. (Step S2607), the process proceeds to step S2610. That is, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot, and the game ball wins the V prize opening 824 in the V winning round of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 is in the short-time mode and the high probability after the jackpot game ends. The mode is shifted to mode C ′.

<Steps S2608 and S2609>
When the V winning flag is on and the 5R probability variation jackpot flag is off (step S2602: Yes and step S2605: No), the MPU 41 turns on in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure variation start process of FIG. Since it can be determined that either the 10R probability variation jackpot flag or 16R probability variation jackpot flag set to ON is set to ON, the jackpot gaming state is shifted to the mode E ′ of the special figure gaming state (step S2608). Further, the mode E ′ flag is set to ON (step S2609), and the process proceeds to step S2610. That is, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is 10R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot, and there is a game ball winning in the V winning slot 824 in the jackpot game V winning round, the MPU 41 will shorten the time after the jackpot game ends. The mode is shifted to a mode E ′ which is a high probability mode.

<Step S2610>
The MPU 41 is a jackpot type flag that is set to ON in the lottery result flag setting process of step S1806 in the special figure variation start process of FIG. The flag is set to off (step S2610), and the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  Thus, in this embodiment, in order to shift to the mode E ′ that is most advantageous to the player, after shifting to the mode C ′ that is distributed with a probability of 50% at the beginning, the mode C ′ is the time reduction mode. By the end, it is necessary to win a jackpot in the second special figure game that is distributed with a probability of 50% by the distribution device 35. That is, in the present embodiment, except for the case where the mode falls due to the end of the short-time mode, the probability of probability variation is 50% in mode A, 75% in mode C ′, 100% in mode E ′, A gaming machine having a probability variation ratio can be provided.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the special variable winning device 82 having the V winning opening 824 is provided separately from the variable winning device 316 has been described. The V winning opening 824 may be opened in the V winning round of the game.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the special symbol game is executed in any one of the five game states of mode A to mode E has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the special figure gaming state is the three modes of mode A, mode C ′ and mode E ′ as in the second embodiment. In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a type 1 type 2 mixing machine that performs a type 1 game that is a special game by the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 and a type 2 game by the wing accessory device. It is.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 50 with a focus on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment. Here, FIG. 42 is a front view showing an example of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, and FIGS. 43 and 44 are cross sections showing the main parts of the wing accessory device 83 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. FIG. 45 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot winning / failing table, FIG. 45 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot type distribution table for one type of big hit, and FIG. 45 (C) is a case of two types of big hit. FIG. 45D shows an example of the mode data table, FIG. 45E shows an example of the mode transition table, and FIG. 46 is executed by the main controller 4. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main process performed, FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the wing accessory apparatus control process executed in the main process of FIG. 46, and FIG. 48 is the special game control process of FIG. Procedure of special figure change start processing to be executed Flow chart illustrating an example, FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a gaming state transition process is performed in the main processing in FIG. 46.

  As shown in FIG. 42, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a wing accessory device 83 provided on the gaming board 31. The wing accessory device 83 is provided above the variable winning device 316 and on the right side of the symbol display unit 341. As shown in FIG. 43, the wing accessory device 83 has an introduction port 831 for introducing the game ball 99 into the wing accessory device 83, and a closed position in which the introduction port 831 is closed (the position of the solid line in FIG. 43). ) And an open position for opening the inlet 831 (the position of the phantom line in FIG. 43), there is a movable wing portion 832 that is rotated by driving means such as a solenoid (not shown). In a state where the movable wing portion 832 is in the standby position and the introduction port 831 is closed by the movable wing portion 832, the game ball 99 is not introduced into the wing accessory device 83. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 44 (A) and 44 (B), when the movable wing portion 832 is in the open position and the introduction port 831 is opened, the movable wing portion 832 can receive a game ball. It is. The game ball received by the movable wing portion 832 can be introduced into the wing accessory device 83 via the introduction port 831. The movable wing portion 832 is actuated to the open position when the lottery result in the big win lottery triggered by the winning of the second start port 315 is a small hit (see FIG. 45A), and the introduction port 831 is opened for a predetermined time For example, it is opened only for a time (about 0.5 seconds to 1.5 seconds) during which 1 to 3 game balls enter the feather accessory device 83. Of course, the opening time of the introduction port 831 at the time of small hitting may be set as appropriate, and is not limited to the time shown above.

  Inside the wing accessory 83, a V prize opening 833, a normal prize opening 834, and a V prize opening opening / closing part 835 are provided. Each of the V winning opening 833 and the normal winning opening 834 is provided with a ball winning sensor (not shown), and it is detected by these ball winning sensors that a game ball has won the V winning opening 833 or the normal winning opening 834. Is done. The V prize opening opening / closing part 835 is a solenoid (between a closed position (FIG. 44 (A)) where the V prize opening 833 is closed and an open position (FIG. 44 (B)) where the V prize opening 833 is opened. It is rotated by driving means such as (not shown). The V prize opening opening / closing part 835 normally stands by in a closed position for closing the V prize opening 833. For example, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a small hit, the movable wing part 832 is operated to the open position. The V prize opening 824 has a probability of 50% to 80% when the wing accessory device 83 is operated for a predetermined time shorter than the operation time of the movable wing portion 832 in synchronization with the timing, for example, the same number as the number of time reductions in the E mode. The V winning opening 833 is opened only for the time when the game ball wins.

  As shown in FIG. 45A as a jackpot winning / failing table, the jackpot winning / failing table of this embodiment is not classified into the high probability mode and the low probability mode as in the first embodiment described above (FIG. 45). 12 (A) and FIG. 12 (B)), the first special figure game by winning the first start opening 314 and the second special figure game by winning the second starting opening 315 are classified. In the first special figure game, three of 0 to 2 of the counter values (random values) of the jackpot random number counter of 0 to 738 are jackpots, and the remaining 736 of 3 to 738 are missed. The jackpot probability in the figure game is 3/739 (= about 1 / 246.3) as in the low probability mode in the first embodiment described above. On the other hand, in the second special figure game, as in the first special figure game, three counter values (random number values) of 0 to 2 out of the counter values (random number values) of the big hit random number counters of 0 to 738 are big hits. There is a jackpot probability of 3/739 (= about 1 / 246.3). In other words, regardless of the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the big hit in the big win lottery becomes the big hit in one type of game. Also, 723 from 3 to 735 is a small hit, and 3 from 736 to 738 are out. Here, the small hit is a hit for executing two kinds of games for releasing the movable wing portion 832 of the wing accessory device 83 for a predetermined time. Then, when the wing accessory device 83 is actuated by a small hit, if a game ball wins the V winning port 833 of the wing accessory device 83, it becomes a big hit in the two kinds of games. That is, in the second special figure game, the main hit is a two-type game, and the probability of a big hit in a single-type game is low as in the second special figure game. In the following, the jackpot in the one-type game where the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot is “one-type jackpot”, and the jackpot resulting from the game ball winning in the V winning port 833 of the wing accessory device 83 is “two-jacket” May be called.

  As shown in the big hit type allocation table in FIG. 45 (B), in the big hit type, it is assigned to 4R hour short hit or 8R hour short hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 45C as a jackpot type allocation table, in the case of two types of big hits, the hits are assigned to 4R hour shortage, 8R hour shortfall or 16R hour shortfall. Here, the number of time reductions at each hourly jackpot is set according to the lottery probability, jackpot probability at the jackpot lottery, the operating time of the wing accessory device 83 at the jackpot, the operating time of the V prize opening opening / closing unit 835, etc. In this embodiment, for example, 50 times. Also, in this embodiment, all types of big hits for both type 1 big hits and type 2 big hits are hour / temporal big hits. May be. In this case, the probability that a game ball will win the V winning opening 833 of the wing accessory device 83 before the time-shortening mode ends in mode E ′ is right-handed without any special way of hitting or twisting. As long as is performed, the V prize opening opening / closing part 835 may be operated so as to be 90% or more, preferably substantially 100%. In addition, the probability that a game ball will win the V winning opening 833 of the wing accessory device 83 before the time-shortening mode ends in mode E ′ is substantially 100%, and an upper limit is set for the number of jackpots from the beginning. May be. That is, the gaming machine 10 as the type 1 type 2 mixing machine according to the present embodiment may combine the specifications of the limit machine according to the third embodiment described above.

  As shown in FIG. 45D, the mode data table specifies the mode type of the special figure gaming state. This jackpot type distribution table defines the contents of three modes, mode A, mode C 'and mode E'. The contents of mode A, mode C ', and mode E' are the same as those in the fourth embodiment described above, and are game states that are advantageous to the player in the order of mode E ', mode C', and mode A.

  The mode transition table shown in FIG. 45 (E) defines the transition destination mode after the end of the jackpot game. When the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot gaming state in the mode C ′ and the mode E ′ which are the time reduction modes, the mode A is shifted to. Further, in the case of the type 1 big hit, the mode C 'is shifted to after the jackpot game is ended, and in the case of the type 2 big hit, the mode E' is shifted to after the jackpot game is ended.

  Here, in mode A, except for irregular cases, the first special figure game is executed by left-handed, and the first special figure game is a one-type big hit. After the jackpot game is over, the mode C ′ is entered.

  In mode C ', the first special figure game and the second special figure game are executed alternately by left-handed. That is, in the mode C ′, the first special figure game with 100% type 1 hit and the second special figure game with the main type 2 big hit being executed alternately. Therefore, from the mode C ′, on the condition that the short-time mode does not end, the mode shifts to the mode C ′ with a probability of approximately 50% (exactly, a slightly higher probability than 50%) after the jackpot game ends, and approximately 50% (To be precise, the probability of being slightly less than 50%) shifts to mode E ′. As described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot gaming state in the mode C ′, the mode C ′ is shifted to the mode A.

  In the mode E ′, the second special figure game is executed by making a right strike, and the 2nd type big hit becomes the main, and the 1st type big hit comes with a low probability (about 1 / 246.3 in this embodiment). For this reason, the mode E ′ is shifted to the mode E ′ after the end of the jackpot game, and falls to the mode C ′ with a low probability. As described above, when the upper limit number of special figure games are executed without shifting to the jackpot gaming state in the mode E ′, the mode E ′ is shifted to the mode A. Further, in the case of one type big hit in the mode E ′, the mode E ′ may be looped without falling to the mode C ′.

The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the jackpot winning / failing table (see FIG. 45A), and can execute two types of games for operating the wing accessory device 83. A part of the main process is different from the first embodiment described above, and a special figure change start process and a game state transition process in the special figure game control process executed as the main process are different.
[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 46, in the main process of the present embodiment, the wing accessory device control process is executed between the special figure game control process in step S1306 and the jackpot game control process in step S1307 (step S2701). Details of the wing accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Feathering equipment control processing]
<Step S2801>
As shown in FIG. 47, in the wing accessory device control process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop flag that is turned on in step S1606 of the special figure game control process of FIG. 20 is set to on. Is determined (step S2801). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to execute the two-type game when the special figure game is completed. When the MPU 41 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to ON (step S2801: YES), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2802 and determines that the wing accessory device operation flag is set to OFF. In the case (step S2801: No), the process proceeds to step S2809.

<Step S2802>
If the MPU 41 determines that the special figure change stop flag is set to ON (step S2801: YES), the wing accessory apparatus operation that is set to ON in step S2907 of the special figure change start process of FIG. It is determined whether or not the flag is set to ON (step S2802). If the MPU 41 determines that the wing accessory device operation flag is set to ON (step S2802: YES), the MPU 41 can determine that it is time to activate the wing accessory device 83, and thus the process proceeds to step S2803. . On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the special figure variation stop flag is set to OFF (step S2801: No), it can be determined that it is not the timing for operating the wing accessory device 83, so that the wing accessory device control process is performed. Exit.

<Steps S2803 to S2808>
When the wing accessory device operating flag is set to ON (step S2802: YES), the MPU 41 sets the wing accessory device operating flag to OFF (step S2803), and the movable wing portion of the wing accessory device 83 is set. The operation of 832 is started (step S2804), and the movable blade operating flag is set to ON (step S2805). Thereby, in the wing accessory device 83, the introduction port 831 is opened, and the movable wing portion 832 is in a state where a game ball can be introduced into the wing accessory device 83. Next, the MPU 41 starts the operation of the V prize opening opening / closing part 835 (step S2806), and sets the V winning opening opening / closing part operating flag to ON (step S2807). As a result, the V prize opening 833 of the wing accessory device 83 is opened, and the game ball introduced into the wing accessory apparatus 83 via the introduction port 831 can enter the V prize opening 833. Further, the MPU 41 starts measuring the operation time (step S2808). In step S2808, the time measured in step S2808 is to determine whether it is time to return the V winning opening / closing portion 835 to a standby state and close the V winning opening 833 in step S2810, which will be described later, or in step S2814. Reference is made by the MPU 41 to determine whether it is time to return the movable wing portion 832 and close the inlet 831.

<Step S2809>
When the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S2801: No), that is, when it is not the timing to operate the feather accessory device 83, the MPU 41 sets the V winning opening opening / closing unit set to ON in step S2807 It is determined whether the operating flag is set to ON (step S2809). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V prize opening 833 is open. When the V winning opening opening / closing unit operating flag is set to ON (step S2809: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2810, and the V winning opening opening / closing unit operating flag is set to OFF. (Step S2809: No), the process proceeds to step S2815.

<Step S2810>
When the V prize opening opening / closing unit operating flag is set to ON (step S2809: YES), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time measured at the time when the time is started in step S2808 is with respect to a first predetermined time that is set in advance. Is determined (step S2810). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the V winning opening / closing unit 835 to the standby position and close the V winning opening 833. When the MPU 41 determines that the time measurement has reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2813, and when the MPU 41 determines that the time measurement has not reached the first predetermined time (step S2810). S2810: No), the process proceeds to step S2811.

<Steps S2811 and S2812>
When the MPU 41 determines that the measured time has not reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has won the V winning opening 833 (step S2811). Whether or not a game ball has won the V prize opening 833 is determined by whether or not a game ball has been detected by a ball entry sensor (not shown) provided in the V prize opening 833, for example. When the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the V winning opening 833 (step S2811: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the two-type jackpot flag to ON (step S2812), and ends the feather accessory device control process. Here, the two-type jackpot flag indicates whether or not the jackpot game based on the winning of the game ball to the V winning opening 833 is executed. In step S3005 in the game state transition process of FIG. Reference is made by the MPU 41 in order to determine whether or not to shift to. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has not won the V winning opening 833 (step S2811: No), the MPU 41 ends the feather accessory device control process without setting the two-type jackpot flag on.

<Steps S2813 and S2814>
When the MPU 41 determines that the measured time has reached the first predetermined time (step S2810: Yes), that is, when it is determined that it is time to close the V winning opening 833, the MP winning opening / closing portion 835 is placed in the standby position. (Step S2813), the V prize opening opening / closing section operating flag is set to OFF (step S2814), and the feather accessory device control process is terminated.

<Step S2815>
When the V prize opening opening / closing part operating flag is set to OFF (step S2809: NO), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the movable wing part operating flag set to ON in step S2805 is set to ON. Judgment is made (step S2815). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the V prize opening 833 is open. The MPU 41 determines whether or not the introduction port 831 of the wing accessory device 83 is being opened. When the movable wing part operating flag is set to ON (step S2815: Yes), the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2816, and when the movable wing part operating flag is set to OFF (step S2815: No), the feather accessory device control process is terminated.

<Step S2816>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the movable wing portion operating flag is set to ON (step S2815: YES), and whether or not the time measured at the time when the time measurement is started in step S2808 has reached a predetermined second predetermined time. (Step S2816). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether it is time to return the movable wing portion 832 to the standby position and close the introduction port 831. When the MPU 41 determines that the measured time has reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2817, and when the MPU 41 determines that the measured time has not reached the second predetermined time (step S2816). S2816: No), in order to maintain the open state of the inlet 831 of the wing accessory device 83, the wing accessory device control process is terminated.

<Steps S2817 to S2820>
When the measured time has reached the second predetermined time (step S2816: Yes), the MPU 41 returns the movable wing portion 832 to the standby position and closes the introduction port 831 (step S2817), and the movable wing portion operating flag Is set to OFF (step S2818). Thereby, the two-type game in the case where the lottery result in the big hit lottery with the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 315 is a small win is ended. Furthermore, the MPU 41 ends the operation time of the wing accessory device 83 started in step S2808 (step S2819), sets the wing accessory device operation end flag to ON (step S2820), and The physical device control process is terminated. The wing accessory device operation end flag indicates that the operation of the wing accessory device 83 has ended, that is, the two-type game has ended. In step S3003 of the game state transition process of FIG. Referenced by the MPU 41 to determine whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state after the game ends.

[Special figure change start processing]
Since the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured as a type 1 and type 2 mixer, the special figure change start process is different from the special figure change start process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above. Has a point. As shown in FIG. 48, the special figure variation start process of this embodiment differs from the special figure fluctuation start process (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment described above until the lottery result flag is set. (Steps S2901 to S2908). In the present embodiment, since the lottery result other than the big hit in the big win lottery in the second special figure game has a small hit in addition to the losing, in the special figure fluctuation start process of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned first It is assumed that steps S1811 and S1817 (see FIG. 22) relating to the disengagement in the special figure variation start process of the embodiment are considered to be a small hit (steps S2909 and S2910). Hereinafter, steps S2901 to S2910 will be described.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
In the special figure variation start process of this embodiment, first, when starting the fluctuation of the special figure, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the special figure game scheduled to start is the first special figure game (step S2901). When the MPU 41 determines to start the first special figure game (step S2901: Yes), the MPU 41 makes a success / failure determination based on the first special figure big hit success / failure table (see FIG. 45A) (step S2902), The process moves to step S2904. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the first special figure game is not started (step S2901: No), that is, when it is determined that the second special figure game is started, the second special figure big hit determination table (FIG. 45A). On the basis of the reference) (step S2903), and the process proceeds to step S2904.

<Step S2904>
In step S2904, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. When the lottery result is a big hit (step S2904: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S2905. The processing moves to step S2906.

<Step S2905>
If the lottery result is a jackpot (step S2904: YES), the MPU 41 sorts the jackpot type based on the special figure jackpot table (see FIG. 45B) (step S2905), and the process proceeds to step S2908. . Specifically, the MPU 41 distributes the jackpot type to either 4R hour / short jackpot or 8R hour / short jackpot according to the counter value of the jackpot type counter.

<Steps S2906 and S2907>
When the lottery result is not a big hit (step S2904: No), that is, when the lottery result is a small hit or miss, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result is a big hit (step S2906). When the lottery result is a small hit (step S2906: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the feather accessory device operation flag to ON (step S2907), and the process proceeds to step S2908. The wing accessory device operation flag is a flag for activating the wing accessory device 83, and it is determined in step S2802 of the wing accessory device control process of FIG. 47 whether or not the wing accessory device 83 is to be operated. Therefore, it is referred to by the MPU 41. On the other hand, if the lottery result is not a small hit (step S2906: No), that is, if the lottery result is out of play, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S2908 without setting the wing accessory device operation flag to ON.

<Step S2908>
When the MPU 41 executes the process according to the lottery result (steps S2904 to S2907), the MPU 41 sets the lottery result flag to ON. Specifically, the MPU 41 sets the type 1 big hit flag to ON when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is 4R short-time big hit or 8R short-time big hit, and sets the small hit flag to ON when it is a small win. If it is out, set the out flag on.

<Steps S2909 and S2910>
When the lottery result flag is set to ON (step S2908), the MPU 41 executes a predetermined process (steps S1807 to S1811) in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, and then comes off in step S2908. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set to ON (step S2809). When the out flag or the small hit flag is set to ON (step S2909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the out flag or the small hit flag to ON (step S2810), and the process proceeds to step S1815. On the other hand, when the off flag or the small hit flag is set to off (step S2909: No), the process proceeds to step S1818. Thereafter, the process of steps S1815 to S1818 of the special figure change start process (see FIG. 22) of the first embodiment described above is executed, and the special figure change start process ends.

[Game state transition processing]
Since the gaming machine according to the first embodiment described above is configured as a loop probability changing machine, in the gaming state transition process of the first embodiment described above, at the end of the special figure game (at the end of the type 1 game) ), It is determined whether or not the time-saving mode is finished, and after the time-saving mode is finished, the mode A is entered (see steps S1909 to S1913 in FIG. 23). On the other hand, since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a type 1 / type 2 mixing machine, not only at the end of the special figure game (at the end of the type 1 game), but also the operation of the wing accessory device It is determined whether or not the time-saving mode is ended also at the end (at the end of the two-type game), and the mode is shifted to mode A after the time-saving mode is ended (steps S3001 and S3002 in FIG. 49). This is different from the gaming state transition process of the embodiment. Further, in the first embodiment described above, a special bonus game big hit (1 type big hit) is used as a trigger to shift to the big hit game state. However, in this embodiment, not only the 1 type big hit, but also the wing accessory device. It is different from the first embodiment described above in that it shifts to a jackpot gaming state by two kinds of jackpots based on winning of a game ball to the 83 V winning opening 833 (steps S3003 to S3005 in FIG. 49). Further, in the first embodiment described above, the mode transition destination is determined according to the jackpot type (see FIG. 13A, steps S1914 to S1932 in FIG. 23). It differs from the first embodiment described above in that the mode transition destination is determined depending on whether it is a big hit or two types of big hit (FIG. 45 (E), steps S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50). Hereinafter, steps S3001 to S3012 will be described with reference to FIG. 49 and FIG.

<Step S3001>
In step S3001 shown in FIG. 49, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set on, the MPU 41 sets the special figure fluctuation stop flag to off (step S1900: Yes and step S1901). It is determined whether or not the one-type big hit flag set to ON in step S2908 of the figure change start process is set to ON (step S3001). The type 1 jackpot flag indicates that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. When the type 1 big hit flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 41 executes processing to shift to the big win gaming state (steps S1903 to S1907). On the other hand, when the type 1 big hit flag is set to OFF (step S3001: No), that is, when the lottery result in the big win lottery is a small hit or miss, the process proceeds to step S3002.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the wing accessory operation flag set to ON in step S2907 of the special figure variation start process of FIG. 48 is set to ON. The wing accessory device operation flag indicates that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a small hit, that is, the wing accessory device 83 is operated. When the wing accessory device operation flag is set to ON (step S3002: Yes), the MPU 41 can determine that it is not the timing to shift the gaming state because the wing accessory device 83 needs to be operated. The gaming state transition process ends. On the other hand, when the wing accessory operation flag is set to OFF (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 executes a process for determining whether or not to shift to any of mode A, mode C ′, or mode E ′. (Steps S1908 to S1911, S3013, Steps S1914, S1915, S1917, S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50).

<Steps S3003 to S3004>
In the MPU 41, when the special figure fluctuation stop flag is set to OFF (step S1900: No), the wing accessory apparatus operation end flag set to ON in step S2820 of the wing accessory apparatus control process of FIG. 47 is ON. It is determined whether it is set to (step S3003). The wing accessory device operation end flag indicates that it is the timing to end the operation of the wing accessory device 83, that is, the timing to return the movable wing portion 832 to the standby position and close the inlet 831. is there. When the wing accessory operation end flag is set to ON (step S3003: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the wing accessory operation end flag to OFF (step S3004), and the process proceeds to step S3005. On the other hand, when the wing accessory operation end flag is set to OFF (step S3003: No), the process proceeds to step S1914 in FIG.

<Step S3005>
If the MPU 41 has the timing to end the operation of the wing accessory device 83 (step S3003: YES and step S3004), the two-type jackpot flag set to ON in step S2812 of the wing accessory device control process of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is set to ON (step S3005). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state after the operation of the feather accessory device 83 is completed. When the MPU 41 determines that the two-type jackpot flag is set on (step S3005: Yes), the jackpot gaming state is the same as when the one-type jackpot flag is set on (step S3001: Yes). The process is executed to shift to (Steps S1903 to S1907). On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the two-type jackpot flag is set to off (step S3005: No), the MPU 41 similarly to the case where the feather accessory device operation flag is set to off (step S3002: No). Then, processing for determining whether to shift to mode A, mode C ′ or mode E ′ is executed (steps S1908 to S1911, S3013, steps S1914, S1915, S1917, S3006 to S3012 in FIG. 50).

<Step S3006>
In step S3006 shown in FIG. 50, the MPU 41 ends the jackpot game state when the jackpot game end flag set to ON in the jackpot game control process in step S1307 of the main process in FIG. 17 is set to ON. When the process is executed (step S1914: YES, steps S1915 and S1917), it is determined whether or not the type 1 big hit flag set to ON in step S2908 of the special figure fluctuation start process of FIG. 48 is set to ON. . That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the transition destination after the jackpot game is in the mode C ′ or the mode E ′ in the special figure game state. When the type 1 big hit flag is set to ON (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S3007. On the other hand, when the type 1 big hit flag is not set to ON (step S3002: No), that is, when the type 2 big hit flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 proceeds to step S3010.

<Steps S3007 to S3009>
When the type 1 big hit flag is set on (step S3006: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts to the mode C ′ in the special figure gaming state (step S3007), and further sets the mode C ′ flag on. (Step S3008). That is, the MPU 41 is in the short-time mode and the high probability mode after the jackpot game ends when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, and alternately turns to the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 The mode is shifted to a mode C ′ in which a game ball can enter. Then, the MPU 41 sets the type 1 big hit flag to OFF (step S3009) and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Steps S3010 to S3012>
When the type 1 big hit flag is set to off (step S3006: No), that is, when the type 2 big hit flag is set to on, the MPU 41 shifts to the mode E ′ in the special figure gaming state ( In step S3010), the mode E ′ flag is set to ON (step S3011). In other words, the MPU 41 is in the short-time mode and the high-probability mode after the jackpot game ends in the case of two types of big wins by winning a game ball to the V winning port 833 of the feather accessory device 83, and is supported by the electric support member 36. The mode is shifted to the mode E ′ in which the game ball is likely to win the second starting port 315. Then, the MPU 41 sets the two-type big hit flag to OFF (step S3012), and ends the gaming state transition process.

<Step S3013>
In the case of the type 1 big hit, after the jackpot game is ended, the mode C ′ is shifted to and the mode C ′ flag is set to ON (steps S3007 and S3008). In the case of the type 2 big hit, the mode E ′ is set after the jackpot game is ended. Since the mode E ′ flag is set to ON (steps S3010 and S3011), when the mode is shifted to the mode A upon completion of the time reduction mode (steps S1908 to S1910 in FIG. 49), the mode E ′ flag is set to ON in step S3008. Or the mode E ′ flag set to ON in step S3010 is set to OFF.

  As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the special figure gaming state, from mode A to mode C ′, from mode C ′ to mode A, mode C ′ and mode E ′, from mode E ′ Transition to either mode A or mode E ′. That is, after the first hit in mode A, before the fall to mode A due to the end of the time reduction, in mode 'C and mode E' which is the time reduction mode, how to continue the time reduction mode by 1 type big hit or 2 type big hit. Has game characteristics. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine 10 having game characteristics like an ST machine while being a type 1 type 2 mixed machine. In mode C ′, the first special figure game and the second special figure game can be executed alternately by left-handed, while in mode E ′, the second special figure game is basically executed by right-handed. In addition, compared to the probability of winning 1 type in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the expectation of winning 2 kinds of big hit by the operation of the wing accessory device by the small hit in the second special figure game Is expensive. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the mode E ′, it is less likely to fall into the mode A due to the end of the short-time mode than in the mode C ′. The mode C ′ and the mode E ′ have two types of modes with different expectation levels, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Seventh to twelfth embodiments]
In the first embodiment described above, the game balls are alternately distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution member 38 that is alternately rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by the game balls. The gaming machine 10 including the distribution device 35 has been described. On the other hand, the seventh to twelfth embodiments are different from the first embodiment in the configuration of the sorting unit of the sorting apparatus. Hereinafter, the seventh to twelfth embodiments will be individually described with reference to FIGS.

<Seventh Embodiment>
The distribution device of this embodiment is common to the first embodiment described above in that it includes a distribution unit that is alternately rotated in a clockwise direction and a counterclockwise direction, but the distribution unit is a solenoid or the like. It differs from the first embodiment described above in that it is alternately rotated clockwise and counterclockwise by drive means (not shown).

  As shown in FIGS. 51 (A) and 51 (B), the sorting apparatus 35A of the present embodiment includes a sorting member 38A (sorting unit) fixed so as to be rotatable directly under the introduction port 350. . This distribution member 38A is formed in a claw shape, and is rotated by a driving means (not shown) between a right inclined position shown in FIG. 51 (A) and a left inclined position shown in FIG. 51 (B). It is driven dynamically. When the sorting member 38A is positioned at the right inclined position shown in FIG. 51A, the game ball 99 introduced through the introduction port 350 is guided to the first passage 351 by the sorting member 38A. As a result, the game ball 99 wins the first left starting port 314L. On the other hand, when the distribution member 38A is located at the left inclined position shown in FIG. 51B, the game ball 99 introduced through the introduction port 350 is moved to the second passage 352 by the distribution member 38A. Be guided. Thereby, the game ball 99 wins the second start opening 315 when receiving the support of the electric support member 36, and wins the right first start opening 314R when not receiving the support of the electric support member 36. In the distribution device 35A of the present embodiment, for example, the distribution device 35A is made opaque to prevent the game ball from being shot out so that the game ball is inserted into the second passage 352. It is preferable to make the sorting member 38A invisible from the outside.

  Further, the distribution member 38A is driven by the driving means so as to alternately rotate between the left inclined position and the right inclined position, for example, every predetermined time (for example, about 0.5 second to 2 seconds). Conceivable. Of course, the distribution member 38A does not necessarily have to be rotated at a constant cycle, and may be driven to perform a patterned irregular rotation operation. The operation may be changed every hour. For example, the rotation pattern that is easy to enter the first passage 351 and the rotation pattern that is easy to enter the second passage 352 may be changed at regular time intervals or at indefinite times. The rotation pattern that is easy to enter the first passage 351 includes a pattern in which the time for which the sorting member 38A stops at the right tilt position is longer than the time at which the sorting member 38A stops at the left tilt position, A pattern in which the speed (time) of turning to the tilt position is slower (longer) than the speed (time) of turning from the left tilt position to the right tilt position is conceivable. When a plurality of rotation patterns are used in combination, the distribution member 38A is rotationally driven so that the game balls 99 are finally distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 with a theoretical value of 1: 1. Is preferred. However, the distribution member 38A may be rotationally driven so that the theoretical distribution ratio of the game balls between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is other than 1: 1. In this case, you may make it change the theoretical distribution ratio of the game ball of the 1st channel | path 351 and the 2nd channel | path 352 according to a game state. For example, the mode C can be configured such that the game ball is more easily guided to the second passage 352 than the mode B, and vice versa. In addition, a ball entry sensor is provided in the vicinity of the introduction port 350, and when the entry of the game ball 99 into the introduction port 350 is detected by the ball entry sensor, the distribution member 38A is in the left inclined position. While the member 38A is rotated to the right inclined position, when the distributing member 38A is in the right inclined position, the distributing member 38A may be rotated to the left inclined position.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the distribution member 38A is rotated at a predetermined timing by the driving means, the ratio at which the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is temporarily set. Can be biased accidentally or intentionally. Thereby, when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, the gaming ball 99 is guided to either the first passage 351 or the second passage 352, that is, the gaming ball 99 supports the electric support member 36. In this way, it is possible to enjoy the game with a thirst for wondering whether or not to win the second start opening 315, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, similarly to the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment described above, the distributing unit is rotated between the right inclined position and the left inclined position by a driving unit such as a solenoid. This is different from the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment is different from the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment described above in the shape of the distribution unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 52 (A) and 52 (B), the sorting device 35B of the present embodiment includes a sorting member 38B (sorting unit) fixed so as to be rotatable directly under the introduction port 350. . The distribution member 38B is formed in a substantially T-shape or bowl shape having an arc portion 382B and a shaft portion 383B, and has a right inclination position shown in FIG. 52 (A) and a left inclination shown in FIG. 52 (B). It is rotationally driven by a driving means (not shown) between the positions. The distribution member 38B of the present embodiment is different from the distribution member 38A of the seventh embodiment only in the shape, and is otherwise the same as the distribution member 38A of the seventh embodiment described above. There are the same operational effects as the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. Further, the distribution member 38B of the present embodiment can be changed in design in the same manner as the distribution member 38A of the seventh embodiment described above.

  Further, the shape and the like of the distribution portion that distributes the game balls 99 to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352 by being rotated by the driving means are shown in the distribution member 38A of the seventh embodiment shown in FIG. The design is not limited to the sorting member 38B of the eighth embodiment shown in 52, and various design changes can be made. For example, the shape may be the same as or similar to the sorting member 38 of the first embodiment described above. In the sorting member 38B of the eighth embodiment, a flat plate portion or a bent portion is provided instead of the arc portion 382B. It may be a configuration.

<Ninth and Tenth Embodiments>
In the distribution device 35 of the ninth and tenth embodiments, the game ball 99 is rotated in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the game ball 99 interfering as the distribution unit, so that the game ball 99 is rotated in the first passage 351. Or it differs from the above-mentioned 1st Embodiment by the point provided with the rotary body distributed to either of the 2nd channel | paths 352. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (A), in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, the sorting unit of the sorting device 35C has a columnar shape that can freely rotate in both the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction. It is configured as a roller 38 </ b> C (rotating body) and is disposed immediately below the introduction port 350.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), in the gaming machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment, the sorting unit of the sorting device 35D can freely rotate in both the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction. It is configured as 38D and is disposed immediately below the inlet 350. In the windmill 38D, a rotating body 382D is fixed by a nail 381D (fixed portion) so as to be freely rotatable. An end of the nail 381D is driven into the game board 31, the end is a fixed end, and the end opposite to the end is a free end. The nail 381D is made of, for example, metal and can be plastically deformed. Therefore, the nail 381D of the windmill 38D can be plastically changed, so that the position of the nail 381D deviates from the initial setting position, and when the position of the rotating body 382D deviates from the initial setting position, the nail 381D is moved to the initial setting position. It becomes possible to return to. This makes it possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the nail 381D.

  Also in the gaming machine 10 according to the ninth and tenth embodiments, the rotating body such as the roller 38C and the windmill 38D that freely rotate in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction due to the interference of the game ball 99 is distributed. Therefore, the ratio of the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 can be biased temporarily and accidentally. Thereby, similarly to the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment and the eighth embodiment described above, when the special figure gaming state is the mode B or the mode C, the gaming ball 99 is moved to the first passage 351 and the first passage 351. Since it is possible to enjoy the game with joy and wonder about which of the two passages 352 is guided, that is, whether or not the game ball 99 receives the support of the electric support member 36 and wins the second starting port 315, Interest can be improved. Further, when the distribution unit is a rotating body such as the roller 38C or the windmill 38D, the player tends to distribute the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the rotation body as the distribution unit (individual between the gaming machines). It is also possible to read the difference. As a result, the player can find a firing stroke in which the game ball can be easily distributed to the second passage 352 by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22 to adjust the launch strength (launch stroke) of the game ball. Because it becomes possible, it is fun to search for the launch strength at which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage 352, or fun to search for the game machine 10 from which a plurality of game machines 10 are easily distributed to the second passage 352. Can be obtained.

  Note that the configuration of the rotating body as the allocating unit is not limited to the cylindrical roller 38C shown in FIG. 53A or the windmill 38D shown in FIG. 53B, and the design can be changed. For example, the rotating body includes a prismatic rotating body such as a triangular prism or a quadrangular prism, a flat cross-sectional member such as an elliptical column member or a flat plate member, a rotating body having irregularities on the outer peripheral surface of a gear, etc., and a plurality of wings. A propeller-like member or the like may be used.

  Further, the rotating body such as the cylindrical roller 38C and the windmill 38D may be configured to be rotatable in the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction by a driving unit such as a solenoid connected to the rotating body. In this case, for example, the rotation driving of the rotating body may be alternately switched between the clockwise direction and the counterclockwise direction every predetermined time (for example, about 0.5 second to 2 seconds). Of course, it is not always necessary for the rotating body to switch the rotation direction at regular time intervals, and the rotation direction may be switched at irregularly patterned time intervals. In this case, it is preferable to switch the rotation direction of the rotating body so that the game ball 99 is distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 with a theoretical value of 1: 1, but the first passage 351 and the second passage You may make it switch the rotation direction of a rotary body so that the theoretical distribution ratio of a game ball with 352 may become other than 1: 1. In this case, you may make it change the theoretical distribution ratio of the game ball of the 1st channel | path 351 and the 2nd channel | path 352 according to a game state. For example, compared to mode B, the mode C can be configured to drive the rotating body so that the game ball is more easily guided to the second passage 352, and vice versa. Further, an entrance sensor is provided in the vicinity of the introduction port 350, and when the entry of the game ball 99 into the introduction port 350 is detected by the entrance sensor, the rotating body is rotated in the direction opposite to the previous rotation direction. It is also possible.

<Eleventh and twelfth embodiments>
In the sorting devices of the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the game ball 99 is moved to the first passage 351 or the second passage 352 by a sorting portion (fixed sorting portion) that does not rotate and does not rotate regardless of rotation or rotation. This is different from the first embodiment described above in that it is assigned to any of the above.

  As shown in FIG. 54 (A), in the sorting device 35E of the gaming machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment, the top portion 389E is provided directly below the introduction port 350, and the bilaterally symmetrical mountain-shaped fixing portion 38E is sorted. The part is formed. In the mountain-shaped fixing portion 38E, the game balls 99 that interfere with the top portion 389E or the vicinity thereof are distributed to the left and right, so that the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), in the sorting device 35F of the gaming machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment, the apex nail 389F (fixed portion) is located directly below the inlet 350 and is a symmetrical triangle. A distribution portion constituted by the nail 38F is formed. In this triangular nail 38F, the game balls 99 that have interfered with the apex nail 389F are distributed to the left and right, so that the game balls 99 are distributed to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352. Each of the triangular nails 38F is driven into the game board 31, and the end is a fixed end and the end opposite to the end is a free end. Further, the triangular nail 38F is made of, for example, metal and can be plastically deformed. Therefore, since each of the triangular nails 38F can be plastically changed, the triangular nail 38F can be returned to the initial setting position when the position of the triangular nail 38F deviates from the initial setting position. Thereby, it is possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio with time by adjusting the position of the triangular nail 38F.

  Also in the gaming machine 10 according to the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, since the allocating portion is a stationary allocating portion that is immovable and non-rotatable such as the mountain-shaped fixing portion 38E and the triangular nail 38F, About the ratio distributed to the 1st channel | path 351 and the 2nd channel | path 352, it can give a bias temporarily and accidentally. Thereby, similarly to the gaming machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment and the eighth embodiment described above, when the special figure gaming state is the mode B or the mode C, the gaming ball 99 is moved to the first passage 351 and the first passage 351. Since it is possible to enjoy the game with joy and wonder about which of the two passages 352 is guided, that is, whether or not the game ball 99 receives the support of the electric support member 36 and wins the second starting port 315, Interest can be improved. In addition, when the distribution unit is a fixed distribution unit that is immovable and non-rotatable such as the mountain-shaped fixed unit 38E and the triangular nail 38F, the player distributes the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the fixed distribution unit. It is also possible to read the tendency (individual difference between gaming machines). As a result, the player can find a firing stroke in which the game ball can be easily distributed to the second passage 352 by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22 to adjust the launch strength (launch stroke) of the game ball. Because it becomes possible, it is fun to search for the launch strength at which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage 352, or fun to search for the game machine 10 from which a plurality of game machines 10 are easily distributed to the second passage 352. Can be obtained.

  Note that the configuration of the distribution unit that distributes the game balls 99 to the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 is limited to the mountain-shaped fixing portion 38E shown in FIG. 54 (A) and the triangular nail 38F shown in FIG. 54 (B). The design can be changed. For example, the allocating portion may have another symmetrical shape such as a dome-shaped mountain portion, and four or more square nails (diamond nails) whose apex nails are located immediately below the introduction port 350 may be used. What consists of a nail and what consists of one nail may be sufficient. Of course, the distribution ratio of the game balls between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 may be biased by adopting an asymmetric shape.

[Thirteenth to 29th embodiments]
In the first embodiment described above, a plurality of delay guides 364 are provided on the electric support member 36 as a normal electric accessory from the wall portion 361 so as to be inclined such that the distal end portion is located on the left side (downstream side) compared to the base end portion. The plurality of delay guides 364 are arranged in a zigzag pattern so that the residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric accessory 36 can be secured for a long time. On the other hand, in the thirteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments, the residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 is ensured long by a configuration different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the thirteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments will be described individually with reference to FIGS.

<Thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments>
In the first embodiment described above, as the delay portion of the electric support member 36 that is an ordinary electric accessory, the wall portion 361 extends in a zigzag shape, and the distal end portion is located on the left side (downstream side) compared to the base end portion. A plurality of slanted delay guides 364 are provided, and the game balls 99 are moved along the meandering path in the electric support member 36, thereby ensuring a long residence time of the game balls 99 in the electric support member 36. On the other hand, the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments are also configured to move the game ball 99 along the meandering path by the delay portion in the electric support member as in the first embodiment. However, the configuration of the delay unit is different from that of the first embodiment.

  The thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments will be described below with reference to FIGS. 55 (A) to 55 (C). Here, FIG. 55A is a plan view of the electric support member 36A of the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, and FIG. 55B is the electric support member 36B of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment. FIG. 55C is a plan view of the electric support member 36C of the gaming machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (A), in the electric support member 36A of the gaming machine 10 according to the thirteenth embodiment, each of the plurality of delay guides 364A as the delay portion is an equilateral triangle in plan view, The inclined side is located on the upstream side and is arranged in a staggered manner as a whole. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (B), in the electric support member 36B of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourteenth embodiment, each of the plurality of delay guides 364B as the delay portion is semicircular in plan view, It is arranged in a staggered pattern as a whole. In the plurality of delay guides 364A and 364B shown in FIGS. 55 (A) and 55 (B), the game ball 99 interferes with each of the delay guides 364A and 364B in the electric support members 36A and 36B. It moves from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) while meandering.

  The plurality of delay guides as the delay unit are not limited to a regular triangle or a semicircular shape in plan view, and are not particularly limited as long as the game ball 99 can be meandered. For example, the plurality of delay guides are each formed in a square shape such as an isosceles triangle, a right triangle, a trapezoid, and a parallelogram, and arranged in a staggered manner so that the inclined side is located on the right side (upstream side), Are formed in a shape having a parabolic or arcuate outer periphery such as a quadrant, semi-ellipse, or quadrant ellipse, and staggered so that the outer periphery of the parabola or arc is located on the right side (upstream side) It may be arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (C), in the electric support member 36C of the gaming machine 10 according to the fifteenth embodiment, the delay portion is formed as a meandering groove 364C. Also with such a meandering groove 364C, the game ball 99 moves from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) while meandering in the electric support member 36C. The shape of the meandering groove 364C as the delay portion can be various as long as it is a groove shape that can meander the game ball 99.

  As described above, in the electric support members 36A to 36C of the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments, while the game balls 99 meander in the electric support members 36A to 36C, similarly to the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above. By moving from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side), it is possible to secure a long residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support members 36A to 36C. As a result, also in the thirteenth to fifteenth embodiments, as in the first embodiment described above, if the player makes a right turn when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, It becomes difficult to receive support from the support members 36A to 36C. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an abnormal profit exceeding the expected profit in the gaming machine 10 from being obtained when the right hand is made under a situation where left-handed is encouraged.

<16th to 29th Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, as the delay portion of the electric support member 36, a plurality of slanted shapes extending from the wall portion 361 in a zigzag shape and having a distal end portion located on the left side (downstream side) with respect to the proximal end portion. By providing the delay guide 364 and moving the game ball 99 along the meandering path in the electric support member 36, the moving distance of the game ball in the electric support member 36 is increased, and the residence time of the game ball 99 in the electric support member 36 is increased. Had been secured for a long time. On the other hand, in the sixteenth embodiment to the twenty-ninth embodiment, the game ball stays in the electric support member while linearly moving the game ball in the electric support member as the delay portion of the electric support member. Is different from the first embodiment described above in that it can be secured for a long time.

  Hereinafter, the sixteenth to twenty-ninth embodiments will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 56 to 63. However, in the electric support members of these embodiments as well, it is possible to secure a long residence time of the game ball. The same effect as the first embodiment is obtained. That is, when the player makes a right turn when the special figure gaming state is mode B or mode C, it becomes difficult to receive support by the electric support member, so that the right turn is recommended in a situation where left-handed is encouraged. When hitting, it is possible to prevent an abnormal profit exceeding the expected profit in the gaming machine 10 from being obtained.

(Sixteenth embodiment)
Here, FIG. 56 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36D of the gaming machine 10 according to the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 56 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A1-A1 of FIG. 56 (A). is there.

  As shown in FIGS. 56 (A) and 56 (B), in the sixteenth embodiment, a plurality of linear convex portions 364D extending in series between the wall portions 361 are provided as delay portions of the electric support member 36D. It has been. The plurality of linear protrusions 364D extend in parallel with each other at a constant interval. Each linear protrusion 364D has a horizontal surface 365D and a vertical surface 366D, and has a uniform triangular cross section. In the electric support member 36D of the present embodiment, the movement of the game ball 99 is delayed in the horizontal plane 365D by providing the horizontal plane 365D.

  The horizontal surface 365D may be a smooth surface or a rough surface, but a rough surface having a large movement resistance is preferable from the viewpoint of delaying the game ball. Here, the rough surface includes a textured surface due to embossing or the like in addition to a textured surface due to embossing. Further, the movement resistance of the game ball may be increased by arranging an elastic member on the horizontal plane or forming the horizontal plane with an elastic material.

  The linear protrusion 364D may be provided with a slightly inclined surface whose left side (downstream side) is slightly lower or higher than the right side (upstream side) instead of the horizontal plane 365D. In this case, if the inclination angle of the slightly inclined surface with respect to the horizontal is smaller than the inclination angle of the electric support member 36D with respect to the horizontal, a delay function can be achieved. Therefore, for example, −10 ° to + 10 ° (excluding 0 °) with respect to the horizontal plane. preferable. Further, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of linear convex portions as the delay portion, and one linear convex portion may be provided.

(17th to 19th embodiments)
Here, FIG. 57A is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the electric support member 36E of the gaming machine 10 according to the seventeenth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 57C is a cross-sectional view showing a main part of the electric support member 36G of the gaming machine 10 according to the nineteenth embodiment.

  The electric support members 36E to 36G of the seventeenth to nineteenth embodiments are provided with a plurality of linear protrusions 364E to 364G having horizontal surfaces 365E to 365G, and the electric support members of the sixteenth embodiment described above. Common with 36D. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), the linear convex portion 364E of the seventeenth embodiment is provided with an inclined surface 366E instead of the vertical surface 366D of the sixteenth embodiment described above. As shown in FIG. 57B, the linear convex portion 364F of the eighteenth embodiment has a horizontal surface 365F, but an arcuate surface 366F is provided instead of the vertical surface 366D of the sixteenth embodiment described above. This is different from the sixteenth embodiment described above. Note that a surface that is an alternative to the vertical surface 366D of the electric support member 36D of the sixteenth embodiment is not limited to the inclined surface 366E and the arc surface 366F, and may be a surface of another shape.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (C), in the eighteenth embodiment, a plurality of linear protrusions 364G are provided adjacent to each other, and horizontal surfaces 365G and vertical surfaces 366G are alternately continuous. This is different from the linear convex portion 364D of the sixteenth embodiment described above. Of course, in the eighteenth embodiment, instead of the vertical surface 366G, a surface of another shape such as an inclined surface or an arc surface may be adopted.

  Note that the linear protrusions 364E, 364F, and 364G of the seventeenth to nineteenth embodiments can be modified in the same manner as in the sixteenth embodiment described above.

(20th embodiment)
Here, FIG. 58 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36H of the gaming machine according to the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 58 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A2-A2 of FIG. 58 (A). .

  The electric support member 36H of the twentieth embodiment shown in FIGS. 58 (A) and 58 (B) is different from the first embodiment in that it is provided as a plurality of linear recesses.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 (A) and 56 (B), in the twentieth embodiment, a plurality of linear recesses 364H extending in series between the wall portions 361 are provided as delay portions of the electric support member 36H. ing. The plurality of linear recesses 364H extend in parallel to each other at regular intervals. Each linear recess 364H has a horizontal surface 365H and a vertical surface 366H, and has a uniform triangular cross section. In the electric support member 36H of the present embodiment, the movement of the game ball 99 is delayed on the horizontal plane 365H by providing the horizontal plane 365H. The linear recess 364H may adopt a surface of another shape in the same manner as in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments described above, instead of the horizontal surface 365H and the vertical surface 366H. Also, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of linear concave portions as the delay portion, and one linear concave portion may be provided.

(21st to 26th embodiments)
Here, FIG. 59A is a perspective view of the electric support member 36I of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-first embodiment, and FIG. 59B is the electric support member 36J of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 60A is a perspective view showing a main part of the electric support member 36K of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-third embodiment, and FIG. 60B is electric drawing of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 61A is a perspective view showing the main part of the electric support member 36M of the gaming machine 10 according to the 25th embodiment, and FIG. 61B is the 26th implementation. It is a perspective view showing an important section of electric support member 36N of game machine 10 concerning a form.

  The electric support members 36I to 36N of the 21st to 26th embodiments shown in FIG. 59 to FIG. 61 are described above in that they are provided as a plurality of convex portions 364I to 364N in which delay portions are discretely arranged. Different from the first embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (A), in the twenty-first embodiment, the delay portions of the electric support member 36I are formed as a plurality of convex portions 364I, and these convex portions 364I are arranged in a rectangular lattice shape. Each convex portion 364I has a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the electric support member 36I along the longitudinal direction of the linear convex portion 364D of the sixteenth embodiment (A1-A1 in FIG. 56A). The cross-sectional shape along the cutting line (see FIG. 56B) is the same shape.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (B), in the twenty-second embodiment, the plurality of convex portions 364J having the same shape as in the twenty-first embodiment described above are arranged in a rhombic lattice (rhombic lattice, triangular lattice, Isosceles lattice).

  As shown in FIG. 60A, in the twenty-third embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364K are formed in a quadrangular prism shape, and these convex portions 364K are arranged in a rectangular lattice shape. The plurality of convex portions 364K may be formed in a polygonal column shape in addition to a quadrangular column shape such as a triangular column shape or a pentagonal column shape, or in a staggered shape (rhombic lattice shape (rhombic lattice shape, triangular lattice shape, isosceles lattice shape)). You may arrange.

  As shown in FIG. 60B, in the twenty-fourth embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364L are formed in a quadrangular pyramid shape, and these convex portions 364L are arranged in a rectangular lattice shape. The plurality of convex portions 364L may be formed in a polygonal pyramid shape in addition to a quadrangular pyramid shape such as a triangular pyramid shape or a pentagonal pyramid shape, and in an orthorhombic lattice shape (diamond lattice shape, triangular lattice shape, isosceles lattice shape). You may arrange.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (A), in the twenty-fifth embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364M are formed in a cylindrical shape, and these convex portions 364M are arranged in a rectangular lattice shape.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (B), in the twenty-sixth embodiment, a plurality of convex portions 364N are formed in a hemispherical shape, and these convex portions 364N are arranged in a rectangular lattice shape.

  The plurality of convex portions 364M of the twenty-fifth embodiment and the plurality of convex portions 364N of the twenty-sixth embodiment may be arranged in an orthorhombic lattice shape (rhombic lattice shape, triangular lattice shape, isosceles lattice shape). Further, instead of the plurality of protrusions 364M and the plurality of protrusions 364N, a plurality of protrusions having a conical shape, a truncated cone shape, or the like having a circular bottom surface may be discretely arranged.

  It should be noted that the plurality of convex portions as the delay portions need not all have the same shape, and may be arranged by combining a plurality of different shaped convex portions, or in combination with a linear convex portion or a linear concave portion. You may arrange. Further, the plurality of convex portions as the delay portions are not necessarily arranged in a lattice shape, and may be arranged so as to have regularity other than the lattice shape, or may be a random arrangement that does not have regularity.

(Twenty-seventh and twenty-eighth embodiments)
Here, FIG. 62 (A) is a perspective view of the electric support member 36O of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-seventh embodiment, and FIG. 62 (B) is an electric support member 36P of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a perspective view.

  The electric support members 36O and 36P of the twenty-seventh and twenty-eighth embodiments shown in FIGS. 62A and 62B are provided as a plurality of recesses 364O and 364P in which delay portions are discretely arranged. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

  As shown in FIG. 62A, in the electric support member 36O according to the twenty-seventh embodiment, a plurality of recesses 364O are formed as delay portions, and these recesses 364O are arranged in a rectangular lattice shape. Each concave portion 364O has a cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the electric support member 36O along the longitudinal direction of the linear convex portion 364D of the sixteenth embodiment described above (cut along A1-A1 in FIG. 56A). The cross-sectional shape along the line (see FIG. 56B) is the same shape.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (B), in the electric support member 36P of the twenty-eighth embodiment, a plurality of recesses 364P having the same shape as the recesses 364O of the twenty-seventh embodiment described above are inclined as delay portions. They are arranged in a rectangular lattice shape (diamond lattice shape, triangular lattice shape, isosceles lattice shape).

  Note that the shape of the plurality of recesses as the delay portion can be variously changed, for example, a polygonal column shape such as a quadrangular prism shape, a polygonal pyramid shape such as a quadrangular pyramid shape, a cylindrical shape, a hemispherical shape, a conical shape, a truncated cone shape, etc. The bottom surface may be circular or the like.

  Further, the plurality of concave portions as the delay portions need not all have the same shape, and a plurality of concave portions having different shapes may be arranged in combination, such as a linear convex portion, a linear concave portion, and a plurality of convex portions. And may be arranged in combination. Furthermore, the plurality of concave portions as the delay portions are not necessarily arranged in a lattice shape, and may be arranged so as to have regularity other than the lattice shape, or may be a random arrangement without regularity.

(Twenty-ninth embodiment)
Here, FIG. 63A is a perspective view of the electric support member 36Q of the gaming machine 10 according to the twenty-ninth embodiment, and FIG. 63B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A3-A3 of FIG. is there.

  The electric support member 36Q of the 29th embodiment shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B is the first embodiment described above in that the delay portion is provided as a plurality of rollers 364Q that are rotationally driven. Different from form.

  As shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B, the electric support member 36Q of the twenty-ninth embodiment includes a plurality of rollers 364Q (five in this embodiment) as delay portions. However, it is not always necessary to provide a plurality of rollers 364Q, and at least one roller suffices. Each roller 364Q is disposed such that its rotation axis is along the short direction of the electric support member 36Q (the direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball 99), and is rotatably supported. Each roller 364Q is rotationally driven in a clockwise direction that is opposite to the moving direction of the game ball by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. Therefore, the game ball 99 moving on the electric support member 36Q interferes with the plurality of rollers 364Q, so that a load is applied toward the right side (upstream side). Accordingly, the momentum of the game ball 99 moving from the right side (upstream side) to the left side (downstream side) is reduced, so that the residence time of the game ball 99 moving the electric support member 36Q is secured long.

  The roller 364Q may have a smooth surface or a rough surface on the outer surface, but a rough surface having a large movement resistance is preferable from the viewpoint of delaying the game ball. Here, the rough surface includes a textured surface due to embossing or the like in addition to a textured surface due to embossing. Further, an elastic member may be disposed on the outer surface of the roller 364Q, or the outer surface of the roller 364Q may be made of an elastic material, thereby increasing the movement resistance of the game ball.

  When the delay unit is configured as a roller, a magnetic force or electromagnetic force may be applied to the game ball 99 via the roller. Thereby, the momentum of the game ball 99 can be reduced by the game ball 99 being attracted by the roller. In this case, the roller may be driven to rotate counterclockwise as in the twenty-ninth embodiment, but may be configured to be freely rotatable without being driven to rotate by the driving means.

  Further, the roller 364Q includes linear convex portions 364D to 364G, linear concave portions 364H, and a plurality of convex portions arranged in a lattice pattern like the electric support members 36D to 36P of the sixteenth to twenty-eighth embodiments described above. It is also conceivable to use in addition to the configuration in which 364I to 364N and the recesses 364O and 364P are provided.

[Thirty to thirty-eighth embodiments]
In the first embodiment described above, the first start port 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function is provided, and the left first start port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35. The right first start port 314R is provided immediately below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, and the second start port 315 having a function different from that of the first start port 314 is the right first start port 314L and the right first start port 314L. The case where it is provided in the center of the ball receiving portion 391 that is a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35 between the first start port 314R and the first start port 314R has been described. On the other hand, the 30th to 38th embodiments differ from the first embodiment described above in that one each of the first start port and the second start port is provided. Hereinafter, the thirtieth to thirty-eighth embodiments will be described individually with reference to the drawings.

<Thirty Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the winning of the game ball 99 to the second start port 315 is supported by the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape has been described. On the other hand, the present embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the electric support member is formed in a reverse letter shape. Further, since the electric support member is formed in a reverse shape, the configurations of the first start port and the second start port are also different from those in the first embodiment.

  The 30th embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 64 (A) is a view showing a main part of the gaming board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36R of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 64 (B) is an illustration of the electric support member 36R. A perspective view, FIG. 65 (A) is a view when the electric support member 36R is in a standby state in FIG. 64 (A), FIG. 65 (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A3-A3 of FIG. 66A is a view when the electric support member 36R is in the operating position in FIG. 64A, and FIG. 66B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A4-A4 in FIG. 66A.

  In the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function is provided, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35. The right first start port 314 </ b> R is provided immediately below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. In the first embodiment described above, the second starter 315 having a function different from that of the first starter 314 is provided between the left first starter 314L and the right first starter 314R. Is provided at the center of the ball receiving portion 391 provided in the region immediately below the inlet 350. Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and below the outlet of the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 (the second start port 315). A standby position that restricts the entry of the game ball into the second start port 315 and an operating position that allows the game ball to enter the second start port 315. The game board 31 can be moved back and forth between the two.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64A, there is one first start port 314, and this first start port 314 is in the region directly below the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35. A ball receiving portion 391 is provided at the center. That is, the first start port 314 of the present embodiment is provided at the position of the second start port 315 of the first embodiment described above, and is connected to the game ball 99 and the second passage 352 distributed to the first passage 351. Any of the game balls 99 to be distributed can win a prize at the same first starting port 314. Further, the second start port 315 of the present embodiment is provided at a position offset to the right side from a position immediately below a second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 described later, and a game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 is provided. There is no direct entry into the second starting port 315.

  As shown in FIGS. 64A and 64B, the electric support member 36R has an inverted character shape having a left guiding portion 361R (first portion) and a right guiding portion 362R (second portion). . The left guiding portion 361R is located below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and to the left of the second starting port 315, and is inclined downward toward the second starting port 315. Therefore, the left guide portion 361R can guide the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 to the right side. The right guiding portion 362R extends in series between the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and the right side of the second starting port 315, and is inclined downward to the left toward the second starting port 315. . Therefore, the right guiding unit 362R can guide the game ball moving from the stage 310 to the left side toward the second start port 315. In addition, it is preferable to provide a delay unit in the right guiding unit 362R as in the first embodiment described above. As a result, in a gaming state in which the electric support member 36R is operated for a short time, when a hitting method (right strike) other than the recommended strike method (left strike) is performed, the game ball wins a prize at the second start port 315. It becomes difficult to be done. In other words, the gaming machine 10 can positively make the player left-handed by eliminating the advantage of right-handing in a gaming state in which left-handedness is encouraged.

  A penetrating portion 363R is provided between the left guiding portion 361R and the right guiding portion 362R so as to be positioned above the second starting port 315. The through portion 363 </ b> R has a notch shape that opens forward, and is formed in a form that allows the game ball 99 to pass therethrough. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided from the left guide portion 361R can pass through the penetration portion 363R and enter the second start port 315, and the game ball 99 guided from the right guide portion 362R can pass through the penetration portion 363R. Can enter the second start port 315. In addition, the electric support member 36R has a front-rear direction between a standby position that restricts entry of the game ball into the second start port 315 and an operation position that allows entry of the game ball into the second start port 315. Can be moved to. The movement of the electric support member 36R in the front-rear direction is realized by driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. The electric support member 36R is different in shape from the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above, but the operating conditions and the operation pattern are the same as those of the first embodiment. Specifically, in Mode A to Mode C, the game ball 99 passing through the first through gate 318 can enter the second starting port 315 for a short time when the lottery result in the lottery per common figure is a win. In the mode D and the mode E, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 is driven for a long time so as to be able to enter the second starting port 315 when the lottery result in the lottery per common figure is win. . The electric support member 36R is operated on condition that the passing of the game ball in the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 is detected in the first through gate 318 without performing lottery per normal drawing. May be.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 (A) and 65 (B), when the electric support member 36R is in the standby position, the electric support member 36R does not protrude from the game board 31 and is entirely inside the game board 31. Located in. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the first start port 314 without being guided to the second start port 315 by the left guide portion 361R. In addition, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 is dropped along the game board 31 on the left side of the stage 310 without being guided to the second starting port 315 by the right guiding unit 362R and from the out port 317. Discharged. That is, like the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment, the electric support member 36R allows the game ball 99 to enter the first start port 314 when in the standby position, while the first 2 The entry of the game ball 99 into the start port 315 is restricted.

  As shown in FIGS. 66A and 66B, when the electric support member 36R is in the operating position, the electric support member 36R protrudes from the game board 31. Therefore, the game ball 99 passing through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 is guided toward the penetration portion 363R by the left guide portion 361R, and the electric support member 36R operates until the game ball 99 reaches the penetration portion 363R. When it is in the position, it passes through the through portion 363R and enters the second starting port 315. In addition, the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 is guided toward the penetration portion 363R by the right guidance portion 362R, and the electric support member 36R is in the operating position until the game ball 99 reaches the penetration portion 363R. The ball passes through the through portion 363R and enters the second start port 315. That is, like the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36R allows the game ball 99 to be restricted to the first start port 314 when in the operating position, while the second The game ball 99 is allowed to enter the start port 315. Further, the electric support member 36 </ b> R has both the game ball 99 that passes through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and the game ball 99 that has been launched into the right area of the game board 31 when in the operating position. The ball is allowed to enter the starting port 315.

  Also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, retraction guide nails 393 and 394 (retraction guide portions) are provided on the right side of the sorting device 35. The retraction guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36 </ b> R in a direction to retreat from the sorting device 35. That is, the retraction guide nails 393 and 394 guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the second start port 315, so that the electric support member 36R is opened for a short time. It is possible to prevent the game ball 99 located in the right region of the sorting device 35 from being guided to the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36R.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the 1st starting port 314 is provided below the 1st channel 351 like the above-mentioned 1st embodiment, the game balls 99 distributed to the 1st channel 351 are The first start port 314 is entered. On the other hand, the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enter the second start port 315 when the electric support member 36R receives the support by operating the electric support member 36R, and the electric support member 36R If the support cannot be received, the ball is entered into the first start port 314. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a state in which a game ball enters the first start port 314 by the first passage 351, a state in which the game ball 99 enters the first start port 314 by the second passage 352, Three states can be taken: a state in which a game ball enters the second start port 315 by the second passage 352 or the electric support member 36R. Whether the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enter the first start port 314 or the second start port 315 depends on whether or not the electric support member 36R is operated, and the electric support member 36R. The operation time and the operation frequency of this depend on the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Therefore, in this embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be brought about by the cooperation of the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36R, but the game balls distributed to the second passage 352 in accordance with the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Since the ease of entering 99 into the second start opening 315 is different, the game is not monotonous as in the conventional gaming machine, and the fun of the game is improved.

  In addition, the electric support member 36R of the present embodiment is not limited to whether or not the game ball 99 enters the second start port 315, as well as the first embodiment, as well as the first of the distribution device 35. The presence / absence of restriction on the entry of the game ball 99 passing through the two passages 352 into the first start port 314 is simultaneously switched. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 are cooperated by the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36R, as in the first embodiment. It is possible to vary the entrance ratio with. Thereby, mode A (expected value is 0%), mode C (expected value is 50%), and mode E (expected value is different) in the expected value of the entrance ratio of the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315. 100%) to achieve three gaming states, reduce the monotony of the game based on three gaming states with different expected values of the entrance ratio, and change the operation of the electric support member 36R according to the control mode. It is possible to provide a highly entertaining gaming machine having characteristics.

  By the way, in the above-described first embodiment, a right-handed game ball, like the electric support member 36, passes above the first start port 314R and enters the second start port 315. In this case, when the electric support member 36 returns to the standby position at the timing when the game ball passes above the first start port 314R, there is a possibility that the game ball at the time of right-handed hits the first start port 314. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the right-handed game ball is guided to the second starting port 315 by the right guiding portion 362R of the electric support member 36R, and therefore the right-handed game ball is the first starting port 314. It does not pass above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball at the time of a right hit from entering the first start port 314.

  The penetration portion of the electric support member 36 </ b> R is not limited to a notch shape opened forward, but may be a through hole that opens only upward and downward without opening in the horizontal direction.

<Thirty-first embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the winning of the game ball 99 to the second start port 315 is supported by the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape has been described. On the other hand, this embodiment is different from the first embodiment described above in that the ordinary electric accessory is configured as an electric tulip. In addition, since the ordinary electric accessory is configured as an electric tulip, the configurations of the first start port and the second start port are also different from those of the first embodiment.

  The thirty-first embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B). Here, FIG. 67 (A) and FIG. 67 (B) are figures which show the principal part of the game board 31 containing the distribution apparatus 35 of the gaming machine 10 which concerns on this embodiment, and the electric tulip accessory apparatus 36S. 67 (A) shows a state where the electric tulip accessory device 36S is closed, and FIG. 67 (B) shows a state where the electric tulip accessory device 36S is opened.

  In the first embodiment described above, the first starting port 314 (314L, 314R) having the same function is provided, and the left first starting port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35. The right first start port 314 </ b> R is provided immediately below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. In the first embodiment described above, the second starter 315 having a function different from that of the first starter 314 is provided between the left first starter 314L and the right first starter 314R. Is provided at the center of the ball receiving portion 391 provided in the region immediately below the inlet 350.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 (A) and 67 (B), there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 is the introduction of the distribution device 35. It is provided at the center of a ball receiving portion 391 provided in a region directly below the mouth 350. That is, the first start port 314 of the present embodiment is provided at the position of the second start port 315 of the first embodiment described above, and the game ball 99 and the second passage 352 distributed to the first passage 351. Any of the game balls 99 distributed to can be awarded to the same first starting port 314. Moreover, the 2nd starting port 315 of this embodiment is provided in the inside of the below-mentioned electric tulip accessory apparatus 36S.

  The electric tulip accessory device 36S is provided at a position offset to the right from the region directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, and includes a housing 367S fixed to the game board 31, and a rotatable left and right wing member 3681S, 3682S.

  The housing 367S has an upper opening 369S that allows the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S to rotate and the game ball 99 to enter. The upper opening 369S is a portion for introducing the game ball 99 into the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and is provided at a position offset to the right side of the region immediately below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. That is, the game ball guided to the second passage 352 is restricted from being directly introduced into the upper opening 369S. A second start port 315 is provided directly below the upper opening 369S. Similar to the upper opening 369S, the second start port 315 is offset to the right with respect to the second passage 352.

  A triangular nail 31S composed of three nails is provided above the upper opening 369S. The triangular nail 31S restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the electric tulip accessory device 36S in a state where the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are closed (see FIG. 67A). In addition, instead of the triangular nail 31S, the entry of the game ball 99 may be restricted by one nail, or the entry of the game ball may be restricted by something other than the nail. In addition, by reducing the distance between the tip portions of the left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S in the closed state, the game ball 99 to the electric tulip accessory device 36S in the state where the left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S are closed is used. If the entry can be restricted, the triangular nail 31S may be omitted.

  On the right side of the electric tulip accessory device 36S, a road nail 31M '(guidance portion) composed of a plurality of nails is provided through a gap that allows the game ball 99 to pass therethrough. The road nail 31M 'is provided so as to incline to the left, and guides the game ball 99 which is launched into the right region of the game board 31 and flows down the right region toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S. Therefore, in the state where the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S, which will be described later, are opened (see FIG. 67 (B)), the game ball 99 is guided to the nail 31M ′ so that the game ball 99 passes through the upper opening 369S. A game ball 99 is introduced into the second start port 315 after being introduced into the device 36S. On the other hand, in the state where the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S, which will be described later, are closed (see FIG. 67A), the game ball 99 guided to the road nail 31M ′ enters the upper opening 369S by the right wing member 3682S. Is restricted, passes through the gap between the electric tulip accessory device 36S and the nail 31M ′, and is discharged from the out port 317. Also in this embodiment, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide portion instead of the road nail 31M ′ by increasing the dimension of the stage 310.

  The left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S can be rotated by driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid provided on the back surface of the game board 31. The state (see FIG. 67 (A)) and the open state (see FIG. 67 (B)) in which the tip portions of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are separated are switched. Note that the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are driven by the MPU 41 in the same manner as the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above. That is, in the ordinary electric accessory control process (see FIG. 19) in the first embodiment described above, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory (electric support member 36) opens the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S of the present embodiment. Correspondingly, the return of the ordinary electric accessory (electric support member 36) corresponds to the closing of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S of the present embodiment.

  In the closed state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S shown in FIG. 67 (A), the game ball 99 that has passed through the second passage 352 collides with the side surface of the left wing member 3681S and enters the electric tulip accessory device 36S. I can't play a ball. That is, in the closed state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S, the left wing member 3681S prevents the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 from entering the second start port 315. At this time, the game ball 99 that has collided with the side surface of the left wing member 3681S is bounced to the left and falls to the ball receiving portion 391, and is guided to the first start opening 314 by the ball receiving portion 391. Win 314. In addition, the game ball 99 that is driven to the right area of the game board 31 and guided toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S by the road nail 31M ′ collides with the side surface of the electric tulip accessory device 36S, and the electric tulip accessory The ball cannot enter the inside of the device 36S. At this time, the game ball 99 colliding with the side surface of the electric tulip accessory device 36S passes through the gap between the electric tulip accessory device 36S and the road nail 31M ′ as described above, and is discharged from the out port 317. .

  In the opened state of the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S shown in FIG. 67 (B), the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 is picked up by the left wing member 3681S and enters the electric tulip accessory device 36S. Then, the second start opening 315 is won. The game ball 99 that flows down the right region of the game board 31 and is guided toward the electric tulip accessory device 36S by the road nail 31M ′ bridges between the second start port 315 and the road nail 31M ′. Picked up by the right wing member 3682S, enters the inside of the electric tulip accessory device 36S and wins the second start opening 315. That is, when the left and right wing members 3681S and 3682S are in the closed state, the electric tulip accessory device 36S is launched into the game ball 99 that has passed through the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and the right region of the game board 31. Any of the gaming balls 99 allowed to enter the second starting port 315 is allowed.

  Also in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided in the direction of retreating from the distribution device 35 on the right side of the distribution device 35. Retraction guide nails 393 and 394 (retraction guide portions) are provided, and guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Thus, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 located in the right region of the sorting device 35 from being guided to the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

  As described above, the electric tulip accessory device 36S of the present embodiment is not only limited in whether or not the game ball 99 enters the second start port 315, as in the first embodiment, but also in the distribution. The presence or absence of the restriction | limiting of the entrance into the 1st starting port 314 of the game ball 99 discharge | released from the 2nd channel | path 352 of the apparatus 35 is switched simultaneously. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the sorting device 35 and the electric tulip accessory device 36S (left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S) cooperate, The entrance ratio between the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 can be varied. Thereby, mode A (expected value is 0%), mode C (expected value is 50%), and mode E (expected value is different) in the expected value of the entrance ratio of the first starting port 314 and the second starting port 315. 100%), and the monotony of the game is reduced based on three gaming states with different expected values of the entrance ratio, and the electric tulip accessory device 36S (left and right wing members 3681S, 3682S) It is possible to provide an amusing gaming machine having a new gaming property according to the control mode of operation. In particular, when configured as the electric tulip accessory device 36S, for example, in a gaming state where a left-handed strike is encouraged to launch a game ball in the left region of the game board 31 (for example, mode A or mode C), In order to prevent the game ball 99 from entering the electric tulip accessory device 36S when a right-hand strike is performed to launch the game ball, a delay unit (delay guide 364 of the electric support member 36 of the first embodiment described above) is used. ), And a known electric tulip accessory device 36S can be employed. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has an advantage that the design is easier than that of the first embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, since only one first start port 314 is required, one first start port and a ball entry sensor can be omitted as compared with the first embodiment described above. Compared to the first embodiment, the design is easier and the manufacturing cost is advantageous.

<Thirty-second embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the right first start port 314 </ b> R is provided immediately below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 has been described. On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that a general winning port having a function different from that of the first start port is provided immediately below the second passage of the sorting apparatus. .

  Hereinafter, the thirty-second embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 68 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of the gaming board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (A), this embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that there is one first start port 314, but this first start port 314 is the distribution device 35. This is common to the first embodiment described above in that it is provided immediately below the first passage 351. Note that the second start port 315 having a function different from that of the first start port 314 is provided at the center of the ball receiving portion 391, which is a region directly below the introduction port 350, as in the first embodiment. Similarly to the first embodiment, the electric support member 36 is continuously formed between the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 and the lower portion of the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. It extends and is movable in the front-rear direction of the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. Further, a general winning port 313 ′ having a function different from that of the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 is provided below the second passage 352 instead of the first start port. That is, the electric support member 36 is in a state in which the general winning opening 313 ′ is opened at the standby position, while the general winning opening 313 ′ is closed in the operating position. In addition, the electric support member 36 restricts the entry of the game ball to the second starting port 315 in a state where the general winning port 313 ′ is opened in the standby position, while the general winning port 313 ′ is closed in the operating position. Then, it guide | induces to the 2nd starting port 315, and entrance of the game ball to the 2nd starting port 315 is permitted.

  In the present embodiment, since the first start port 314 is provided below the first passage 351 as in the first embodiment, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are the first A ball is entered into the start port 314. On the other hand, the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enter the second start port 315 when the electric support member 36 is actuated to receive the support of the electric support member 36, and the electric support member 36. If the support by can not be received, it is entered into the general winning opening 313 ′.

  Here, the conventional gaming machine distribution device distributes the game balls to the first starter and the second starter, and has a drawback that the game becomes monotonous. On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed, the state where the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314 and the second passage A state in which the game ball of 352 enters the general winning opening 313 ′ and a state in which the game ball of the second passage 352 enters the second start port 315 by the second passage 352 and the electric support member 36. There are two possible states. In addition, whether the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enters the general winning opening 313 ′ or the second start opening 315 depends on whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated, and the electric support member 36 The operation time and the operation frequency of this depend on the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the game balls 99 that are distributed to the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure game state as well as being able to be in a plurality of states by the cooperation of the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36. Since the ease of entering the second starting port 315 is different, the game does not become monotonous as in conventional gaming machines, and the fun of the game is improved.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the gaming ball 99 of the second passage 352 can enter the general winning opening 313 ′, so that the gaming machine 10 having novel gaming characteristics that cannot be realized by a conventional gaming machine is provided. The Specifically, for example, in mode A, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enter the first start port 314, while the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 include the first start port 314 and The player enters the general winning port 313 ′ without entering any of the second start ports 315. On the other hand, in the mode C as the latent probability change, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enter the first start port 314 and the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enter the second start port 315. To do. In other words, in the mode A, half of the game balls 99 introduced into the distribution device 35 are inserted into the starting port (first starting port 314) and half are inserted into the general winning port 313 ′. In mode C, all the game balls 99 are entered into the starting port (half is the first starting port 314 and half is the second starting port 315). Therefore, in the mode C, not only the second special figure game that is not executed in the mode A is executed, but also a special figure that is twice the number of the mode A if the number of game balls that enter the sorting device 35 is used as a reference. A game is executed. In other words, in Mode C (latency probability change), the chance of receiving a big win lottery is doubled compared to Mode A. Thus, in this embodiment, a gaming machine 10 of a new gaming machine that could not be realized by a conventional gaming machine is provided.

  Further, if the number of prize balls is different between the first start opening 314 and the general winning opening 313 ′, the increase or decrease of the game balls in the special figure game is different from that in the first embodiment. You can also. For example, by increasing the number of prize balls for the general winning opening 313 'to be larger than the number of prize balls for the first start opening 314, it is possible to provide a game with a moderate decrease in game balls in the special game. On the other hand, by reducing the number of prize balls for the general winning opening 313 'to be smaller than the number of prize balls for the first start opening 314, it is possible to impart game characteristics in which the number of game balls in the special figure game is drastically reduced. In this case, by increasing the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot game, it is possible to make the gaming machine 10 in which the increase or decrease of the game balls is large.

<Thirty-third embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the right first start port 314 </ b> R is provided immediately below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 has been described. In the thirty-second embodiment described above, the case where the general winning opening 313 ′ is provided immediately below the second passage 352 has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first embodiment and the thirty-second embodiment described above are provided in that neither the first start port nor the general winning port is provided immediately below the second passage of the distribution device. Different from form. In the present embodiment, the second start port is not provided immediately below the second passage of the sorting apparatus.

  Hereinafter, the thirty-third embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 68 (B) is a view showing a main part of the gaming board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (B), this embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that there is one first start port 314, but this first start port 314 is the distribution device 35. This is common to the first embodiment described above in that it is provided directly below the first passage 351, and is also common to the thirty-second embodiment. In the present embodiment, the second start port 315 and the electric support member 36 are also common to the first and thirty-second embodiments described above. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, neither the first start port nor the general winning port is provided immediately below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. Also, immediately below the second passage 352 of the allocating device 35, there are not provided a second starting port having a function different from the first starting port and the general winning port, a winning port such as a through gate, or the like. In the present embodiment, when the electric support member 36 is in the operating position, the game ball 99 is guided to the second start port 315, and the game ball is allowed to enter the second start port 315 as described above. Although common to the first embodiment and the thirty-second embodiment, when the electric support member 36 is in the standby position, the game ball 99 in the second passage 352 falls along the game board 31 and receives various winning holes. The second embodiment is different from the first and thirty-second embodiments in that it is discharged from the outlet 317 without winning a prize.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the first start port 314 is provided below the first passage 351, so that the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are subjected to the first start. A ball is entered into the mouth 314. On the other hand, the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enter the second start port 315 when the electric support member 36 receives the support of the electric support member 36 by the operation of the electric support member 36, and the electric support member 36 If the support cannot be received, it is discharged from the outlet 317. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314 and the game ball in the second passage 352. Can be in three states: a state in which the game ball is discharged from the out port 317 and a state in which the game ball in the second channel 352 enters the second start port 315 by the second channel 352 and the electric support member 36. Whether the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 are discharged from the out port 317 or into the second start port 315 depends on whether or not the electric support member 36 is operated, and the electric support member 36 The operation time and the operation frequency of this depend on the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Therefore, also in this embodiment, the game distributed to the second passage 352 according to the mode type of the special figure game state as well as being able to be in a plurality of states by the cooperation of the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36. Since the ease of entering the ball 99 into the second starting port 315 is different, the game is not monotonous as in conventional gaming machines, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In particular, in this embodiment, since the game ball 99 in the second passage 352 is not entered into the first start port 314 or the second start port 315, there is a novel game characteristic that cannot be achieved with a conventional gaming machine. A gaming machine 10 is provided. Specifically, for example, in mode A, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enter the first start port 314, but the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 are discharged from the out port 317. The On the other hand, in mode C which is a latent probability change, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 enter the first start port 314 and the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 enter the second start port 315. Is done. That is, half of the game balls 99 introduced into the distribution device 35 are inserted into the start port (first start port 314) and half are discharged from the out port 317 in mode A, while in the mode C All the game balls 99 are entered into the start opening (half is the first start opening 314 and half is the second start opening 315). Therefore, in the mode C, not only the second special figure game that is not executed in the mode A is executed, but also a special figure that is twice the number of the mode A if the number of game balls that enter the sorting device 35 is used as a reference. A game is executed. In other words, in Mode C (latency probability change), the chance of receiving a big win lottery is doubled compared to Mode A. Thus, in this embodiment, a gaming machine 10 of a new gaming machine that could not be realized by a conventional gaming machine is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the second passage 352 is discharged from the out-port 317 when there is no support by the electric support member 36, but from the second passage 352 below the sorting device 35. A winning opening may be provided at a distant position so that a game ball that has passed through the second passage 352 can enter the winning opening.

<Thirty-fourth embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front-rear direction between the standby position and the operating position with respect to the game board 31, whereby the second start port 315 is moved to the second start port 315. The case where entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been described. On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the electric support member is slid along the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. In addition, one first start port 314 is provided immediately below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the second start port 315 is also provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

  The thirty-fourth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. Here, FIG. 69 (A) is a diagram showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment and the electric support member 36T in the standby state, and FIG. 69 (B) is a diagram. 69 (A) is a perspective view of the main part, FIG. 70 (A) is a diagram showing the main part when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position in FIG. 69 (A), and FIG. 70 (B) is FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the principal part of).

  In the first embodiment described above, there are two first start ports 314 (314L, 314R), the left first start port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the right first A start port 314 </ b> R is provided immediately below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. In the first embodiment described above, the second start port 315 is a ball that is a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the sorting device 35 between the left first start port 314L and the right first start port 314R. It is provided at the center of the receiving part 391.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69A, there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the sorting device 35. On the other hand, the second start port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Further, a road nail 31M 'is provided to the left of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36T is provided to the left of the road nail 31M'. The road nail 31M 'guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36T. Also in this embodiment, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide portion instead of the road nail 31M ′ by increasing the dimension of the stage 310.

  The electric support member 36 </ b> T has a plate shape slightly inclined to the left and can be moved along the game board 31 along the moving direction of the game ball 99 on the electric support member 36 </ b> T. Specifically, the electric support member 36T has a standby position directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and directly above the second start port 315, and an operating position adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M ′. It can be moved between. That is, the electric support member 36T is operable between a standby position where the second start port 315 is closed and an operation position where the gap between the second start port 315 and the road nail 31M 'is closed.

  As shown in FIGS. 69 (A) and 69 (B), when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position, that is, the electric support member 36T is directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and the second start port 315. The electric support member 36T closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the game ball 99 from entering the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is not inserted into the second start port 315, and the electric support member 36T is inclined downwardly to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second start port 315 by the member 36T and discharged from the out port 317. Further, when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position, a gap is formed between the game nail 31M and the nail 31M 'so that the game ball 99 can pass therethrough. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the second operating port 315 side by the road nail 31M ′ passes through the gap between the electric support member 36T (second start port 315) and the road nail 31M ′, and the out port 317 Discharged from.

  As shown in FIGS. 70A and 70B, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, that is, when the electric support member 36T is positioned adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M ′, the electric support The member 36T allows the game ball 99 to enter the second start port 315 by opening the second start port 315, and allows the game ball 99 that moves the nail 31M ′ to the left to enter the second start port 315. The bridge between the nail 31M ′ and the second starting port 315 is bridged. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second start port 315, and the game ball moving to the left side of the road nail 31M ′ is secondly moved by the electric support member 36T. It moves toward the start port 315 and enters the second start port 315. A plurality of guard nails 31B (two in the present embodiment) as guard portions are disposed on the upper left side of the second start port 315. The plurality of nails 31B prevent the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36T toward the second start port 315 from jumping over the second start port 315 when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position. is there. That is, the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36T toward the second start port 315 does not directly enter the second start port 315 and hits the plurality of guard nails 31B when the moving speed is high. Then, the ball enters the second starting port 315.

  Also in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided in the direction of retreating from the distribution device 35 on the right side of the distribution device 35. Retraction guide nails 393 and 394 (retraction guide portions) are provided, and guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Thus, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 located in the right region of the sorting device 35 from being guided to the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the 1st starting port 314 is provided below the 1st channel 351 like the above-mentioned 1st embodiment, the game balls 99 distributed to the 1st channel 351 are The first start port 314 is entered. On the other hand, the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 do not enter the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position. Further, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the nail 31M ′ toward the second starting port 315 to the left, and the nail 31M when the electric support member 36T is in the standby position. It falls from between 'and the second start port 315 and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position, the electric support member 36T bridges between the second start port 315 and the road nail 31M ′ with the second start port 315 opened. The game balls 99 distributed to the two passages 352 and the game balls 99 that move the nail 31M ′ from the stage 310 toward the second start port 315 to the left are both entered into the second start port 315. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314 and the second passage The game ball of 352 enters the second start port 315, and the game ball of the second passage 352 does not enter any of the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 and is out Three states can be taken out from the mouth 317. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit right and moves on the stage 310 are entered into the second start port 315 or discharged from the out port 317. This depends on whether or not the electric support member 36T is operated, and the operation time and the operation frequency of the electric support member 36T depend on the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only can a plurality of states be brought about by the cooperation of the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36T, but the second passage 352 and the second of the stage 310 are also selected according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Since the ease of entering the starting port 315 is different, the game is not monotonous as in conventional gaming machines, and the fun of the game is improved.

<Thirty-fifth embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front-rear direction between the standby position and the operating position with respect to the game board 31, whereby the second start port 315 is moved to the second start port 315. The case where winning of the game ball 99 is supported has been described. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first implementation described above is that the electric support member can be rotated (substantially in a horizontal plane) in a direction intersecting the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. Different from form. In addition, one first start port 314 is provided immediately below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the second start port 315 is also provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

  The 35th embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 71 (A) is a view showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36U of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 71 (B) is FIG. 71 (A). It is a figure which shows the principal part.

  In the first embodiment described above, there are two first start ports 314 (314L, 314R), the left first start port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the right first A start port 314 </ b> R is provided immediately below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. In the first embodiment described above, the second start port 315 is provided in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 between the left first start port 314L and the right first start port 314R. The ball receiving portion 391 is provided at the center.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 71A, there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the sorting device 35. On the other hand, the second start port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Further, a road nail 31M 'is provided to the left of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36U is provided to the left of the road nail 31M'. The road nail 31M 'guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36U. Also in this embodiment, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide portion instead of the road nail 31M ′ by increasing the dimension of the stage 310.

  As shown in FIGS. 71 (A) and 71 (B), the electric support member 36U has a plate shape having a pair of wall portions 361U protruding above the edge in the width direction, and is inclined slightly downwardly to the left. Has been placed. The pair of wall portions 361U function as a guide for guiding the game ball 99 from the right side (upstream side) end portion 362 to the left side (downstream side) end portion 363. The electric support member 36U is provided with a rotating shaft 362U. When a rotational force is input to the rotating shaft 362U from a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 36U is shown in FIG. It is rotated clockwise and counterclockwise in (B). Since the electric support member 36U is in a slightly inclined state, it is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane that is slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane.

  The electric support member 36U is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling the driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and is in a standby position (directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and directly above the second start port 315). 71 (A) and the position of the solid line in FIG. 71 (B) and the operating position adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M ′ (the position of the two-dot chain line in FIGS. 71 (A) and 71 (B)). It can be moved between. That is, the electric support member 36U is operable between a standby position where the second start port 315 is closed and an operating position where the gap between the second start port 315 and the road nail 31M 'is closed.

  When the electric support member 36U is in the standby position indicated by the solid line in FIGS. 71A and 71B, that is, the electric support member 36U is directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 and the second start port 315. When positioned directly above, the electric support member 36U closes the second start port 315 and restricts the game ball 99 from entering the second start port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is not inserted into the second start port 315, and the electric support member 36U is inclined downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second start port 315 by the member 36U and discharged from the out port 317. Further, when the electric support member 36U is at the standby position, a gap is formed between the game nail 31 and the nail 31M 'so that the game ball 99 can pass therethrough. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the second operation port 315 side by the road nail 31M ′ passes through the gap between the electric support member 36U (second start port 315) and the road nail 31M ′, and the out port 317 Discharged from.

  On the other hand, when the electric support member 36U is located at the operation position indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIGS. 71A and 71B, that is, when the electric support member 36U is positioned adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M ′, The support member 36U allows the game ball 99 to enter the second start port 315 by opening the second start port 315 and allowing the game ball 99 that moves the nail 31M ′ to the left to enter the second start port 315. Thus, the bridge between the road nail 31M ′ and the second starting port 315 is bridged. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second start port 315, and the game ball moving to the left side of the road nail 31M ′ is secondly moved by the electric support member 36T. It moves toward the start port 315 and enters the second start port 315. Also in the present embodiment, the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36U to the second start port 315 is the second start when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position at the upper left of the second start port 315. A plurality of guard nails 31 </ b> B (guard portions) that prevent jumping over the mouth 315 are provided.

  Also in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided in the direction of retreating from the distribution device 35 on the right side of the distribution device 35. Retraction guide nails 393 and 394 (retraction guide portions) are provided, and guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Thus, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 located in the right region of the sorting device 35 from being guided to the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the 1st starting port 314 is provided below the 1st channel 351 like the above-mentioned 1st embodiment, the game balls 99 distributed to the 1st channel 351 are The first start port 314 is entered. On the other hand, the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 are not entered into either the first start port 314 or the second start port 315 when the electric support member 36U is in the standby position. Further, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves the nail 31M ′ toward the second starting port 315 to the left, and the nail 31M when the electric support member 36U is in the standby position. It falls from between “and the second start port 315 and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36U is in the operating position, the electric support member 36U bridges between the second start port 315 and the road nail 31M ′ with the second start port 315 opened. The game balls 99 distributed to the two passages 352 and the game balls 99 that move the nail 31M ′ from the stage 310 toward the second start port 315 to the left are both entered into the second start port 315. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314 and the second passage The game ball of 352 enters the second start port 315, and the game ball of the second passage 352 does not enter any of the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 and is out Three states can be taken out from the mouth 317. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit right and moves on the stage 310 are entered into the second start port 315 or discharged from the out port 317. This depends on whether or not the electric support member 36U is operated, and the operation time and the operation frequency of the electric support member 36T depend on the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36U can result in a plurality of states, as well as the second passage 352 and the stage 310 of the stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Since the ease of entering the 2 start opening 315 is different, the game is not monotonous as in conventional gaming machines, and the fun of the game is improved.

  The electric support member 36U may be arranged horizontally without being inclined with respect to the horizontal plane and configured to be rotatable along the horizontal plane. In this case, a guide part such as a groove inclined downward to the left may be provided on the surface of the electric support member 36U to promote the movement of the game ball 99 toward the second start port 315.

<Thirty-sixth embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front-rear direction between the standby position and the operating position with respect to the game board 31, whereby the second start port 315 is moved to the second start port 315. The case where winning of the game ball 99 is supported has been described. On the other hand, this embodiment differs from the first embodiment described above in that the electric support member can be rotated on the vertical plane along the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position. . In addition, one first start port 314 is provided immediately below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the second start port 315 is also provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

  The thirty-sixth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 72 is a view showing a main part of the gaming board 31 including the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36V of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 72 (A) shows the electric support member 36V. When in the standby position, FIG. 72B shows the case where the electric support member 36V is at an intermediate position between the standby position and the operation position, and FIG. 72C shows the case where the electric support member 36V is in the operation position. .

  In the first embodiment described above, there are two first start ports 314 (314L, 314R), the left first start port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the right first A start port 314 </ b> R is provided immediately below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. In the first embodiment described above, the second start port 315 is provided in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 between the left first start port 314L and the right first start port 314R. The ball receiving portion 391 is provided at the center.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, although omitted from the drawings, like the thirty-fourth and thirty-fifth embodiments, there is one first start port 314, and this first A start port 314 is provided directly below the sorting device 35. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), the second start port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Also in the present embodiment, a road nail 31M ′ is provided on the left side of the stage 310 (not shown) below the variable winning device 316, and the left side of the road nail 31M ′ and the second start port 315 An electric support member 36V is provided so as to be rotatable between the upper side and the upper side. The road nail 31M 'guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36V. Also in this embodiment, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide portion instead of the road nail 31M ′ by increasing the dimension of the stage 310.

  The electric support member 36V is provided with a rotating shaft 362V, and when the rotational force is input to the rotating shaft 362V from driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid, the electric support member 36V follows the game board 31. It is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise in FIGS. 72A to 72C on the vertical plane. The electric support member 36V is rotated on the vertical plane by controlling the driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and is in a standby position (just below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and just above the second start port 315). It is movable between the position of the solid line in FIG. 72 (A) and the operating position adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M ′ (the position of the solid line in FIG. 72C). That is, the electric support member 36V closes the gap between the standby position where the second start port 315 is closed (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 72A) and the second start port 315 and the nail 31M ′. Operation is possible between the operating position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 72C). The electric support member 36V is inclined slightly to the left at the standby position and the operating position. This makes it easier to move the game ball 99 to the left side in the electric support member 36V. However, the electric support member 36V may be arranged horizontally. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove inclined downward to the left is provided on the surface of the electric support member 36V, and the second starting port 315 side of the game ball 99 is provided. You may promote movement to.

  When the electric support member 36V is in the standby position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 72A, that is, when the electric support member 36V is located directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and immediately above the second start port 315, The electric support member 36 </ b> V closes the second starting port 315 and restricts the game ball 99 from entering the second starting port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is not inserted into the second start port 315, and the electric support member 36V is inclined downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second start port 315 by the member 36V and discharged from the out port 317. Further, when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position, a gap is formed between the game nail 31 and the nail 31M '. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the second operating port 315 side by the road nail 31M ′ passes through the gap between the electric support member 36V (second start port 315) and the road nail 31M ′, and the out port 317 Discharged from.

  On the other hand, when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 72C, that is, when the electric support member 36V is positioned adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M ′, the electric support member 36V The mouth 315 is opened to allow the game ball 99 to enter, and the game nail 31M ′ and the first nail 31M ′ are allowed to enter the second start port 315 of the game ball 99 moving the road nail 31M ′ to the left. 2 Bridging between the start port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second start port 315, and the game ball moving leftward on the road nail 31M ′ is moved by the electric support member 36V. 2 Moves toward the starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315. Also in the present embodiment, the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36U to the second start port 315 is the second start when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position at the upper left of the second start port 315. A plurality of guard nails 31 </ b> B (guard portions) that prevent jumping over the mouth 315 are provided.

  Also in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided in the direction of retreating from the distribution device 35 on the right side of the distribution device 35. Retraction guide nails 393 and 394 (retraction guide portions) are provided, and guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Thus, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 located in the right region of the sorting device 35 from being guided to the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the 1st starting port 314 is provided below the 1st channel 351 like the above-mentioned 1st embodiment, the game balls 99 distributed to the 1st channel 351 are The first start port 314 is entered. On the other hand, the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 are not entered into either the first start port 314 or the second start port 315 when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position. Also, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable prize winning device 316 moves the nail 31M ′ toward the second starting port 315 to the left, and the nail 31M when the electric support member 36V is in the standby position. It falls from between “and the second start port 315 and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36V is in the operating position, the electric support member 36V bridges between the second start port 315 and the road nail 31M ′ with the second start port 315 opened. The game balls 99 distributed to the two passages 352 and the game balls 99 that move the nail 31M ′ from the stage 310 toward the second start port 315 to the left are both entered into the second start port 315. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314 and the second passage The game ball of 352 enters the second start port 315, and the game ball of the second passage 352 does not enter any of the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 and is out Three states can be taken out from the mouth 317. In addition, the game ball 99 that is hit left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that is hit right and moves on the stage 310 are entered into the second start port 315 or discharged from the out port 317. This depends on whether or not the electric support member 36V is operated, and the operation time and the operation frequency of the electric support member 36V depend on the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36V can result in a plurality of states, as well as the second passage 352 and the stage 310 in accordance with the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Since the ease of entering the 2 start opening 315 is different, the game is not monotonous as in conventional gaming machines, and the fun of the game is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the electric support member 36V has two stop positions above the second start port 315 and the left side of the road nail 31M ′. In addition to these stop positions, FIG. The position where the electric support member 36V shown in B) stands may be stopped as the operating position. At the position where the electric support member 36V stands up, both the second start port 315 and the gap between the second start port 315 and the road nail 31M 'are simultaneously opened. Therefore, while the game ball 99 in the second passage 352 can enter the second start port 315, the game ball 99 that moves down the right side of the sorting device 35 and the game ball 99M ′ moves. Entry into the second starting port 315 is limited by the standing electric support member 36V. Thereby, it is not necessary to provide a retracting guide portion such as the retracting guide nails 393 and 394, and in the gaming state (mode A to mode C) in which the electric support member 36V is opened for a short time, the right region of the sorting device 35 is provided. It is possible to prevent the game ball 99 from being guided to the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36V.

<Thirty-seventh embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front-rear direction between the standby position and the operating position with respect to the game board 31, whereby the second start port 315 is moved to the second start port 315. The case where entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been described. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the electric support member can be rotated in a direction intersecting the game board 31 between the standby position and the operating position (substantially in a horizontal plane), and from above the second start port 315. It differs from the above-mentioned 1st Embodiment by the point which has the length dimension which reaches the left of the road nail 31M '. In addition, one first start port 314 is provided immediately below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the second start port 315 is also provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

  The 37th embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. FIG. Here, FIG. 73 (A) is a view showing a main part of the game board 31 including the distribution device 35 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment and the electric support member 36W in the standby position, and FIG. 73 (B) is a view. 73 (A) is a perspective view of the main part, FIG. 74 (A) is a view showing a case where the electric support member 36W is in the operating position in FIG. 73 (B), and FIG. 74 (B) is an electric support member in the present embodiment. It is a top view which shows the modification of 36W.

  In the first embodiment described above, there are two first start ports 314 (314L, 314R), the left first start port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the right first A start port 314 </ b> R is provided immediately below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. In the first embodiment described above, the second start port 315 is provided in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 between the left first start port 314L and the right first start port 314R. The ball receiving portion 391 is provided at the center.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 73A, there is one first start port 314, and this first start port 314 is provided directly below the distribution device 35. On the other hand, the second start port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Further, a road nail 31M 'is provided to the left of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36W is provided to the left of the road nail 31M'. The road nail 31M 'guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36W. Also in this embodiment, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide portion instead of the road nail 31M ′ by increasing the dimension of the stage 310.

  As shown in FIGS. 73A and 73B, the electric support member 36W is an elliptical plate member in plan view, and has an elliptical through hole 363W and a closing portion 364W. The electric support member 36W has a length dimension from the upper side of the second start port 315 to the left side of the road nail 31M ', and is disposed in a state of being slightly inclined to the left. Thereby, the electric support member 36W can appropriately move the game ball 99 of the road nail 31M 'to the second start port 315 in the operating position. The electric support member 36W may be disposed horizontally. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove inclined downward to the left is provided on the surface of the support member 36W, and the game ball 99 is directed to the second start port 315 side. You may promote movement.

  The through hole 363 </ b> W has a short diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99, and the game ball 99 can pass through. The through hole 363W is located between the second start port 315 and the road nail 31M ′ when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, and the second start port when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position. It is formed at a location that can be positioned immediately above 315. The shapes of the electric support member 36W and the through hole 363W are not limited to an ellipse, and may be other shapes such as a circle, an oval, and an oblong rectangle. The closing portion 364W is located above the second starting port 315 when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, and is closed between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M ′ when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position. Located between.

  The electric support member 36W is provided with a rotating shaft 362W, and the electric support member 36W intersects the game board 31 when a rotational force is input to the rotating shaft 362W from driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid. (In a substantially horizontal plane), it is rotated clockwise or counterclockwise in FIG. 73 (B). Further, the electric support member 36W is rotated in a substantially horizontal plane by controlling the driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and closes the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35, while the through hole 363W is the second start port 315. And a standby position (see FIG. 73 (B)) located between the nail 31M ′ and the through hole 363W is located immediately above the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 to open the second start port 315. On the other hand, it is movable between the second starting port 315 and an operating position (see FIG. 74A) that bridges between the nail 31M ′. That is, the electric support member 36W is operable between a standby position where the second start port 315 is closed and an operating position where the gap between the second start port 315 and the road nail 31M 'is closed.

  When the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, that is, when the closing portion 364W of the electric support member 36W is located above the second start port 315 and the through hole 363W is adjacent to the left side of the road nail 31M ′, The electric support member 36 </ b> W closes the second start port 315 by the closing portion 364 </ b> W and restricts the game ball 99 from entering the second start port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is not inserted into the second start port 315, and the electric support member 36W is inclined downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second start port 315 by the member 36W and discharged from the out port 317. Further, when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, the through hole 363W is located at a position where the game ball 99 can pass between the electric nail 31M '. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the left side by the road nail 31M ′ passes through the through hole 363W and is discharged from the out port 317.

  On the other hand, when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position, that is, the through hole 363W of the electric support member 36W is located immediately below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 and directly above the second start port 315, and the closing portion 364W is When positioned between the second starting port 315 and the nail 31M ′, the electric support member 36W opens the second starting port 315 through the through hole 363W to allow the game ball 99 to enter, and the nail A bridge 364W bridges between the road nail 31M ′ and the second start port 315 so that the game ball 99 moving 31M ′ to the left can win the second start port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second start port 315, and the game ball moving to the left side of the road nail 31M ′ is secondly moved by the electric support member 36W. It moves toward the start port 315 and enters the second start port 315. Also in the present embodiment, the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36U to the second start port 315 is the second start when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position at the upper left of the second start port 315. A plurality of guard nails 31 </ b> B (guard portions) that prevent jumping over the mouth 315 are provided.

  Also in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided in the direction of retreating from the distribution device 35 on the right side of the distribution device 35. Retraction guide nails 393 and 394 (retraction guide portions) are provided, and guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Thus, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 located in the right region of the sorting device 35 from being guided to the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the 1st starting port 314 is provided below the 1st channel 351 like the above-mentioned 1st embodiment, the game balls 99 distributed to the 1st channel 351 are The first start port 314 is entered. On the other hand, the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 are not entered into either the first start port 314 or the second start port 315 when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position. The game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316 moves to the left toward the second starting port 315 with the nail 31M ′, and when the electric support member 36W is in the standby position, the through hole 363W. , And falls from between the nail 31M ′ and the second start port 315 and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36W is in the operating position, a bridge is formed between the second start port 315 and the road nail 31M ′ with the through hole 363W of the electric support member 36W opening the second start port 315. Therefore, both the game ball 99 distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball 99 moving the nail 31M ′ from the stage 310 toward the second start port 315 to the left enter the second start port 315. Sphered. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314 and the second passage The game ball of 352 enters the second start port 315, and the game ball of the second passage 352 does not enter any of the first start port 314 and the second start port 315 and is out Three states can be taken out from the mouth 317. In addition, the game ball 99 that has been hit left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that has been hit right and moves on the stage 310 are entered into the second start port 315 or discharged from the out port 317. This depends on whether or not the electric support member 36W is operated, and the operation time and the operation frequency of the electric support member 36W depend on the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36W can result in a plurality of states, as well as the second passage 352 and the stage 310 of the stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Since the ease of entering the 2 start opening 315 is different, the game is not monotonous as in conventional gaming machines, and the fun of the game is improved.

  Note that the electric support member 36W has a through portion 363W ′ such as a notch opened not only vertically but also partially laterally as shown in FIG. 74 (B) instead of the through hole 363W opened only vertically. It may be provided.

<Thirty-eighth embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, the electric support member 36 formed in a plate shape is moved in the front-rear direction between the standby position and the operating position with respect to the game board 31, whereby the second start port 315 is moved to the second start port 315. The case where entry of the game ball 99 is supported has been described. On the other hand, in this embodiment, it can be rotated around the rotation axis inclined with respect to the horizontal direction, and has a length dimension from the upper side of the second start port 315 to the left side of the road nail 31M ′. This is different from the first embodiment described above. In addition, one first start port 314 is provided immediately below the first passage 351 of the distribution device 35, and the second start port 315 is also provided directly below the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35. This is different from the first embodiment described above.

  The thirty-eighth embodiment will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 75 to 78. Here, FIG. 75 (A) is a view showing a main part of the gaming board 31 including the sorting device 35 and the electric support member 36X of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 75 (B) is an illustration of the electric support member 36X. 76A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A5-A5 in FIG. 75B, FIG. 76B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A6-A6 in FIG. 75B, and FIG. FIG. 77A is a diagram showing a main part including the electric support member 36X when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, and FIG. 77B is a main part including the electric support member 36X when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position. FIG. 78 is a perspective view showing a modification of the electric support member 36X in the present embodiment.

  In the first embodiment described above, there are two first start ports 314 (314L, 314R), the left first start port 314L is provided directly below the first passage 351 of the sorting device 35, and the right first A start port 314 </ b> R is provided immediately below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. In the first embodiment described above, the second start port 315 is provided in a region directly below the introduction port 350 of the distribution device 35 between the left first start port 314L and the right first start port 314R. The ball receiving portion 391 is provided at the center.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 75A, there is one first starting port 314, and this first starting port 314 is provided directly below the sorting device 35. On the other hand, the second start port 315 is provided directly below the second passage 352. Further, a road nail 31M 'is provided on the left side of the stage 310 below the variable winning device 316, and an electric support member 36X is provided on the left side of the road nail 31M'. The road nail 31M 'guides the game ball 99 moving from the stage 310 toward the electric support member 36X. Also in this embodiment, the stage 310 may be configured as a guide portion instead of the road nail 31M ′ by increasing the dimension of the stage 310.

  As shown in FIGS. 75 (A), 75 (B), 76 (A), and 76 (B), the electric support member 36X has a first through part 361X and a second through part 362X, 2 It has a length dimension from the upper side of the starting port 315 to the left side of the road nail 31M ′, and is arranged in a state inclined slightly downward to the left. Thereby, the electric support member 36X can appropriately move the game ball 99 of the road nail 31M 'to the second start port 315 in the operating position. The electric support member 36X may be disposed horizontally. In this case, a guide portion such as a groove inclined downward to the left is provided on the surface of the support member 36W, and the game ball 99 is directed to the second start port 315 side. You may promote movement.

  The first through portion 361X is defined by a pair of protruding pieces 361aX and 361bX facing each other, and is open to the left side. The first penetrating portion 361X is located directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. When the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the game ball 99 enters the second start port 315 by the protruding piece 361aX. (See FIG. 77 (A)), and when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the game ball 99 is allowed to enter the second starting port 315 by penetrating in the vertical direction ( (See FIG. 77 (B)).

  The second penetrating portion 362X is defined by a pair of protruding pieces 362aX and 362bX facing each other, and is open to the right side. The second penetration part 362X penetrates in the direction orthogonal to the first penetration part 361X. The second penetrating portion 362X does not necessarily have to penetrate in the direction orthogonal to the first penetrating portion 362X, and only needs to penetrate in the direction intersecting the first penetrating portion 361X. The second penetrating portion 362X is located in the gap between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M ′, and when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the second penetrating portion 362X is in a vertically penetrating state so that the second starting is performed. The game ball 99 is allowed to pass through the gap between the mouth 315 and the road nail 31M ′ (see FIG. 77 (A)), and when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the projecting piece 362aX causes the second start opening. The passage of the game ball 99 is restricted between 315 and the nail 31M ′ (see FIG. 77B).

  The electric support member 36X can be rotated around a rotation axis extending along a substantially horizontal direction slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal direction by a driving means (not shown) such as a solenoid controlled by the MPU 41. Further, the electric support member 36X is rotated by controlling the driving means (not shown) by the MPU 41, and the first penetration part 361X is penetrated in the front-rear direction to block the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. Meanwhile, a standby position (see FIG. 77A) where the second penetration part 363W penetrates in the vertical direction between the second start port 315 and the road nail 31M ′, and the first penetration part 361X An operating position in which the second penetrating portion 362W penetrates in the front-rear direction and bridges between the second starting port 315 and the road nail 31M ′ while penetrating in the vertical direction directly below the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35. (See FIG. 77B). That is, the electric support member 36X has a standby position where the second start port 315 shown in FIG. 77 (A) is closed and the gap between the second start port 315 and the road nail 31M ′ is open. 77B, the second start port 315 shown in FIG. 77 (B) is opened, while the gap between the second start port 315 and the road nail 31M ′ is closed. .

  As shown in FIG. 77 (A), when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the electric support member 36X closes the second start port 315 and restricts the entry of the game ball 99 into the second start port 315. To do. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the distribution device 35 is not inserted into the second start port 315, and the electric support member 36X is inclined downward to the left. It is guided to the left side of the second start port 315 by the member 36 </ b> X and discharged from the out port 317. In addition, when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position, the game ball 99 can pass through the second penetrating portion 362X penetrating in the vertical direction between the electric nail 31M '. Therefore, the game ball 99 guided to the left side by the road nail 31M ′ passes through the second penetration part 362X and is discharged from the out port 317.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the electric support member 36X opens the second start port 315 and allows the game ball 99 to enter, A bridge is provided between the road nail 31M ′ and the second start port 315 so that the game ball 99 moving the nail 31M ′ to the left side can win the second start port 315. Therefore, the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 of the sorting device 35 enters the second start port 315, and the game ball moving to the left on the road nail 31M ′ is moved by the electric support member 36X. 2 Moves toward the starting port 315 and enters the second starting port 315. Also in the present embodiment, the game ball 99 heading from the electric support member 36U to the second start port 315 is the second start when the electric support member 36T is in the operating position at the upper left of the second start port 315. A plurality of guard nails 31 </ b> B (guard portions) that prevent jumping over the mouth 315 are provided.

  Also in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the game ball 99 flowing down above the electric support member 36T is guided in the direction of retreating from the distribution device 35 on the right side of the distribution device 35. Retraction guide nails 393 and 394 (retraction guide portions) are provided, and guide the game ball 99 flowing down the right region of the sorting device 35 to a position farther from the electric support member 36U and the second starting port 315. Thus, when the electric support member 36U is opened for a short time, it is possible to prevent the game ball 99 located in the right region of the sorting device 35 from being guided to the second start port 315 by the electric support member 36U.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the first start port 314 is provided below the first passage 351 as in the first embodiment, the game balls 99 distributed to the first passage 351 are provided. Is entered into the first starting port 314. On the other hand, the game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 do not enter the first start port 314 or the second start port 315 when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position. Further, the game ball moving from the stage 310 below the variable prize winning device 316 moves to the left toward the second start port 315 with the nail 31M ′, and the second penetration when the electric support member 36X is in the standby position. It passes through the part 362X, falls from between the nail 31M ′ and the second start port 315, and is discharged from the out port 317. On the other hand, when the electric support member 36X is in the operating position, the first through portion 361X of the electric support member 36X opens the second start port 315 and the second start port 315 and the road nail 31M ′ The game balls 99 distributed to the second passage 352 and the game balls 99 that move the nail 31M ′ from the stage 310 toward the second start port 315 to the left side both pass through the first penetration portion 361X. The ball passes through and enters the second starting port 315. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the game ball is introduced into the sorting device 35 by left-handed, the game ball in the first passage 351 enters the first start port 314 and the second passage The state in which the game ball of 352 enters the second start port 315, and the game ball of the second passage 352 does not enter either the first start port 314 or the second start port 315, but from the out port 317. There are three states that can be discharged. In addition, the game ball 99 that has been hit left and distributed to the second passage 352 and the game ball that has been hit right and moves on the stage 310 are entered into the second start port 315 or discharged from the out port 317. This depends on whether or not the electric support member 36X is operated, and the operation time and the operation frequency of the electric support member 36X depend on the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Therefore, in this embodiment as well, the cooperation between the distribution device 35 and the electric support member 36X can result in a plurality of states, as well as the second passage 352 and the stage 310 of the stage 310 according to the mode type of the special figure gaming state. Since the ease of entering the 2 start opening 315 is different, the game is not monotonous as in conventional gaming machines, and the fun of the game is improved.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the electric support member 36X is replaced with a through hole 361X opened only in the vertical direction, instead of the first through part 361X and the second through part 362X that are partially opened sideways. ', 362X' may be provided, and not only the upper and lower sides, but also a through part that is partially opened to the side and a through hole that is open only to the upper and lower sides may be used in combination.

  Furthermore, in the thirtieth to thirty-eighth embodiments, one first start port 314 is provided. However, as in the first embodiment, two first start ports are provided, and one first start port 314 is provided. The game ball 99 released from the first passage 351 may be entered by the start port, and the game ball 99 released from the second passage 352 may be entered by the other first start port 314L.

  In the thirtieth to thirty-eighth embodiments, the same configuration as that of the first embodiment can be modified in the same way as the first embodiment, and the second to twelfth embodiments described above can be performed. The configuration of the embodiment (see FIGS. 26 to 54) and the configuration of a modification thereof can also be adopted. For example, in the thirty-seventh to thirty-seventh embodiments, as the distribution unit, the roller 38C of the ninth embodiment (see FIG. 53A) and the windmill 38D of the tenth embodiment (see FIG. 53B). A rotating body such as the mountain-shaped fixing portion 38E of the eleventh embodiment (see FIG. 54A), the triangular nail 38F of the twelfth embodiment (see FIG. 53A), and the top nail of the triangular nail 38F A fixed distribution part such as a single nail can be suitably used. When such a rotating body or a fixed distribution unit is adopted as the distribution unit, the player reads the distribution tendency (individual difference between gaming machines) between the first passage 351 and the second passage 352 by the distribution unit. It is also possible. As a result, the player can find a firing stroke in which the game ball can be easily distributed to the second passage 352 by adjusting the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22 to adjust the launch strength (launch stroke) of the game ball. Because it becomes possible, it is fun to search for the launch strength at which the game ball is easily distributed to the second passage 352, or fun to search for the game machine 10 from which a plurality of game machines 10 are easily distributed to the second passage 352. Can be obtained.

[Summary of Invention]
Hereinafter, an outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be added. In addition, in order to provide an understanding of the correspondence between each supplementary note and each embodiment, a description may be given with reference numerals for the sake of convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary note is limited to a specific configuration with the reference sign. It is not a thing. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). A distribution device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by:
A first winning opening (314L) through which game balls distributed to the first passage (351) can enter;
A second winning port (315) that is capable of entering a game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning port (314L);
Detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), the second winning port (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is provided. ) From the first position (standby position) where entry into the second passage (352) is restricted from entering the second winning opening (315). A movable accessory member (36) operating in the (operating position);
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A1, when the game balls are distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, Depending on the presence / absence of operation, the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game balls allocated to the second passage are restricted from entering the game balls into the second winning opening when the movable accessory member is at the first position where the movable accessory member is not operated. When the movable accessory member is in the second position where the movable accessory member is operated, the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening. In this manner, the ratio of entering the ball into the second winning opening can be varied by the cooperation of the sorting device and the movable accessory member. Thereby, monotonousness of the game can be reduced, new game performance can be realized in accordance with the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix A2]
A supplementary note further comprising a third winning opening (314R) that allows the game balls distributed to the second passage (352) to enter and has the same function as the first winning opening (314L). A gaming machine according to A1.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A2, the game balls are distributed to the first start port and the third start port having the same function as the first start port by the sorting device. As a result, when the movable accessory member is in the standby position, the game ball is placed in different winning holes (the first winning port and the second winning port) having the same function, thereby making the game more monotonous. It is possible to reduce and realize new game play according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member, and to improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix A3]
The movable accessory member (36) is characterized in that the operation time when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied is longer than the operation time when the first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine according to A1 or Appendix A2.

[Appendix A4]
It further comprises other detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
Playing the game ball in the left region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball in the right region so that the other detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball in the game. The detection means (the first game state advantageous to the player as compared to the case of launching the ball, and the detection means ( The game state is shifted between a plurality of game states including a second game state that is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the game ball is launched into the left region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by 318) The game state transition means (41) is further provided,
The first condition is that the first gaming state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix A3, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A3 and Supplementary Note A4, it is easy to enter the game ball into the third prize opening by the movable accessory member when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. Are different. For example, the operation time of the movable accessory member varies depending on the game state (an advantageous launch position). Therefore, if the first condition is satisfied, even if the movable accessory member is operated, the game ball launched into the right region is difficult to enter the third winning opening, etc. It is possible to set the ease of playing a game ball to the third prize opening. As a result, in situations where left-handed strikes are encouraged for launching game balls in the left area of the game board (for example, in the first game state), it is disadvantageous for the player to perform right-hand strikes in which the game balls are launched into the left area of the game board. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game by the right strike in a situation where the left strike is encouraged and to promote the progress of the game by the left strike.

[Appendix A5]
The second winning opening (315) is determined by the detecting means (318) according to the time required for the game ball detected by the other detecting means (319) to enter the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix A4, characterized in that the gaming ball to be detected is arranged at a position longer than a time required for entering the second winning opening (315).

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix A5, the time required for the game ball detected by the detection means to enter the second prize opening and the game ball detected by the other detection means enter the second prize opening. The time required to ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched into the left area of the game board can enter the second prize opening, while a game ball launched into the right area makes it difficult to enter the third prize opening. Is possible. This makes it a disadvantage to the player when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), thus promoting left-handed in situations where left-handed is encouraged It becomes possible to do.

[Appendix A6]
In the first gaming state (mode A, mode C), the operating time of the movable accessory member (36) is that the gaming ball detected by the detecting means (318) is the second winning port (315). ), And it is a time for limiting the game ball detected by the other detection means (318) from entering the second winning port (315). The gaming machine according to appendix A4 or appendix A5.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A5, it is possible to appropriately restrict the game ball from entering the second winning opening when the right game is performed in the first game state where the left game is encouraged. Therefore, when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It becomes possible.

[Appendix A7]
In the second gaming state (mode E), the operating time of the movable accessory member (36) is that the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) is the second prize opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A4 to appendix A6, characterized in that it is time allowed to enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A6, it is possible to make a game ball enter the second winning opening by making a right turn in the second gaming state. Therefore, by making a right turn in the second gaming state, it is possible to advance the game with almost no increase or decrease in the number of game balls.

[Appendix A8]
The movable accessory members (36, 36R, 36S)
In the first position (standby position), a game ball is restricted from entering one of the second winning port (315) and the third winning port (314R). Allow game balls to enter the other winning opening (315) different from the winning opening (314R) of
In the second position (operating position), the game ball is allowed to enter the one winning port (314R) and the game ball is allowed to enter the other winning port (315). The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A1 to Appendix A6.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A7, the game ball is allowed to enter one of the second prize opening and the third prize opening depending on whether or not the movable accessory member is activated. The game ball is restricted from entering the other winning port, and the game ball entering the other winning port is restricted while the game ball is restricted from entering the other winning port. One of the allowable states is realized. Thus, in the gaming machine according to appendix A7, the movable accessory member not only allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into one winning opening, but also the entry of the game ball into the other winning opening. Allow or limit at the same time. Thereby, the monotonousness of a game can be reduced and a highly interesting game machine having new game characteristics according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member can be provided.

[Appendix A9]
The movable accessory member (36)
An open / close unit (362) that places the third prize opening (314R) in the open state at the first position (standby position) and places the third prize opening (314R) in the closed state at the second position (operation position). )When,
Limiting the movement of the game ball on the right side of the third winning opening (314R) toward the opening / closing portion (362) at the first position (standby position), which is continuous with the opening / closing portion (362), A guide portion (363) that allows movement of the game ball on the right side of the third winning opening (314R) toward the opening / closing portion (362) in two positions (operation positions);
A gaming machine according to appendix A2, characterized by having:

[Appendix A10]
The opening / closing part (362)
In the first position (standby position), the game balls that have passed through the second passage (352) are allowed to enter the third winning award port (314R) and enter the second winning award port (315). Limit the sphere,
In the second position (actuation position), the game balls that have passed through the second passage (352) are restricted from entering the third winning award port (314R), and entering the second winning award port (315). Tolerate spheres,
The guide portion is
In the first position (standby position), the movement of the game ball launched into the right area of the game board (31) toward the opening / closing part (362) is limited,
The gaming machine according to appendix A9, wherein in the second position (operating position), a movement of a game ball launched into the right region of the game board (31) toward the opening / closing part (363) is allowed. .

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A9 and Supplementary Note A10, a movable accessory member having an opening / closing part capable of opening and closing the third prize opening and a guide part for moving a game ball on the right side of the third prize opening toward the opening / closing part With a simple configuration of providing a game ball, it is possible to win a game ball from a plurality of paths to the third winning a prize opening with one movable accessory member. Thereby, in the gaming machine adopting the distribution device, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine that reduces the monotony of the game and has new gaming characteristics according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A11]
The movable accessory member (36R) includes a first portion (361R) for allowing a game ball to enter the second winning port (315) from the left of the second winning port (315), and the second winning port. The game machine according to appendix A1, further comprising: a second portion (362R) that causes a game ball to enter the second winning opening (315) from the right side of (315).

[Appendix A12]
The movable accessory member (36R)
Allowing the game ball passing through the second passage to enter the first start port (314) at the first position (standby position);
In the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows a game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) to enter the second winning opening (315), and The gaming machine according to appendix A11, wherein the portion (362R) allows a gaming ball launched into the right region of the gaming board (31) to enter the second winning opening (315).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A11 and Supplementary Note A12, the movable accessory member has a first portion for allowing a game ball to enter the second prize opening from the left of the second prize opening, and a game from the right of the second prize opening. With a simple configuration of providing the second portion for allowing the ball to enter the second winning opening, it is possible to cause the game ball to win the second winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. Thereby, in the gaming machine adopting the distribution device, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine that reduces the monotony of the game and has new gaming characteristics according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A13]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first part (361R) and the second part (362R), and allows a game ball to enter the second winning opening (315). It further has a penetration part (363R),
The game according to appendix A11 or appendix A12, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined so as to become lower toward the penetrating portion (363R). Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A13, both the game ball in the second passage and the game ball in the right region are provided by a simple configuration in which a through portion is provided between the first portion and the second portion having different inclination states. It is possible to move to the penetrating part and enter the second winning opening.

[Appendix A14]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S),
The first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) are close to each other at the first position (standby position), and at the second position (actuation position). The gaming machine according to appendix A1, characterized in that the front ends of the are spaced apart.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A14, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member can allow or restrict the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening and allow or restrict the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix A15]
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passage (352), and is in the first position (standby position). The game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) interferes to move the game ball toward the first winning opening (314), and the second passage (352) is moved in the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to appendix A14, wherein the gaming ball is moved toward the second winning port (315) by the interference of the passing gaming ball.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A15, the game balls are distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to the second passage by the distribution device as the first movable accessory as a movable accessory member. Depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are activated, entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and the second winning opening is permitted or restricted. In the gaming machine according to Appendix A15, the sorting device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other, so that the gaming balls distributed to the second passage by the movable accessory member are directed to the second winning opening. The admission or restriction of entering the ball and the admission or restriction of entering the game ball into the first winning opening are performed simultaneously. Thereby, in the gaming machine adopting the distribution device, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine that reduces the monotony of the game and has new gaming characteristics according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A16]
It further comprises other detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36)
When the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319), it is moved from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation position),
When in the second position (actuated position), the game ball passing through the second passage (352) and the game ball passing through the specific area to the second winning opening (315) The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1 to appendix A9, wherein a ball is allowed to enter.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A16, not only the game balls passing through the second passage of the sorting apparatus but also the game balls launched into the right area of the game board enter the second winning opening by the movable accessory member. Can be made. Therefore, it becomes possible to allow a game ball to enter the second winning opening from a plurality of routes by one movable accessory member. Thereby, an amusing gaming machine having new gaming properties can be provided.

[Appendix A17]
The supplementary note further comprising a retraction guide portion (393, 394) provided on an upper side of the movable accessory member (36) and guiding the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to appendix A16.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A17, a retraction guiding unit for guiding the game ball in a direction away from the second prize opening is provided above the movable accessory member. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix A12, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable role member is short and it is encouraged to launch the gaming machine in the left area of the game board, the second prize opening in the movable role member Since it is possible to receive the game ball at a position away from, it is possible to secure a long time until the game ball reaches the second winning opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second winning opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position. When it is performed, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A18]
The retraction guide part (393, 394) includes the plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined shape in which a nail far from the second prize opening (315) is positioned lower than a nail near the second prize opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix A11.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A18, the gaming ball can be guided upstream in the moving direction of the gaming ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Also, in gaming machines, since a large number of nails are generally driven on the game board, a retracting guide portion can be provided when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the movable accessory member to receive support when the movable accessory member operates for a short time while suppressing the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retracting guide portion.

[Appendix A19]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the second prize opening (315) at the second position, and the movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A1 to appendix A18, further comprising a delay unit (364) for delaying.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A19, a delay portion is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the game ball to the second winning opening. Therefore, for example, even when the player receives a game ball on the movable accessory member in a gaming state where the operation time of the movable combination member is short and left-handed is encouraged, It is possible to secure a long time until it reaches the second prize opening. As a result, the game ball received by the movable accessory member can be prevented from reaching the second prize opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the first position. When this is done, it is difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A20]
The game machine according to appendix A19, wherein the delay unit (364, 364A to 364C) moves a game ball along a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36, 36A to 36C).

[Appendix A21]
The delay portion (364D to 364H) includes one or more linear convex portions (364D to 364G) or linear concave portions (in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36D to 36H) or linear concave portion ( 364H), the gaming machine according to appendix A19 or appendix A20.

[Appendix A22]
The delay part (364I to 364P) is a plurality of discretely arranged convex parts (364I to 364N) or a plurality of concave parts (364O, 364P), according to any one of supplementary notes A19 to A21, The gaming machine described.

[Appendix A23]
The gaming machine according to appendix A22, wherein the plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or the plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) are arranged in a lattice pattern.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A22 and Supplementary Note A23, the movement of the game ball on the movable accessory member can be delayed by the delay unit having a simple configuration. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally formed in the movable accessory member by resin molding. Thereby, the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion can be suppressed.

[Appendix A24]
From the appendix A19, the delay portion (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting a moving direction of the game ball on the movable accessory member (36Q). The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix A23.

[Appendix A25]
The gaming machine according to appendix A24, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a reverse direction opposite to a moving direction of the game ball.

[Appendix A26]
The gaming machine according to appendix A24 or appendix A25, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) cause a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force to act on the game ball.

  According to the gaming machines according to appendix A24 to appendix A26, since the movable accessory member is provided with a roller, not only the design of the gaming machine is improved, but also the behavior of a game ball that moves the movable accessory member Because it becomes easier to focus on the game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A27]
A game state transition means (41) for shifting the game state by establishment of a predetermined state among a plurality of game states;
The gaming state transition means (41) includes a third gaming state (mode A), a fourth gaming state (mode C, a mode C ′), and different expected values of the winning ratio to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix A2, including a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ').

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A27 has three gaming states of third to fifth gaming states that differ in the expected value of the winning ratio with respect to the second winning opening. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A27, it is possible to create a new gaming property with improved gaming properties based on three gaming states with different expected values of the rate of entering the second winning opening. become.

[Appendix A28]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left area is easy to enter the first winning opening (314L) and the third winning opening (314R), but difficult to enter the second winning opening (315).
The game ball launched into the right region is difficult to enter any of the first prize opening (314L), the second prize opening (315), and the third prize opening (314R),
The fourth gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left area enter the first prize opening (314L), the second prize opening (315), and the third prize opening (314R) in comparison with the game balls launched into the right area. Easy to be balled,
The fifth gaming state is
The game balls launched into the right area are difficult to enter the first prize opening (314L) and the third prize opening (314R), and the second prize is compared with the game balls launched into the left area. The gaming machine according to appendix A27, which is easy to enter the mouth (315).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A28, in each of the third to fifth gaming states, the ease of entering the first winning port, the second winning port, and the third winning port is determined by the launch area of the game ball with respect to the game board. Different. Thereby, the three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states having different expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning port and the second winning port and the third winning port can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix A29]
It further comprises other detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position to the second position when the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. ,
In the third game state and the fourth game state, it is more likely that the other detection means (319) launches the game ball in the left region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball. It is advantageous to the player compared to the case where a game ball is launched in the right area so that the passage of
In the fifth gaming state, the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball when the game ball is launched into the right region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). Thus, the gaming machine according to appendix A28, which is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball is launched into the left region.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A29, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening by operating the movable accessory member triggered by the passage of the game ball detected by the detection means or other detection means. To. Each of the third to fifth gaming states has a launch area that is advantageous to the player by utilizing the presence or absence of the operation of the movable accessory member. That is, three game states of the third to fifth game states having different expected values of the rate of entering the third winning a prize can be realized by a simple method using the movable accessory member.

[Appendix A30]
The first winning port (314L) and the third starting port (314R) shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game (a jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering a game ball Giving the opportunity to make the first special decision (big win lottery)
A second special determination is made as to whether or not the second winning port (315) is shifted to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed by entering a game ball. Give the opportunity to do a (hit lottery)
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix A29, wherein the second special determination has a higher expectation level for obtaining a determination result for shifting to the second special game than the first special determination.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A30, the game machine enters the second special game that is advantageous to the player by entering the game machine into the first start port and the third start port and entering the game ball into the second start port. Expectation (function) is different. Therefore, by changing the expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning port and the second winning port and the third starting port, three gaming states with different degrees of expectation to be transferred to the second special game can be realized. Thereby, game nature is improved and the interest of a game ball is improved.

[Appendix A31]
The third gaming state is
The game balls that have been launched into the left region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning opening (314L), and the second start opening (315 ) And the third prize opening (314R),
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) enter the first winning port (314R) and the second winning port (315). It is difficult to enter the third prize opening (314R),
The fourth gaming state is
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning port (314L), and the second winning port ( 315) and the third winning opening (314R) are difficult to enter,
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) enter the first winning port (314R) and the third winning port (314L). The detection means (318) makes it easy to enter the second winning opening (315) when it is detected that the game ball passes through the second passage (352),
The fifth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the right area is difficult to enter the first prize opening (314L) and the third prize opening (314R), and the game ball passes through the specific area by the other detection means (319). The game machine as set forth in appendix A30, characterized in that it is easy to enter the second winning opening (315) when triggered by being detected.

[Appendix A32]
In the third gaming state and the fourth gaming state, the game balls launched into the right area are the first winning port (314L), the second winning port (315), and the third winning port (314R). The gaming machine according to appendix A31, which is difficult to enter into any of them.

[Appendix A33]
The fifth gaming state is
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning port (314L), and the second winning port ( 315) and the third winning opening (314R) are difficult to enter,
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) are awarded to the first winning port (314L) and the third winning port (314R). It is difficult, and it is easy to enter the second winning opening (315) when the detecting means (318) detects that the game ball passes through the second passage (352). A gaming machine according to A31 or Appendix A32.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A31 to Supplementary Note A33, there are three different expected values of the winning ratio of the first winning opening and the second winning opening and the third winning opening by adopting the sorting device together with the movable accessory member. A gaming state is realized. Therefore, the third game state and the fourth game state in which a game ball is launched in the left region and the game is advanced using the distribution device, and the game is performed without using the distribution device by launching the game ball in the right region. The progressing fifth gaming state can be realized. Thereby, it is possible to give a wide range of games, and at the same time, it is possible to improve game play and to enhance the interest of the game ball.

[Appendix A34]
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C ′) and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) are compared with the third gaming state (mode A) in the first special determination and the first gaming state. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A30 to appendix A33, wherein in the special determination, the probability that the transition to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) is determined is high.

[Appendix A35]
A first special symbol game in which a result of the first special determination triggered by a game ball entering the first winning port (314L) and the third starting port (314R) is displayed as a first special symbol. A first special symbol display section (371) to be executed;
A second special symbol display section for executing a second special symbol game for displaying the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second winning port (315) as a second special symbol ( 372),
Further comprising
The gaming state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, after the first special symbol game based on the first special determination or the second special determination, Transition to special gaming state,
On condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning port (314L) and the third winning port (314R) is to shift to the special gaming state. , After completion of the special game in the special game state, transition to the fourth game state (mode C, mode C ′),
The special in the special game state is provided on the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second winning port (315) is to shift to the special game state. The gaming machine according to appendix A34, wherein the game state is shifted to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) after the game is over.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A34 and Supplementary Note A35, for example, there is a gameability that has a barrier until it shifts to a special gaming state where a large amount of game value is given, and a gaming property that has a plurality of probability variation continuity rates. It is possible to provide gaming machines having various gaming characteristics.

[Appendix A36]
As a result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment,
A first determination result (probability big hit) that is shifted to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) after the end of the special game in the special gaming state;
A second determination result (usually a big jackpot) that is shifted to a gaming state other than the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) after the end of the special game in the special gaming state;
The gaming machine according to appendix A35, characterized by including:

[Appendix A37]
The gaming state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the fourth game after the end of the special game triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination Compared to the state (mode C, mode C ′) and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′), it is determined to shift to the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination. Transition to the sixth gaming state (mode B, mode D) with a low probability,
When the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game has reached the upper limit in the sixth gaming state (mode B, mode D), transition to the first gaming state (mode A) The gaming machine according to appendix A36, characterized by the above.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A36 and Supplementary Note A37, as a result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment, the first judgment result to be shifted to the fifth gaming state after the end of the special game, and the fifth after the special game is over. And a second determination result that is shifted to a gaming state other than the gaming state. In addition, the fourth gaming state and the fifth gaming state have a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination than the third gaming state. And it has three game states of the 3rd to 5th game state from which the expected value of the winning ratio of the 1st winning mouth and the 2nd winning mouth and the 3rd winning mouth differs, and the 1st winning mouth or the 3rd winning prize On the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the mouth is to shift to the special game state, the game is shifted to the fourth game state after the end of the special game, and to the second prize opening On the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball is to shift to the special game state, the game state is shifted to the fifth game state after the end of the special game. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the first to third gaming states can be applied to a probability changing machine including a so-called loop probability changing machine. Then, according to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A36 and Supplementary Note A37, the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player shifts in stages through the fourth gaming state. That is, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player, first, the game state is shifted to the fourth gaming state, and in the fourth gaming state, the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening in the special game determination. The result of the 2 special determination needs to be the first determination result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player step by step.

[Appendix A38]
The gaming state transition means (41) is triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination when the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result. The gaming machine according to appendix A37, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to the first gaming state (mode A) after the end of the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A38, when the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the game state shifts to the third game state after the special game ends, so the fourth game state and the fifth game The percentage of staying in the state is low. On the other hand, in the fourth game state and the fifth game state, not only can the game ball be expected to enter the second prize opening by the support of the movable accessory member, but also the special game state in the first special determination or the second special determination. This is a mode with a high probability of being determined to shift to. Therefore, the ratio of staying in the 4th gaming state and the 5th gaming state is low, so that it has a gameability that is easy to fall into the 3rd gaming state, but there is a sharpness to the transition of the gaming state, and the gaming value that the player can obtain Can also provide a sharp gaming machine.

[Appendix A39]
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the first special determination or the second special determination Transition number setting means for setting a transition upper limit number to be shifted to the special gaming state as the first transition to the special gaming state based on;
The gaming state transition means (41) shifts to the third gaming state (mode A) after the transition gaming upper limit number of the special gaming state set by the transition number setting means (41) is completed. The gaming machine according to appendix A35.

  The gaming machine according to appendix A39 has three gaming states of third to fifth gaming states in which the expected value of the winning ratio of the first winning port, the second winning port, and the third winning port is different, and the upper transition limit The transition to the special gaming state from the beginning will continue until the number. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states can be applied to a so-called limit machine. And after the end of the special game, the 4th after the end of the special game, on the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball to the first winning port or the third winning port The fifth game after the end of the special game, on the condition that the game state is entered and the result of the second special judgment is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening. Transition to state. That is, the transition destination of the gaming state after the special game differs depending on whether the ball enters the first winning port or the third winning port or the ball enters the second winning port. Therefore, in the opportunity to transition to the remaining special gaming state after the first hit, the gameability of how to transition to the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player while leaving the opportunity to transition to the special gaming state remains A gaming machine having the same can be provided.

[Appendix A40]
The gaming state transition means (41) has an upper limit on the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game in the fourth gaming state (mode C ′) or the fifth gaming state (mode E ′). When the game machine reaches the third gaming state (mode A), the gaming machine according to appendix A35, characterized in that:

[Appendix A41]
A special variable pitching device (82) having a special pitching portion (824) opened in the special game;
The gaming state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the special game in the special gaming state On the condition that the game ball enters the entrance part, after the end of the special game, transition to the fourth game state (mode C ′),
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the fourth gaming state (mode C ′) is to shift to the special gaming state, the special game in the special gaming state The gaming machine according to appendix A40, wherein the game machine is shifted to the fifth gaming state (mode E ′) after completion of the special game on the condition that the game ball enters the special game unit (824). .

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A40 and Supplementary Note A41, when the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the fourth gaming state or the fifth gaming state, the game machine is shifted to the first gaming state. The That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states can be applied to ST machines including so-called V-ST machines. Further, in the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A40 and Supplementary Note A41, it is necessary to go through the fourth gaming state in order to shift to the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player. That is, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state, after the transition to the fourth gaming state, the second special symbol game is performed until the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit. The result of the special determination needs to shift to the special gaming state. Therefore, after the transition from the third gaming state to the fourth gaming state, the determination result of how quickly the second special symbol game is shifted to the special gaming state is obtained, and the transition to the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player is performed. Judgment of whether to shift to the fifth gaming state, and how many special gaming states to transition to the upper limit of the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game after the transition to the fifth gaming state It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a game characteristic of whether to obtain a result.

[Appendix A42]
A first special symbol game in which a result of the first special determination triggered by a game ball entering the first winning port (314L) or the third winning port (314R) is displayed as a first special symbol. A first special symbol display section (371) to be executed;
A second special symbol display section for executing a second special symbol game for displaying the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second winning port (315) as a second special symbol ( 372),
When the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second winning port (315) is a specific result (small hit) different from that for shifting to the special game state It is possible to enter a game ball by being actuated, and the special entry to which the game state transition means (41) grants the right to enter the special game state (two types of big hits) by entering the game ball. A feather accessory device (83) having a ball portion (833);
Further comprising
The gaming state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is that which shifts to the special gaming state (1 type big hit), the transition to the special gaming state is triggered,
On the condition that the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, the fourth game state (mode C) after the special game in the special game state ends. To
After the operation of the wing accessory device (83) is completed based on the right to transition to the special gaming state (two types of big hits) granted when a game ball enters the special ball entry unit (833). Transition to the special gaming state,
Shifting to the fifth gaming state (mode E) after completion of the special game in the special gaming state that is shifted in response to the entry of the gaming ball into the special pitching portion (833) A gaming machine according to appendix A34.

[Appendix A43]
When the total number of games of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the fourth gaming state or the fifth gaming state, the gaming state transition means (41) The gaming machine according to appendix A42, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to a third gaming state.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A42 and Supplementary Note A43, the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is to shift to a special gaming state (1 type big hit), or a game ball enters the special pitching part As a result, the right to transition to the special gaming state is granted (two types of big hits), so that the transition to the special gaming state is made. That is, the gaming machine having three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states can be applied to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixing machine.

[Appendix A44]
The detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), or the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. With this as a trigger, a normal determination means (41) for performing a normal determination as to whether or not to move the movable accessory member (36) between the first position (standby position) and the second position (actuation position). )
The fourth game state (mode C, mode C ′) and the fifth game state (mode E, mode E ′) are determined by the normal determination means (41) compared to the third game state (mode A). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A29 to appendix A41, wherein the probability that it is determined that the movable accessory member (36) is operated in the normal determination is high.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A44, the probability of determining that the movable accessory member is to be operated in the normal determination by the normal determination means is different in the fourth game state, the fifth game state, and the third game state. Thereby, the three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states having different expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning port and the second winning port and the third winning port can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix A45]
In the fourth game state (mode C, mode C ′), it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352) by the detection means (318), compared to the third game state (mode A). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A27 to appendix A44, characterized in that the time from the detection until the operation of the movable accessory member (36) is started is short.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A45, in the fourth gaming state, the operation of the movable accessory member is started after the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage compared to the third gaming state. The time to complete is short. Thereby, the three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states having different expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning port and the second winning port and the third winning port can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix A46]
The fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) is more movable than the third gaming state (mode A) and the fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C ′). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A27 to appendix A45, characterized in that the operating time is long.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment A46, the operation time of the movable accessory member is longer in the fifth gaming state than in the second gaming state and the third gaming state. Thereby, the three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states having different expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning port and the second winning port and the third winning port can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix A47]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices A1 to A40, wherein the allocating unit (38) is fixed at a position where a game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) interferes.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A47, the sorting unit of the sorting device is fixed at a position where the game ball introduced from the introduction port interferes. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency of distribution between the first passage and the second passage by the distribution unit (individual difference between gaming machines). Thereby, the player can find out the launch position of the game ball that can be easily distributed to the second passage by adjusting the launch position of the game ball and performing trial and error. Enjoying exploration of game ball launch positions where game balls can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island facilities of the game hall, the game balls are swung to the second passage from those game machines. It becomes possible to enjoy the search for a game machine that is easy to understand.

[Appendix A48]
The gaming machine according to appendix A47, wherein the allocating part (38D, 38F) has a stationary part (381D, 389F) that is immovable and non-rotatable.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A48, it is determined by an accidental element such as a collision position of the game ball with respect to the fixed portion. Therefore, game balls are randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by accidental elements, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix A49]
One end of the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is fixed, and at least a part of the portion other than the one end can be plastically deformed.

[Appendix A50]
The game machine according to appendix A49, wherein the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix A51]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A48 to appendix A50, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is a nail.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A49 to appendix A51, since at least a part of the fixed portion of the allocating portion can be plastically changed, the fixed portion is returned to the initial set position when the position of the fixed portion deviates from the initial set position. It becomes possible. Thereby, it is possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio with time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix A52]
The distribution part (38F) has a plurality of nails,
In the front view, the plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with a single nail at the top and symmetrically about a vertical line passing through the single nail. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A52, by adjusting the top nail, it is possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix A53]
The distribution part (38E) has a rotating body (382D) fixed rotatably by the fixing part (381D),
The rotating body (382D) is in a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and the game is directed toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix A48 to appendix A52, wherein the game machine is rotatable in a second direction in which the ball is moved.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix A53, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it becomes possible to select and design the distribution pattern of game balls to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix A54]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A53, wherein the rotating body (382D) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix A55]
The allocating portion (38C) is in a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to appendix A54, which is a roller fixed so as to be freely rotatable in the second direction for moving the game ball.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note A54 and Supplementary Note A55, a rotating body such as a roller that can freely rotate is adopted as the allocating unit. Determined by. Therefore, game balls are randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by accidental elements, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix B1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). A distribution device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by:
A first winning opening (314) through which game balls distributed to the first passage (351) and game balls distributed to the second passage (352) can enter;
A second winning opening (315) that is capable of entering a game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning opening (314);
Detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), the second winning port (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is provided. ) From a first position where entry into the second passage (352) is restricted to move to a second position where entry of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) into the second winning opening (315) is allowed. An accessory member (36);
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix B1, when the game balls are distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, Depending on the presence / absence of operation, the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game balls allocated to the second passage are movable while the game balls are restricted from entering the second winning opening when the movable accessory member is in a standby position where the movable accessory member is not operated. When the accessory member is in the operating position, the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening. In this way, the ball throwing ratio between the first winning port and the second winning port can be varied by the cooperation of the sorting device and the movable accessory member. As a result, in the gaming machine in which both the game balls distributed to the first passage and the game balls distributed to the second passage can enter the same first prize opening, the monotonousness of the game is reduced and movable. According to the control mode of the operation of the accessory member, a new game can be realized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix B2]
The movable accessory member (36) is characterized in that the operation time when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied is longer than the operation time when the first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine according to B1.

[Appendix B3]
It further comprises other detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
Playing the game ball in the left region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball in the right region so that the other detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball in the game. The detection means (the first game state advantageous to the player as compared to the case of launching the ball, and the detection means ( The game state is shifted between a plurality of game states including a second game state that is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the game ball is launched into the left region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by 318) The game state transition means (41) is further provided,
The first condition is that the first gaming state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix B2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note B2 and Supplementary Note B3, it is easy to enter the game ball into the second winning opening by the movable accessory member when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. Are different. For example, the operation time of the movable accessory member varies depending on the game state (an advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, it is determined according to the moving path of the game ball that, for example, it is difficult for the game ball launched into the right region to enter the second winning opening, assuming that the movable accessory member is operated. It becomes possible to set the ease of playing a game ball to the second prize opening. This makes it a disadvantage to the player when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), thus promoting left-handed in situations where left-handed is encouraged It becomes possible to do.

[Appendix B4]
The second winning opening (315) is determined by the detecting means (318) according to the time required for the game ball detected by the other detecting means (319) to enter the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix B3, characterized in that the gaming ball to be detected is arranged at a position longer than a time required for entering the second winning opening (315).

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix B4, the time required for the game ball detected by the detection means to enter the second winning opening and the game ball detected by the other detection means enter the second winning opening. The time required to ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched into the left area of the game board can enter the second prize opening, while a game ball launched into the right area makes it difficult to enter the second prize opening. Is possible. This makes it a disadvantage to the player when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), thus promoting left-handed in situations where left-handed is encouraged It becomes possible to do.

[Appendix B5]
In the first gaming state (mode A, mode C), the operating time of the movable accessory member (36) is that the gaming ball detected by the detecting means (318) is the second winning port (315). ), And it is a time for limiting the game ball detected by the other detection means (318) from entering the second winning port (315). The gaming machine according to appendix B3 or appendix B4.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B5, it is possible to appropriately restrict the game ball from entering the second winning opening when the right game is performed in the first game state where the left game is encouraged. Therefore, when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It becomes possible.

[Appendix B6]
In the second gaming state (mode E), the operating time of the movable accessory member (36) is that the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) is the second prize opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B3 to appendix B5, characterized in that it is time allowed to enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B6, it is possible to make a game ball enter the second winning opening by making a right turn in the second gaming state. Therefore, by making a right turn in the second gaming state, it is possible to advance the game with almost no increase or decrease in the number of game balls.

[Appendix B7]
The movable accessory members (36, 36R, 36S)
In the first position (standby position), the game ball is allowed to enter the first prize opening (314), and the game ball is allowed to enter the second prize opening (315);
In the second position (actuation position), the game ball is restricted from entering the first prize opening (314) and the game ball is restricted from being allowed to enter the second prize opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B1 to appendix B6.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix B7, the game ball is allowed to enter one of the second winning port and the third winning port depending on whether or not the movable accessory member is activated. The game ball is restricted from entering the other winning port, and the game ball entering the other winning port is restricted while the game ball is restricted from entering the other winning port. One of the allowable states is realized. Thus, in the gaming machine according to appendix A7, the movable accessory member not only allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into one winning opening, but also the entry of the game ball into the other winning opening. Allow or limit at the same time. Thereby, the monotonousness of a game can be reduced and a highly interesting game machine having new game characteristics according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member can be provided.

[Appendix B8]
The movable accessory member (36R) includes a first portion (361R) for allowing a game ball to enter the second winning port (315) from the left of the second winning port (315), and the second winning port. A gaming machine according to any one of appendix B1 to appendix B7, further comprising a second portion (362R) for allowing a game ball to enter the second winning opening (315) from the right side of (315) .

[Appendix B9]
The movable accessory member (36R)
Allowing the game ball passing through the second passage to enter the first start port (314) at the first position (standby position);
In the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows a game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) to enter the second winning opening (315), and The gaming machine according to appendix B8, wherein the portion (362R) allows a gaming ball launched into the right region of the gaming board (31) to enter the second winning opening (315).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B8 and Supplementary Note B9, the movable accessory member has a first portion for allowing a game ball to enter the second prize opening from the left of the second prize opening, and a game from the right of the second prize opening. With a simple configuration of providing the second portion for allowing the ball to enter the second winning opening, it is possible to cause the game ball to win the second winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. Thereby, in the gaming machine adopting the distribution device, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine that reduces the monotony of the game and has new gaming characteristics according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B10]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first part (361R) and the second part (362R), and allows a game ball to enter the second winning opening (315). It further has a penetration part (363R),
The game according to appendix B8 or appendix B9, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined so as to become lower toward the penetrating portion (363R). Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B10, both the game ball in the second passage and the game ball in the right region are provided by a simple configuration in which a through portion is provided between the first portion and the second portion having different inclination states. It is possible to move to the penetrating part and enter the second winning opening.

[Appendix B11]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S),
The first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) are close to each other at the first position (standby position), and at the second position (actuation position). The gaming machine according to appendix B7, characterized in that the front ends of the are spaced apart.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix B11, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member can allow or restrict the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening and allow or restrict the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix B12]
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passage (352), and is in the first position (standby position). The game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) interferes to move the game ball toward the first winning opening (314), and the second passage (352) is moved in the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to appendix B11, wherein the gaming ball is moved toward the second winning port (315) by the interference of the passing gaming ball.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix B12, the game balls are distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the sorting device, and the game balls are placed in the second passage by the sorting device, and the first movable accessory as a movable accessory member. Depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are activated, entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and the second winning opening is permitted or restricted. Then, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B12, the allocating device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other, so that the gaming balls distributed to the second passage by the movable accessory member are directed to the second winning opening. The admission or restriction of entering the ball and the admission or restriction of entering the game ball into the first winning opening are performed simultaneously. Thereby, in the gaming machine adopting the distribution device, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine that reduces the monotony of the game and has new gaming characteristics according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B13]
It further comprises other detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36)
When the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319), it is moved from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation position),
When in the second position, the game ball passing through the second passage (352) and the game ball passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the third winning opening (315). A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note B1 to Supplementary Note B12, wherein:

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix B13, not only the game balls passing through the second passage of the sorting apparatus but also the game balls launched into the right area of the game board enter the second winning opening by the movable accessory member. Can be made. Therefore, it becomes possible to allow a game ball to enter the second winning opening from a plurality of routes by one movable accessory member. Thereby, an amusing gaming machine having new gaming properties can be provided.

[Appendix B14]
The supplementary note further comprising a retraction guide portion (393, 394) provided on an upper side of the movable accessory member (36) and guiding the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to Appendix B13.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix B14, a retraction guiding unit that guides the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening is provided above the movable accessory member. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B14, for example, in the gaming state where the operating time of the movable role member is short and it is encouraged to launch the gaming machine in the left area of the game board, the second prize opening in the movable role member Since it is possible to receive the game ball at a position away from, it is possible to secure a long time until the game ball reaches the second winning opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second winning opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position. When it is performed, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B15]
The retraction guide part (393, 394) includes the plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined shape in which a nail on the side far from the second prize opening (315) is positioned lower than a nail on the side near the second prize opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix B14.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B15, the game ball can be guided upstream in the moving direction of the game ball with a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Also, in gaming machines, since a large number of nails are generally driven on the game board, a retracting guide portion can be provided when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the movable accessory member to receive support when the movable accessory member operates for a short time while suppressing the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retracting guide portion.

[Appendix B16]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the second prize opening (315) at the second position. The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B1 to appendix B15, further comprising a delay unit (364) for delaying.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B16, a delay portion is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the game ball to the second winning opening. Therefore, for example, even when the player receives a game ball on the movable accessory member in a gaming state where the operation time of the movable combination member is short and left-handed is encouraged, It is possible to secure a long time until it reaches the second prize opening. As a result, the game ball received by the movable accessory member can be prevented from reaching the second prize opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the first position. When this is done, it is difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B17]
The gaming machine according to appendix B16, wherein the delay unit (364, 364A to 364C) moves a game ball along a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36, 36A to 36C).

[Appendix B18]
The delay portion (364D to 364H) includes one or more linear convex portions (364D to 364G) or linear concave portions (in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36D to 36H) or linear concave portion ( 364H), the gaming machine according to appendix B16 or appendix B17.

[Appendix B19]
The delay unit (364I to 364P) is a plurality of discretely arranged convex portions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P), according to any one of supplementary notes B16 to B18 The gaming machine described.

[Appendix B20]
The gaming machine according to appendix B19, wherein the plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or the plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) are arranged in a lattice pattern.

  According to the gaming machines according to the supplementary notes B17 to B20, the movement of the game ball on the movable accessory member can be delayed by the delay unit having a simple configuration. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally formed in the movable accessory member by resin molding. Thereby, the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion can be suppressed.

[Appendix B21]
From the supplementary note B16, the delay unit (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting a moving direction of the game ball on the movable accessory member (36Q). The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix B20.

[Appendix B22]
The gaming machine according to appendix B21, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a reverse direction opposite to a moving direction of the game ball.

[Appendix B23]
The gaming machine according to appendix B21 or appendix B22, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) cause a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force to act on the game ball.

  According to the gaming machines according to appendix B21 to appendix B23, since the movable accessory member is provided with a roller, not only the design of the gaming machine is improved, but also the behavior of the game ball moving the movable accessory member Because it becomes easier to focus on the game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B24]
A game state transition means (41) for shifting the game state by establishment of a predetermined state among a plurality of game states;
The gaming state transition means (41) includes a third gaming state (mode A), a fourth gaming state (mode C, a mode C ′), and different expected values of the winning ratio to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix B1, including a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′).

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B24 has three gaming states of third to fifth gaming states that differ in the expected value of the winning ratio with respect to the second winning opening. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B24, it is possible to create a new gaming property with improved gaming properties based on three gaming states with different expected values of the rate of entering the second winning opening. become.

[Appendix B25]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left area is easy to enter the first winning opening (314), but difficult to enter the second winning opening (315).
The game balls launched into the right area are difficult to enter the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (315),
The fourth gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left area are easier to enter the first prize opening (314) and the second prize opening (315) than the game balls launched into the right area,
The fifth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the right area is less likely to enter the first prize opening (314) and is easier to enter the second prize opening (315) than the game ball launched into the left area. The gaming machine according to appendix B24, characterized in that:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B25, the ease of entering the first prize opening and the second prize opening differs depending on the launch area of the game ball with respect to the game board in each of the third to fifth gaming states. Thereby, three game states of the 3rd to 5th game state from which the expected value of the winning ratio of a 1st prize opening and a 2nd prize opening differs can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix B26]
It further comprises other detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position to the second position when the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. ,
In the third game state and the fourth game state, it is more likely that the other detection means (319) launches the game ball in the left region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball. It is advantageous to the player compared to the case where a game ball is launched in the right area so that the passage of
In the fifth gaming state, the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball when the game ball is launched into the right region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). As described above, the gaming machine according to appendix B25, which is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball is launched into the left region.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B26, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening by operating the movable accessory member when the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means or other detection means To. Each of the third to fifth gaming states has a launch area that is advantageous to the player by utilizing the presence or absence of the operation of the movable accessory member. That is, three game states of the third to fifth game states having different expected values of the rate of entering the second winning opening can be realized by a simple method using the movable accessory member.

[Appendix B27]
The first special determination as to whether or not the first winning port (314R) is shifted to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed by entering a game ball. Give the opportunity to do a (hit lottery)
A second special determination is made as to whether or not the second winning port (315) is shifted to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed by entering a game ball. Give the opportunity to do a (hit lottery)
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix B26, wherein the second special determination has a higher expectation level for obtaining a determination result for shifting to the second special game than the first special determination.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B27, the expectation (function) to be shifted to the second special game advantageous to the player by entering the gaming machine into the first starting port and entering the gaming ball into the second starting port Is different. Therefore, it is possible to realize three gaming states with different degrees of expectation to be transferred to the second special game by making the expected value of the winning ratio of the first winning opening and the second starting opening different. Thereby, game nature is improved and the interest of a game ball is improved.

[Appendix B28]
The third gaming state is
The game balls that have been launched into the left region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning opening (314L), and the second start opening (3145). ) Is difficult to enter,
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning port (314), and the second winning port ( 315) is difficult to enter,
The fourth gaming state is
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning opening (314), and the second winning opening ( 315) is difficult to enter,
The detection means (318), in which the game balls that have been launched into the left region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) are difficult to enter the first winning opening (314). It is easy to enter the third winning opening (315) when it is detected that a game ball passes through the second passage (352) by
The fifth gaming state is
This is triggered by the fact that the game ball launched into the right region is difficult to enter the first winning port (314) and the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball passes through the specific region. The gaming machine according to appendix B27, characterized in that the player can easily enter the second winning opening (315).

[Appendix B29]
The third gaming state and the fourth gaming state are characterized in that it is difficult for a game ball launched into the right region to enter the first winning port (314) and the second winning port (315). A gaming machine according to appendix B28.

[Appendix B30]
The fifth gaming state is
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) enter the first winning port (314) and the second winning port (315). Difficult to do,
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) are difficult to win in the first winning port (314), and are detected by the detection means (318). The gaming machine according to appendix B28 or appendix B29, characterized in that it is easy to enter the second winning opening (315) when it is detected that a game ball passes through the second passage (352) .

  In the gaming machines according to appendix B28 to appendix B30, three game states with different expected values of the entrance ratios of the first winning port and the second winning port are realized by adopting the sorting device together with the movable accessory member. The Therefore, the third game state and the fourth game state in which a game ball is launched in the left region and the game is advanced using the distribution device, and the game is performed without using the distribution device by launching the game ball in the right region. The progressing fifth gaming state can be realized. Thereby, it is possible to give a wide range of games, and at the same time, it is possible to improve game play and to enhance the interest of the game ball.

[Appendix B31]
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C ′) and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) are compared with the third gaming state (mode A) in the first special determination and the first gaming state. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B27 to appendix B30, wherein in the special determination, there is a high probability that it is determined to shift to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state).

[Appendix B32]
A first special symbol display unit for executing a first special symbol game for displaying the result of the first special determination triggered by the game ball entering the first winning port (314) by a first special symbol ( 371),
A second special symbol display section for executing a second special symbol game for displaying the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second winning port (315) as a second special symbol ( 372),
Further comprising
The gaming state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, after the first special symbol game based on the first special determination or the second special determination, Transition to special gaming state,
The special in the special game state is provided on the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the game ball entering the first winning port (314) is to shift to the special game state. After the game is over, the state is shifted to the fourth game state (mode C, mode C ′),
The special in the special game state is provided on the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second winning port (315) is to shift to the special game state. The gaming machine according to appendix B31, wherein after the game is over, the game state is shifted to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′).

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note B31 and Supplementary Note B32, for example, a game with a barrier until it shifts to a special gaming state to which a large amount of game value is given, and a game with a plurality of substantial probability change continuity rates. It is possible to provide gaming machines having various gaming characteristics.

[Appendix B33]
As a result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment,
A first determination result (probability big hit) that is shifted to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) after the end of the special game in the special gaming state;
A second determination result (usually a big jackpot) that is shifted to a gaming state other than the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) after the end of the special game in the special gaming state;
A gaming machine according to appendix B32, characterized by including:

[Appendix B34]
The gaming state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the fourth game after the end of the special game triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination Compared to the state (mode C, mode C ′) and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′), it is determined to shift to the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination. Transition to the sixth gaming state (mode B, mode D) with a low probability,
When the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game has reached the upper limit in the sixth gaming state (mode B, mode D), transition to the first gaming state (mode A) The gaming machine according to appendix B33, characterized by the above.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B33 and Supplementary Note B34, as a result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment, the first judgment result to be shifted to the fifth gaming state after the end of the special game, and the fifth after the special game is over. And a second determination result that is shifted to a gaming state other than the gaming state. In addition, the fourth gaming state and the fifth gaming state have a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination than the third gaming state. And it has three game states of the 3rd to 5th game state from which the expected value of the winning ratio of a 1st winning opening and a 2nd winning opening differs, and it is triggered by the entering of a game ball to the 1st winning opening On the condition that the result of the first special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, the transition to the fourth gaming state after the end of the special game, triggered by the game ball entering the second winning opening On the condition that the result of the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, the game state is shifted to the fifth game state after the special game ends. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the first to third gaming states can be applied to a probability changing machine including a so-called loop probability changing machine. Then, according to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note B33 and Supplementary Note B34, the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player shifts stepwise through the fourth gaming state. That is, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player, first, the game state is shifted to the fourth gaming state, and in the fourth gaming state, the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening in the special game determination. The result of the 2 special determination needs to be the first determination result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player step by step.

[Appendix B35]
The gaming state transition means (41) is triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination when the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result. The gaming machine according to appendix B34, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to the first gaming state (mode A) after the end of the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix B35, when the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the game state shifts to the third game state after the special game is finished, so the fourth game state and the fifth game The percentage of staying in the state is low. On the other hand, in the fourth game state and the fifth game state, not only can the game ball be expected to enter the second prize opening by the support of the movable accessory member, but also the special game state in the first special determination or the second special determination. This is a mode with a high probability of being determined to shift to. Therefore, the ratio of staying in the 4th gaming state and the 5th gaming state is low, so that it has a gameability that is easy to fall into the 3rd gaming state, but there is a sharpness to the transition of the gaming state, and the gaming value that the player can obtain Can also provide a sharp gaming machine.

[Appendix B36]
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the first special determination or the second special determination Transition number setting means for setting a transition upper limit number to be shifted to the special gaming state as the first transition to the special gaming state based on;
The gaming state transition means (41) shifts to the third gaming state (mode A) after the transition gaming upper limit number of the special gaming state set by the transition number setting means (41) is completed. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B32.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B36 has three gaming states of third to fifth gaming states with different expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning port and the second winning port, and up to the transition upper limit number The transition to the special gaming state from will continue. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states can be applied to a so-called limit machine. Then, on the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening is to shift to the special game state, the game state is shifted to the fourth game state after the special game is over. The game state is shifted to the fifth game state after the special game is completed on the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second prize opening is to shift to the special game state. . That is, the transition destination of the gaming state after the special game differs depending on whether the ball enters the first winning port or the ball enters the second winning port. Therefore, in the opportunity to transition to the remaining special gaming state after the first hit, the gameability of how to transition to the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player while leaving the opportunity to transition to the special gaming state remains A gaming machine having the same can be provided.

[Appendix B37]
The gaming state transition means (41) has an upper limit on the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game in the fourth gaming state (mode C ′) or the fifth gaming state (mode E ′). The gaming machine according to appendix B32, wherein when the value reaches the third gaming state (mode A), the gaming machine is shifted to the third gaming state.

[Appendix B38]
A special variable pitching device (82) having a special pitching portion (824) opened in the special game;
The gaming state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the special game in the special gaming state On the condition that the game ball enters the entrance part, after the end of the special game, transition to the fourth game state (mode C ′),
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the fourth gaming state (mode C ′) is to shift to the special gaming state, the special game in the special gaming state The gaming machine according to appendix B37, wherein a transition is made to the fifth gaming state (mode E ′) after completion of the special game on the condition that the game ball enters the special ball part (824) .

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note B37 and Supplementary Note B38, when the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the fourth gaming state or the fifth gaming state, the game machine is shifted to the first gaming state. The That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states can be applied to ST machines including so-called V-ST machines. Further, in the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note B37 and Supplementary Note B38, it is necessary to go through the fourth gaming state in order to shift to the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player. That is, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state, after the transition to the fourth gaming state, the second special symbol game is performed until the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit. The result of the special determination needs to shift to the special gaming state. Therefore, after the transition from the third gaming state to the fourth gaming state, the determination result of how quickly the second special symbol game is shifted to the special gaming state is obtained, and the transition to the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player is performed. Judgment of whether to shift to the fifth gaming state, and how many special gaming states to transition to the upper limit of the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game after the transition to the fifth gaming state It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a game characteristic of whether to obtain a result.

[Appendix B39]
A first special symbol display unit for executing a first special symbol game for displaying the result of the first special determination triggered by the game ball entering the first winning port (314) by a first special symbol ( 371),
A second special symbol display section for executing a second special symbol game for displaying the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second winning port (315) as a second special symbol ( 372),
When the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second winning port (315) is a specific result (small hit) different from that for shifting to the special game state It is possible to enter a game ball by being actuated, and the special entry to which the game state transition means (41) grants the right to enter the special game state (two types of big hits) by entering the game ball. A feather accessory device (83) having a ball portion (833);
Further comprising
The gaming state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is that which shifts to the special gaming state (1 type big hit), the transition to the special gaming state is triggered,
On the condition that the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, the fourth game state (mode C) after the special game in the special game state ends. To
After the operation of the wing accessory device (83) is completed based on the right to transition to the special gaming state (two types of big hits) granted when a game ball enters the special ball entry unit (833). Transition to the special gaming state,
Shifting to the fifth gaming state (mode E) after completion of the special game in the special gaming state that is shifted in response to the entry of the gaming ball into the special pitching portion (833) A gaming machine according to appendix B28.

[Appendix B40]
When the total number of games of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the fourth gaming state or the fifth gaming state, the gaming state transition means (41) The gaming machine according to appendix B39, which is shifted to the third gaming state.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note B39 and Supplementary Note B40, the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is to shift to the special gaming state (one kind of big hit), or the game ball enters the special entry part As a result, the right to transition to the special gaming state is granted (two types of big hits), so that the transition to the special gaming state is made. That is, the gaming machine having three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states can be applied to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixing machine.

[Appendix B41]
The detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), or the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. With this as a trigger, a normal determination means (41) for performing a normal determination as to whether or not to move the movable accessory member (36) between the first position (standby position) and the second position (actuation position). )
The fourth game state (mode C, mode C ′) and the fifth game state (mode E, mode E ′) are determined by the normal determination means (41) compared to the third game state (mode A). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B26 to appendix B40, wherein the probability that it is determined that the movable accessory member (36) is operated in the normal determination is high.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B41, the probability that it is determined that the movable accessory member is operated in the normal determination by the normal determination means is different in the fourth game state, the fifth game state, and the third game state. Thereby, three game states of the 3rd to 5th game state from which the expected value of the winning ratio of a 1st prize opening and a 2nd prize opening differs can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix B42]
In the fourth game state (mode C, mode C ′), it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352) by the detection means (318), compared to the third game state (mode A). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B24 to appendix B41, characterized in that a period of time from the detection until the operation of the movable accessory member (36) is started is short.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment B42, in the fourth gaming state, the operation of the movable accessory member is started after the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage compared to the third gaming state. The time to complete is short. Thereby, three game states of the 3rd to 5th game state from which the expected value of the winning ratio of a 1st prize opening and a 2nd prize opening differ can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix B43]
The fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) is more movable than the third gaming state (mode A) and the fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C ′). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B24 to appendix B42, characterized in that the operating time of is long.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment B43, the operating time of the movable accessory member is longer in the fifth gaming state than in the second gaming state and the third gaming state. Thereby, three game states of the 3rd to 5th game state from which the expected value of the winning ratio of a 1st prize opening and a 3rd prize opening differ can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix B44]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B1 to appendix B43, wherein the distribution unit (38) is fixed at a position where a game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) interferes.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment B44, the sorting unit of the sorting device is fixed at a position where the game ball introduced from the introduction port interferes. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency of distribution between the first passage and the second passage by the distribution unit (individual difference between gaming machines). Thereby, the player can find out the launch position of the game ball that can be easily distributed to the second passage by adjusting the launch position of the game ball and performing trial and error. Enjoying exploration of game ball launch positions where game balls can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island facilities of the game hall, the game balls are swung to the second passage from those game machines. It becomes possible to enjoy the search for a game machine that is easy to understand.

[Appendix B45]
The gaming machine according to appendix B44, wherein the distribution unit (38D, 38F) includes a fixed unit (381D, 389F) that is immovable and cannot rotate.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B45, it is determined by an accidental element such as a collision position of the game ball with respect to the fixed portion. Therefore, game balls are randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by accidental elements, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix B46]
One end of the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is fixed, and at least a portion of the portion other than the one end is plastically deformable, and the gaming machine according to appendix B45,

[Appendix B47]
The gaming machine according to appendix B46, wherein the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix B48]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B45 to appendix B47, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is a nail.

  In the gaming machines according to appendix B46 to appendix B48, since at least a part of the fixed portion of the allocating portion can be plastically changed, the fixed portion is set to the initial position when the position of the fixed portion deviates from the initial set value. It becomes possible to return. Thereby, it is possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio with time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix B49]
The distribution part (38F) has a plurality of nails,
In the front view, the plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with a single nail at the top and symmetrically about a vertical line passing through the single nail. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note B49, by adjusting the top nail, it is possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix B50]
The distribution part (38E) has a rotating body (382D) fixed rotatably by the fixing part (381D),
The rotating body (382D) is in a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and the game is directed toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix B45 to appendix B49, wherein the game machine is rotatable in a second direction in which the ball is moved.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix B50, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it becomes possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the game balls to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix B51]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B50, wherein the rotating body (382D) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix B52]
The allocating portion (38C) is in a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to appendix B51, wherein the gaming machine is a roller fixed so as to be freely rotatable in a second direction for moving the game ball.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note B51 and Supplementary Note B52, a rotating body such as a roller that can freely rotate is adopted as the allocating unit. Even with this rotational body, incidental elements such as a collision position of a game ball against the rotational body are also used. Determined by. Therefore, game balls are randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by accidental elements, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix C1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). A distribution device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by:
A first winning opening (314) through which game balls distributed to the first passage (351) can enter;
A second winning port (315) having a function different from that of the first winning port (314), wherein the game balls distributed to the second passage (352) can enter.
Detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), the second winning port (315) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is provided. ) From a first position where entry into the second passage (352) is restricted to move to a second position where entry of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) into the second winning opening (315) is allowed. An accessory member (36T to 36X);
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C1, when the game balls are distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, Depending on the presence / absence of operation, the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game balls allocated to the second passage are movable while the game balls are restricted from entering the second winning opening when the movable accessory member is in a standby position where the movable accessory member is not operated. When the accessory member is in the operating position, the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening. In this way, the ball throwing ratio between the first winning port and the second winning port can be varied by the cooperation of the sorting device and the movable accessory member. Thereby, in the gaming machine in which the game balls distributed to the first passage and the game balls distributed to the second passage can enter the winning holes having different functions, the monotonousness of the game is reduced, and the movable accessory member According to the control mode of the operation, a new game can be realized and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix C2]
The movable accessory member (36T to 36X) is characterized in that the operation time when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied is longer than the operation time when the first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine according to appendix C1.

[Appendix C3]
It further comprises other detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
Playing the game ball in the left region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball in the right region so that the other detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball in the game. The detection means (the first game state advantageous to the player as compared to the case of launching the ball, and the detection means ( The game state is shifted between a plurality of game states including a second game state that is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the game ball is launched into the left region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by 318) The game state transition means (41) is further provided,
The first condition is that the first gaming state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix C2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note C2 and Supplementary Note C3, it is easy to enter a game ball into the second winning opening by the movable accessory member when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. Are different. For example, the operation time of the movable accessory member varies depending on the game state (an advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, it is determined according to the moving path of the game ball that, for example, it is difficult for the game ball launched into the right region to enter the second winning opening, assuming that the movable accessory member is operated. It becomes possible to set the ease of playing a game ball to the second prize opening. This makes it a disadvantage to the player when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), thus promoting left-handed in situations where left-handed is encouraged It becomes possible to do.

[Appendix C4]
The second winning opening (315) is determined by the detecting means (318) according to the time required for the game ball detected by the other detecting means (319) to enter the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix C3, characterized in that the gaming ball to be detected is arranged at a position longer than a time required for entering the second winning opening (315).

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix C4, the time required for the game ball detected by the detection means to enter the second winning opening and the game ball detected by the other detection means enter the second winning opening. The time required to ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched into the left area of the game board can enter the second prize opening, while a game ball launched into the right area makes it difficult to enter the second prize opening. Is possible. This makes it a disadvantage to the player when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), thus promoting left-handed in situations where left-handed is encouraged It becomes possible to do.

[Appendix C5]
In the first gaming state (mode A, mode C), the operating time of the movable accessory member (36) is that the gaming ball detected by the detecting means (318) is the second winning port (315). ), And it is a time for limiting the game ball detected by the other detection means (318) from entering the second winning port (315). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C3 or Supplementary Note C4.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note C5, it is possible to appropriately restrict the game ball from entering the second winning opening when the right game is performed in the first game state where the left game is encouraged. Therefore, when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It becomes possible.

[Appendix C6]
In the second gaming state (mode E), the operating time of the movable accessory member (36) is that the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) is the second prize opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C3 to appendix C5, characterized in that it is a time during which it is allowed to enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C6, it is possible to make a game ball enter the second winning opening by making a right turn in the second gaming state. Therefore, by making a right turn in the second gaming state, it is possible to advance the game with almost no increase or decrease in the number of game balls.

[Appendix C7]
A gap through which a game ball can pass is formed between the second prize opening (315) and the game ball launched to the right area of the game board (31) is directed toward the second prize opening (315). A guiding part (31M ′) to be moved;
Further comprising
The movable accessory member (36T to 36X)
At the first position (standby position), the second winning opening (315) is closed, and the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) and the right side of the game board (31) are launched. Limiting the entry of game balls into the second prize opening (315),
In the second position (operating position), the second winning opening (315) is opened, and a path for a game ball is formed between the guiding portion (31M ′) and the second winning opening (315). Note that the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) and the game ball launched into the right area are allowed to enter the second winning opening (315). A gaming machine according to C6.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C7, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, a path of the game ball is formed between the guide portion and the second winning opening, and thus the second path of the distribution device is Not only the passing game ball but also the game ball launched into the right area of the game board can be entered into the second winning opening by the movable accessory member. Therefore, it becomes possible to allow a game ball to enter the second winning opening from a plurality of routes by one movable accessory member. Thereby, an amusing gaming machine having new gaming properties can be provided.

[Appendix C8]
The movable accessory member (36T) is slidable between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position),
The first position (standby position) is a position for closing the second winning opening (315) and opening the gap,
The gaming machine according to appendix C7, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C8, the movable accessory member is slid at a first position where the second winning opening is closed and a second position where the gap between the guiding portion and the second winning opening is closed. A single movable accessory member allows a game ball to enter the second winning opening from a plurality of paths.

[Appendix C9]
The movable accessory member (36U, 36V) is operable between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) by rotation,
The first position (standby position) is a position for closing the second winning opening (315) and opening the gap,
The gaming machine according to appendix C7, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

[Appendix C10]
The game machine according to appendix C9, wherein the movable accessory member (36U) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction along the game board (31).

[Appendix C11]
The game machine according to appendix C9, wherein the movable accessory member (36V) is rotatable about a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the game board (31).

  In the gaming machines according to appendix C9 to appendix C11, the movable accessory member extends along the vertical direction between the first position where the second winning opening is closed and the second position where the gap between the guiding portion and the second winning opening is closed. With the simple configuration of rotating around the rotation axis, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member.

[Appendix C12]
The gaming machine according to appendix C11, wherein the rotating body (36V) can be stopped in an upright state at the second start port (315) and a third position (standby position) that opens the gap.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C12, it is not necessary to provide a retraction guide unit, and in the gaming state (mode A to mode C) in which the movable accessory member is opened for a short time, the game ball in the right region of the sorting device is movable. It can prevent being guided to the 2nd starting opening by the accessory member.

[Appendix C13]
The movable accessory member (36W) is rotatable, and the second starting port (315) and a closing part (364W) capable of closing the gap, and the second starting port (315) and the gap are opened. With a possible penetration (363W)
The first position (standby position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is closed by the closing portion (364W) and the gap is opened by the through hole (363W).
The second position (operating position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is opened by the through hole (363W) and the gap is closed by the closing portion (364W). A gaming machine according to appendix C7.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C13, the game ball is entered from the plurality of paths into the second winning opening by one movable accessory member by a simple configuration of rotating the movable accessory member having the closing portion and the penetrating portion. It becomes possible.

[Appendix C14]
The movable accessory member (36X) rotates around a rotation axis extending in a direction inclined with respect to a horizontal direction between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) in the gap. Is a possible rotating body,
The rotating body (36X)
A first penetrating portion (361X) penetrating along a direction orthogonal to the rotational axis (36X) and allowing a game ball to pass through, and penetrating in a direction intersecting the first penetrating portion (361X) as viewed in the rotational axis direction And a second penetrating portion (362X) through which a game ball can pass,
The first position (standby position) is a position where the game ball is dropped in the gap by the second penetration part (362X),
The gaming machine according to appendix C7, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the first penetrating portion (361X) communicates with the second winning opening (315).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C14, a simple structure in which the rotating body is rotated between the third prize opening and the guide unit, and a single moving accessory member enters the game ball from the plurality of paths into the third prize opening. It becomes possible to make a ball.

[Appendix C15]
A game ball that moves the movable accessory member (36T to 36X) toward the third prize opening (315) when the movable accessory member (36T to 36X) is in the second position (operating position). The game machine according to any one of appendix C7 to appendix C14, further comprising a guard portion (31B) that prevents the raceway from exceeding the third winning opening (315).

  In the gaming machine according to attachment C15, by providing the guard portion, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the game ball that moves the movable accessory member toward the second winning opening is surely received in the second prize. The ball can enter the mouth.

[Appendix C16]
It further comprises other detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36)
When the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319), it is moved from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation position),
When in the second position, the game ball passing through the second passage (352) and the game ball passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the third winning opening (315). A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note C1 to Supplementary Note C15, wherein:

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix C16, not only the game balls passing through the second passage of the sorting apparatus but also the game balls launched into the right area of the game board enter the second winning opening by the movable accessory member. Can be made. Therefore, it becomes possible to allow a game ball to enter the second winning opening from a plurality of routes by one movable accessory member. Thereby, an amusing gaming machine having new gaming properties can be provided.

[Appendix C17]
The supplementary note further comprising a retraction guide portion (393, 394) provided on an upper side of the movable accessory member (36) and guiding the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to Appendix C16.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C17, a retraction guiding unit that guides the game ball in a direction away from the second prize opening is provided above the movable accessory member. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to appendix C17, for example, in the gaming state where the operating time of the movable role member is short and it is encouraged to launch the gaming machine in the left area of the game board, the second prize opening in the movable role member Since it is possible to receive the game ball at a position away from, it is possible to secure a long time until the game ball reaches the second winning opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second winning opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position. When it is performed, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix C18]
The retraction guide part (393, 394) includes the plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined shape in which a nail on the side far from the second prize opening (315) is positioned lower than a nail on the side near the second prize opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix C17.

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix C18, the gaming ball can be guided upstream in the moving direction of the gaming ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Also, in gaming machines, since a large number of nails are generally driven on the game board, a retracting guide portion can be provided when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the movable accessory member to receive support when the movable accessory member operates for a short time while suppressing the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retracting guide portion.

[Appendix C19]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the second prize opening (315) at the second position. The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix C1 to Appendix C18, further including a delay unit (364) for delaying.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C19, a delay portion is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the game ball to the second winning opening. Therefore, for example, even when the player receives a game ball on the movable accessory member in a gaming state where the operation time of the movable combination member is short and left-handed is encouraged, It is possible to secure a long time until it reaches the second prize opening. As a result, the game ball received by the movable accessory member can be prevented from reaching the second prize opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the first position. When this is done, it is difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix C20]
The game machine according to appendix C19, wherein the delay unit (364, 364A to 364C) moves a game ball along a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36, 36A to 36C).

[Appendix C21]
The delay portion (364D to 364H) includes one or more linear convex portions (364D to 364G) or linear concave portions (in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36D to 36H) or linear concave portion ( 364H), the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C19 or Supplementary C20.

[Appendix C22]
The delay part (364I to 364P) is a plurality of discretely arranged convex parts (364I to 364N) or a plurality of concave parts (364O, 364P), according to any one of supplementary notes C19 to C21 The gaming machine described.

[Appendix C23]
The gaming machine according to appendix C22, wherein the plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or the plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) are arranged in a lattice pattern.

  According to the gaming machines according to appendix C20 to appendix C23, the movement of the game ball on the movable accessory member can be delayed by the delay unit having a simple configuration. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally formed in the movable accessory member by resin molding. Thereby, the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion can be suppressed.

[Appendix C24]
From the appendix C19, the delay unit (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting a moving direction of the game ball on the movable accessory member (36Q). The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix C23.

[Appendix C25]
The game machine according to appendix C24, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a reverse direction opposite to a moving direction of the game ball.

[Appendix C26]
The gaming machine according to appendix C24 or appendix C25, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) cause a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force to act on the game ball.

  According to the gaming machines according to appendix C24 to appendix C26, since the movable accessory member is provided with a roller, not only the design of the gaming machine is improved, but also the behavior of the game ball moving the movable accessory member Because it becomes easier to focus on the game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C27]
A game state transition means (41) for shifting the game state by establishment of a predetermined state among a plurality of game states;
The gaming state transition means (41) includes a third gaming state (mode A), a fourth gaming state (mode C, a mode C ′), and different expected values of the winning ratio to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix C1, including a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′).

  The gaming machine according to appendix C27 has three gaming states of third to fifth gaming states that differ in the expected value of the winning ratio with respect to the second winning opening. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C27, it is possible to create a new gaming property with improved gaming properties based on three gaming states with different expected values of the rate of entering the second winning opening. become.

[Appendix C28]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left area is easy to enter the first winning opening (314), but difficult to enter the second winning opening (315).
The game balls launched into the right area are difficult to enter the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (315),
The fourth gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left area are easier to enter the first prize opening (314) and the second prize opening (315) than the game balls launched into the right area,
The fifth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the right area is less likely to enter the first prize opening (314) and is easier to enter the second prize opening (315) than the game ball launched into the left area. The gaming machine according to appendix C27, which is characterized by the above.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C28, the ease of entering the first winning opening and the second winning opening varies depending on the launch area of the game ball with respect to the game board in each of the third to fifth gaming states. Thereby, three game states of the 3rd to 5th game state from which the expected value of the winning ratio of a 1st prize opening and a 2nd prize opening differs can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix C29]
It further comprises other detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position to the second position when the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. ,
In the third game state and the fourth game state, it is more likely that the other detection means (319) launches the game ball in the left region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball. It is advantageous to the player compared to the case where a game ball is launched in the right area so that the passage of
In the fifth gaming state, the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball when the game ball is launched into the right region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). As described above, the gaming machine according to appendix C28 is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball is launched into the left region.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C29, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second winning opening by operating the movable accessory member triggered by the passage of the game ball being detected by the detection means or other detection means. To. Each of the third to fifth gaming states has a launch area that is advantageous to the player by utilizing the presence or absence of the operation of the movable accessory member. That is, three game states of the third to fifth game states having different expected values of the rate of entering the second winning opening can be realized by a simple method using the movable accessory member.

[Appendix C30]
The first special determination as to whether or not the first winning port (314R) is shifted to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed by entering a game ball. Give the opportunity to do a (hit lottery)
A second special determination is made as to whether or not the second winning port (315) is shifted to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed by entering a game ball. Give the opportunity to do a (hit lottery)
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix C29, wherein the second special determination has a higher expectation level for obtaining a determination result of shifting to the second special game than the first special determination.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C30, the expectation (function) of the transition to the second special game advantageous to the player by entering the gaming machine into the first starting port and entering the gaming ball into the second starting port Is different. Therefore, it is possible to realize three gaming states with different degrees of expectation to be transferred to the second special game by making the expected value of the winning ratio of the first winning opening and the second starting opening different. Thereby, game nature is improved and the interest of a game ball is improved.

[Appendix C31]
The third gaming state is
The game balls that have been launched into the left region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning opening (314L), and the second start opening (3145). ) Is difficult to enter,
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning port (314), and the second winning port ( 315) is difficult to enter,
The fourth gaming state is
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning opening (314), and the second winning opening ( 315) is difficult to enter,
The detection means (318), in which the game balls that have been launched into the left region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) are difficult to enter the first winning opening (314). It is easy to enter the third winning opening (315) when it is detected that a game ball passes through the second passage (352) by
The fifth gaming state is
This is triggered by the fact that the game ball launched into the right region is difficult to enter the first winning port (314) and the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball passes through the specific region. The gaming machine according to appendix C30, wherein the game is easy to enter the second winning opening (315).

[Appendix C32]
The third gaming state and the fourth gaming state are characterized in that it is difficult for a game ball launched into the right region to enter the first winning port (314) and the second winning port (315). A gaming machine according to appendix C31.

[Appendix C33]
The fifth gaming state is
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) enter the first winning port (314) and the second winning port (315). Difficult to do,
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) are difficult to win in the first winning port (314), and are detected by the detection means (318). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C31 or Supplementary C32, wherein it is easy to enter the second winning opening (315) when it is detected that a game ball passes through the second passage (352) .

  In the gaming machines according to appendix C31 to appendix C33, three game states with different expected values of the entrance ratios of the first winning port and the second winning port are realized by adopting the sorting device together with the movable accessory member. The Therefore, the third game state and the fourth game state in which a game ball is launched in the left region and the game is advanced using the distribution device, and the game is performed without using the distribution device by launching the game ball in the right region. The progressing fifth gaming state can be realized. Thereby, it is possible to give a wide range of games, and at the same time, it is possible to improve game play and to enhance the interest of the game ball.

[Appendix C34]
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C ′) and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) are compared with the third gaming state (mode A) in the first special determination and the first gaming state. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C30 to appendix C33, wherein in the special determination, there is a high probability that the transition to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state) is determined.

[Appendix C35]
A first special symbol display unit for executing a first special symbol game for displaying the result of the first special determination triggered by the game ball entering the first winning port (314) by a first special symbol ( 371),
A second special symbol display section for executing a second special symbol game for displaying the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second winning port (315) as a second special symbol ( 372),
Further comprising
The gaming state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, after the first special symbol game based on the first special determination or the second special determination, Transition to special gaming state,
The special in the special game state is provided on the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the game ball entering the first winning port (314) is to shift to the special game state. After the game is over, the state is shifted to the fourth game state (mode C, mode C ′),
The special in the special game state is provided on the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second winning port (315) is to shift to the special game state. The gaming machine according to appendix C34, wherein after the game is over, the game state is shifted to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′).

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note C34 and Supplementary Note C35, for example, there is a gameability with a barrier until a transition to a special gaming state to which a large amount of gaming value is given, and a gaming property having a plurality of probability variation continuity rates. It is possible to provide gaming machines having various gaming characteristics.

[Appendix C36]
As a result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment,
A first determination result (probability big hit) that is shifted to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) after the end of the special game in the special gaming state;
A second determination result (usually a big jackpot) that is shifted to a gaming state other than the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) after the end of the special game in the special gaming state;
The gaming machine according to appendix C35, characterized by including:

[Appendix C37]
The gaming state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the fourth game after the end of the special game triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination Compared to the state (mode C, mode C ′) and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′), it is determined to shift to the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination. Transition to the sixth gaming state (mode B, mode D) with a low probability,
When the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game has reached the upper limit in the sixth gaming state (mode B, mode D), transition to the first gaming state (mode A) The gaming machine according to appendix C36, characterized by:

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C36 and appendix C37, as a result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment, the first judgment result to be shifted to the fifth gaming state after the end of the special game, and the fifth after the end of the special game. And a second determination result that is shifted to a gaming state other than the gaming state. In addition, the fourth gaming state and the fifth gaming state have a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination than the third gaming state. And it has three game states of the 3rd to 5th game state from which the expected value of the winning ratio of a 1st winning opening and a 2nd winning opening differs, and it is triggered by the entering of a game ball to the 1st winning opening On the condition that the result of the first special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, the transition to the fourth gaming state after the end of the special game, triggered by the game ball entering the second winning opening On the condition that the result of the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, the game state is shifted to the fifth game state after the special game ends. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the first to third gaming states can be applied to a probability changing machine including a so-called loop probability changing machine. Then, according to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note C36 and Supplementary Note C37, the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player shifts stepwise through the fourth gaming state. That is, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player, first, the game state is shifted to the fourth gaming state, and in the fourth gaming state, the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening in the special game determination. The result of the 2 special determination needs to be the first determination result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player step by step.

[Appendix C38]
The gaming state transition means (41) is triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination when the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result. The gaming machine according to appendix C37, wherein after transitioning to a special game, the first gaming state (mode A) is entered.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C38, when the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the game state shifts to the third game state after the special game ends, so the fourth game state and the fifth game The percentage of staying in the state is low. On the other hand, in the fourth game state and the fifth game state, not only can the game ball be expected to enter the second prize opening by the support of the movable accessory member, but also the special game state in the first special determination or the second special determination. This is a mode with a high probability of being determined to shift to. Therefore, the ratio of staying in the 4th gaming state and the 5th gaming state is low, so that it has a gameability that is easy to fall into the 3rd gaming state, but there is a sharpness to the transition of the gaming state, and the gaming value that the player can obtain Can also provide a sharp gaming machine.

[Appendix C39]
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the first special determination or the second special determination Transition number setting means for setting a transition upper limit number to be shifted to the special gaming state as the first transition to the special gaming state based on;
The gaming state transition means (41) shifts to the third gaming state (mode A) after the transition gaming upper limit number of the special gaming state set by the transition number setting means (41) is completed. A gaming machine according to appendix C35.

  The gaming machine according to appendix C39 has three gaming states of third to fifth gaming states with different expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning port and the second winning port, and up to the transition upper limit number. The transition to the special gaming state from will continue. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states can be applied to a so-called limit machine. Then, on the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening is to shift to the special game state, the game state is shifted to the fourth game state after the special game is over. The game state is shifted to the fifth game state after the special game is completed on the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second prize opening is to shift to the special game state. . That is, the transition destination of the gaming state after the special game differs depending on whether the ball enters the first winning port or the ball enters the second winning port. Therefore, in the opportunity to transition to the remaining special gaming state after the first hit, the gameability of how to transition to the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player while leaving the opportunity to transition to the special gaming state remains A gaming machine having the same can be provided.

[Appendix C40]
The gaming state transition means (41) has an upper limit on the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game in the fourth gaming state (mode C ′) or the fifth gaming state (mode E ′). The gaming machine according to appendix C35, wherein when the value reaches the third gaming state (mode A), the gaming machine is shifted to the third gaming state (mode A).

[Appendix C41]
A special variable pitching device (82) having a special pitching portion (824) opened in the special game;
The gaming state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the third gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the special game in the special gaming state On the condition that the game ball enters the entrance part, after the end of the special game, transition to the fourth game state (mode C ′),
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the fourth gaming state (mode C ′) is to shift to the special gaming state, the special game in the special gaming state The gaming machine according to appendix C40, wherein a transition is made to the fifth gaming state (mode E ′) after the end of the special game on the condition that the game ball enters the special pitching part (824) .

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes C40 and C41, when the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the fourth gaming state or the fifth gaming state, the game machine is shifted to the first gaming state. The That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states can be applied to ST machines including so-called V-ST machines. Further, in the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note C40 and Supplementary Note C41, it is necessary to go through the fourth gaming state in order to shift to the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player. That is, in order to shift to the fifth gaming state, after the transition to the fourth gaming state, the second special symbol game is performed until the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit. The result of the special determination needs to shift to the special gaming state. Therefore, after the transition from the third gaming state to the fourth gaming state, the determination result of how quickly the second special symbol game is shifted to the special gaming state is obtained, and the transition to the fifth gaming state that is most advantageous to the player is performed. Judgment of whether to shift to the fifth gaming state, and how many special gaming states to transition to the upper limit of the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game after the transition to the fifth gaming state It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a game characteristic of whether to obtain a result.

[Appendix C42]
A first special symbol display unit for executing a first special symbol game for displaying the result of the first special determination triggered by the game ball entering the first winning port (314) by a first special symbol ( 371),
A second special symbol display section for executing a second special symbol game for displaying the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second winning port (315) as a second special symbol ( 372),
When the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second winning port (315) is a specific result (small hit) different from that for shifting to the special game state It is possible to enter a game ball by being actuated, and the special entry to which the game state transition means (41) grants the right to enter the special game state (two types of big hits) by entering the game ball. A feather accessory device (83) having a ball portion (833);
Further comprising
The gaming state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is that which shifts to the special gaming state (1 type big hit), the transition to the special gaming state is triggered,
On the condition that the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, the fourth game state (mode C) after the special game in the special game state ends. To
After the operation of the wing accessory device (83) is completed based on the right to transition to the special gaming state (two types of big hits) granted when a game ball enters the special ball entry unit (833). Transition to the special gaming state,
Shifting to the fifth gaming state (mode E) after completion of the special game in the special gaming state that is shifted in response to the entry of the gaming ball into the special pitching portion (833) A gaming machine according to appendix C31.

[Appendix C43]
When the total number of games of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the fourth gaming state or the fifth gaming state, the gaming state transition means (41) The gaming machine according to appendix C42, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to a third gaming state.

  In the gaming machines according to appendix C42 and appendix C43, the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is to shift to the special gaming state (1 type big hit), or the game ball enters the special pitching part As a result, the right to transition to the special gaming state is granted (two types of big hits), so that the transition to the special gaming state is made. That is, the gaming machine having three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states can be applied to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixing machine.

[Appendix C44]
The detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), or the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. With this as a trigger, a normal determination means (41) for performing a normal determination as to whether or not to move the movable accessory member (36) between the first position (standby position) and the second position (actuation position). )
The fourth game state (mode C, mode C ′) and the fifth game state (mode E, mode E ′) are determined by the normal determination means (41) compared to the third game state (mode A). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C27 to appendix C43, wherein the probability that it is determined that the movable accessory member (36) is operated in the normal determination is high.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C44, the probability of determining that the movable accessory member is to be operated in the normal determination by the normal determination means is different in the fourth game state, the fifth game state, and the third game state. Thereby, three game states of the 3rd to 5th game state from which the expected value of the winning ratio of a 1st prize opening and a 2nd prize opening differs can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix C45]
In the fourth game state (mode C, mode C ′), it is determined that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352) by the detection means (318), compared to the third game state (mode A). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C27 to appendix C44, characterized in that a period of time from the detection until the operation of the movable accessory member (36) is started is short.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C45, in the fourth gaming state, the operation of the movable accessory member is started after the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage compared to the third gaming state. The time to complete is short. Thereby, three game states of the 3rd to 5th game state from which the expected value of the winning ratio of a 1st prize opening and a 2nd prize opening differ can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix C46]
The fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) is more movable than the third gaming state (mode A) and the fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C ′). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C27 to appendix C45, characterized in that the operating time of

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C46, the operating time of the movable accessory member is longer in the fifth gaming state than in the second gaming state and the third gaming state. Thereby, three game states of the 3rd to 5th game state from which the expected value of the winning ratio of a 1st prize opening and a 3rd prize opening differ can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix C47]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C1 to appendix C46, wherein the distribution unit (38) is fixed at a position where a game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) interferes.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C47, the sorting unit of the sorting device is fixed at a position where the game ball introduced from the introduction port interferes. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency of distribution between the first passage and the second passage by the distribution unit (individual difference between gaming machines). Thereby, the player can find out the launch position of the game ball that can be easily distributed to the second passage by adjusting the launch position of the game ball and performing trial and error. Enjoying exploration of game ball launch positions where game balls can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island facilities of the game hall, the game balls are swung to the second passage from those game machines. It becomes possible to enjoy the search for a game machine that is easy to understand.

[Appendix C48]
The gaming machine according to appendix C47, wherein the distribution unit (38D, 38F) includes a fixed unit (381D, 389F) that is immovable and cannot rotate.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix C48, it is determined by an accidental element such as a collision position of the game ball with respect to the fixed portion. Therefore, game balls are randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by accidental elements, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix C49]
One end of the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is fixed, and at least a portion of the portion other than the one end can be plastically deformed.

[Appendix C50]
The game machine according to appendix C49, wherein the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix C51]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix C48 to appendix C50, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is a nail.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C49 to appendix C51, since at least a part of the fixed portion of the allocating portion can be plastically changed, the fixed portion is set to the initial position when the position of the fixed portion deviates from the initial set value. It becomes possible to return. Thereby, it is possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio with time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix C52]
The distribution part (38F) has a plurality of nails,
In the front view, the plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with a single nail at the top and symmetrically about a vertical line passing through the single nail. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note C52, by adjusting the top nail, it is possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix C53]
The distribution part (38E) has a rotating body (382D) fixed rotatably by the fixing part (381D),
The rotating body (382D) is in a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and the game is directed toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C48 to C52, wherein the gaming machine is rotatable in a second direction in which the ball is moved.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix C53, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it becomes possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the game balls to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix C54]
The gaming machine according to Appendix C53, wherein the rotating body (382D) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix C55]
The allocating portion (38C) is in a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to appendix C54, wherein the gaming machine is a roller fixed so as to be freely rotatable in the second direction for moving the game ball.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note C54 and Supplementary Note C55, a rotating body such as a roller that can freely rotate is adopted as a distribution unit, and even with this rotational body, incidental elements such as a collision position of a game ball with respect to the rotational body. Determined by. Therefore, game balls are randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by accidental elements, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix D1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). A distribution device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by:
A first winning opening (314) through which game balls distributed to the first passage (351) can enter;
A second winning port (313 ′) having a function different from that of the first winning port (314), wherein the game balls distributed to the second passage (352) can enter.
A game ball distributed to the second passage (352) can be entered, and a third winning port (315) having a function different from that of the first winning port (314) and the second winning port (313 '). When,
Detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), the second winning port (313) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is provided. ') And the third passage (352) from the first position where the entry into one of the third prize openings (315) is restricted and the entry into the other prize opening is allowed. ) That moves through the second winning position is allowed to enter the one winning opening (313 ′) and is restricted from entering the other winning opening (315). A member (36);
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to appendix D1, when the game balls are distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, Depending on the presence / absence of operation, the entry of the game ball into the third prize opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, when the game balls distributed to the second passage are in the first position where the movable accessory member is not operated, the entry of the game balls into the third winning opening is restricted, When the movable accessory member is in the second position where the movable accessory member is operated, the game ball is allowed to enter the third prize opening. In this manner, the ratio of entering the ball into the third winning opening can be varied by the cooperation of the sorting device and the movable accessory member. Thereby, in the gaming machine in which the game balls distributed by the distribution device can enter any of the three winning holes having different functions, the monotony of the game is reduced and the operation mode of the movable accessory member is controlled. New games can be realized, and the fun of games can be improved.

[Appendix D2]
The movable accessory member (36) is characterized in that the operation time when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied is longer than the operation time when the first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine according to D1.

[Appendix D3]
It further comprises other detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
Playing the game ball in the left region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball in the right region so that the other detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball in the game. The detection means (the first game state advantageous to the player as compared to the case of launching the ball, and the detection means ( The game state is shifted between a plurality of game states including a second game state that is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the game ball is launched into the left region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by 318) The game state transition means (41) is further provided,
The first condition is that the first gaming state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix D2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note D2 and Supplementary Note D3, it is easy to enter the game ball into the third winning opening by the movable accessory member when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. Are different. For example, the operation time of the movable accessory member varies depending on the game state (an advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, it is determined according to the moving path of the game ball that, for example, it is difficult for the game ball launched into the right area to enter the third winning opening, assuming that the movable accessory member is operated. It becomes possible to set the ease of playing the game ball to the third prize opening. This makes it a disadvantage to the player when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), thus promoting left-handed in situations where left-handed is encouraged It becomes possible to do.

[Appendix D4]
The third winning opening (315) is determined by the detecting means (318) according to the time required for the game ball detected by the other detecting means (319) to enter the third winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix D3, characterized in that the gaming ball to be detected is arranged at a position longer than a time required to enter the third winning opening (315).

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix D4, the time required for the game ball detected by the detection means to enter the third prize opening and the game ball detected by the other detection means enter the third prize opening. The time required to ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched into the left area of the game board can enter the third prize opening, while a game ball launched into the right area makes it difficult to enter the third prize opening. Is possible. This makes it a disadvantage to the player when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), thus promoting left-handed in situations where left-handed is encouraged It becomes possible to do.

[Appendix D5]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C) is that the game ball detected by the detecting means (318) is detected by the third winning award (315 ), And it is a time for limiting the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) from entering the third winning port (315). The gaming machine according to appendix D3 or appendix D4.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D5, it is possible to appropriately restrict the game ball from entering the third winning opening when the player makes a right turn in the first gaming state where left-handed is encouraged. Therefore, when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It becomes possible.

[Appendix D6]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the second gaming state (mode E) is that the gaming ball detected by the other detecting means (319) is the third winning award (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix D3 to appendix D5, characterized in that it is time allowed to enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note D6, it is possible to make a game ball enter the third winning opening by making a right turn in the second gaming state. Therefore, by making a right turn in the second gaming state, it is possible to advance the game with almost no increase or decrease in the number of game balls.

[Appendix D8]
The movable accessory member (36)
An opening / closing portion that places the second winning opening (313 ') in the open state at the first position (standby position) and places the second winning opening (313') in the closed state at the second position (actuation position). (362),
Limiting the movement of the game ball on the right side of the second winning opening (313 ′) toward the opening / closing part (362) in the first position (standby position), which is continuous with the opening / closing part (362), A guide portion (363) that allows movement of the game ball on the right side of the second winning opening (313 ′) toward the opening / closing portion (362) in a second position (operation position);
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note D1 to Supplementary Note D7, characterized by comprising:

[Appendix D9]
The opening / closing part (362)
In the first position (standby position), the game balls that have passed through the second passage (352) are allowed to enter the second winning opening (313 ′) and enter the third winning opening (315). Limit entry,
In the second position (actuation position), the game balls that have passed through the second passage (352) are restricted from entering the second winning opening (313 ′), and the third winning opening (315) is restricted. Allow entry,
The guide portion is
In the first position (standby position), the movement of the game ball launched into the right area of the game board (31) toward the opening / closing part (362) is limited,
The gaming machine according to appendix D8, wherein in the second position (operating position), a movement of a game ball launched into the right region of the game board (31) toward the opening / closing part (362) is allowed. .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D8 and Supplementary Note D9, a movable accessory member having an opening / closing part capable of opening / closing the second winning opening and a guide part for moving a game ball on the right side of the second winning opening toward the opening / closing part. With a simple configuration of providing a game ball, it is possible to win a game ball from a plurality of paths to the second winning opening with a single movable accessory member. Thereby, in the gaming machine adopting the distribution device, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine that reduces the monotony of the game and has new gaming characteristics according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix D10]
It further comprises other detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36)
When the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319), it is moved from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation position),
When in the second position, the game ball passing through the second passage (352) and the game ball passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the third winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note D1 to Supplementary Note D9, wherein:

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment D10, not only the game balls passing through the second passage of the sorting apparatus but also the game balls launched into the right area of the game board enter the third prize opening by the movable accessory member. Can be made. Therefore, it becomes possible to allow a game ball to enter the third prize opening from a plurality of routes by one movable accessory member. Thereby, an amusing gaming machine having new gaming properties can be provided.

[Appendix D11]
The supplementary note further comprising a retraction guiding portion (393, 394) provided on the upper side of the movable accessory member (36) and guiding the game ball in a direction away from the third winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of D1 to appendix D10.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix D11, a retraction guiding unit that guides the game ball in a direction away from the third prize opening is provided above the movable accessory member. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D11, for example, in the gaming state where the operating time of the movable role member is short and it is encouraged to launch the gaming machine in the left area of the game board, the third prize opening in the movable role member Since it is possible to receive the game ball at a position away from, it is possible to ensure a long time until the game ball reaches the third winning opening. As a result, the game ball received by the movable accessory member can be prevented from reaching the third prize opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position. When it is performed, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix D12]
The retraction guide part (393, 394) includes the plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined shape in which a nail on the side far from the third prize opening (315) is positioned lower than a nail on the side near the third prize opening (315). A gaming machine according to appendix D11.

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment D12, the game ball can be guided upstream in the moving direction of the game ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Also, in gaming machines, since a large number of nails are generally driven on the game board, a retracting guide portion can be provided when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the movable accessory member to receive support when the movable accessory member operates for a short time while suppressing the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retracting guide portion.

[Appendix D13]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the third prize opening (315) at the second position. The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix D1 to appendix D12, further comprising a delay unit (364) for delaying.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix D13, a delay portion is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the game ball to the third winning opening. Therefore, for example, even when the player receives a game ball on the movable accessory member in a gaming state where the operation time of the movable combination member is short and left-handed is encouraged, It is possible to secure a long time to reach the third prize opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the third prize opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the first position. When this is done, it is difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix D14]
The delay machine (364, 364A to 364C) moves the game ball along a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36, 36A to 36C), according to appendix D13,

[Appendix D15]
The delay portion (364D to 364H) includes one or more linear convex portions (364D to 364G) or linear concave portions (in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36D to 36H) or linear concave portion ( 364H), the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D13 or Supplementary D14.

[Appendix D16]
The delay portion (364I to 364P) is a plurality of discretely arranged convex portions (364I to 364N) or a plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P), according to any one of supplementary notes D13 to D15 The gaming machine described.

[Appendix D17]
The gaming machine according to appendix D16, wherein the plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or the plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) are arranged in a lattice pattern.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note D14 to Supplementary Note D17, the movement of the game ball on the movable accessory member can be delayed by the delay unit having a simple configuration. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally formed in the movable accessory member by resin molding. Thereby, the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion can be suppressed.

[Appendix D18]
From the appendix D13, the delay portion (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting a moving direction of the game ball on the movable accessory member (36Q). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix D17.

[Appendix D19]
The gaming machine according to appendix D18, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a reverse direction opposite to a moving direction of the game ball.

[Appendix D20]
The gaming machine according to appendix D18 or appendix D19, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) cause a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force to act on the game ball.

  According to the gaming machines according to appendix D18 to appendix D20, since the movable accessory member is provided with a roller, not only the design of the gaming machine is improved, but also the behavior of the game ball moving the movable accessory member Because it becomes easier to focus on the game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix D21]
A game state transition means (41) for shifting the game state by establishment of a predetermined state among a plurality of game states;
The gaming state transition means (41) includes a third gaming state (mode A), a fourth gaming state (mode C, a mode C ′), and different expected values of the ratio of entering the third winning award port (315). The gaming machine according to appendix D1, including a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′).

  The gaming machine according to supplementary note D21 has three gaming states of third to fifth gaming states that differ in the expected value of the winning ratio with respect to the third winning opening. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D21, it is possible to create a new gaming property with improved gaming properties based on three gaming states with different expected values of the rate of entering the third winning opening. become.

[Appendix D22]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left area is likely to enter the first prize opening (314) and the second prize opening (313 ′), and difficult to enter the third prize opening (315).
The game ball launched into the right area is difficult to enter any of the first prize opening (314), the second prize opening (313 ') and the third prize opening (315),
The fourth gaming state is
The game balls launched in the left area are compared with the game balls launched in the right area in the first prize opening (314), the second prize opening (313 '), and the third prize opening (315). It is easy to enter any of them,
The fifth gaming state is
The game balls launched into the right area are less likely to enter the first prize opening (314) and the second prize opening (313 '), and the third game balls are compared with the game balls launched into the left area. The gaming machine according to appendix D21, wherein the game is easily entered into the winning opening (315).

  In the gaming machine according to attachment D22, in each of the third to fifth gaming states, the ease of entering the first winning port, the second winning port, and the third winning port is determined by the launch area of the game ball with respect to the game board. Different. Thereby, the three gaming states of the third to fifth gaming states having different expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning port and the second winning port and the third winning port can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix D23]
It further comprises other detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position to the second position when the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. ,
In the third game state and the fourth game state, it is more likely that the other detection means (319) launches the game ball in the left region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball. It is advantageous to the player compared to the case where a game ball is launched in the right area so that the passage of
In the fifth gaming state, the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball when the game ball is launched into the right region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). Thus, the gaming machine according to appendix D22, which is more advantageous to a player than a case where a game ball is launched into the left region.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D23, it is possible to enter the game ball into the third prize opening by actuating the movable accessory member when the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means or other detection means To. Each of the third to fifth gaming states has a launch area that is advantageous to the player by utilizing the presence or absence of the operation of the movable accessory member. That is, three game states of the third to fifth game states having different expected values of the rate of entering the third winning a prize can be realized by a simple method using the movable accessory member.

[Appendix D24]
The first winning port (314L) and the second starting port (314R) are shifted to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed by entering a game ball. Giving the opportunity to make the first special decision (big win lottery)
A second special determination as to whether or not the third winning port (315) is shifted to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed by entering a game ball. Give the opportunity to do a (hit lottery)
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix D23, wherein the second special determination has a higher expectation level for obtaining a determination result for shifting to the second special game than the first special determination.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note D24, the expectation (function) to be shifted to the second special game advantageous to the player by entering the gaming machine into the first starting port and entering the gaming ball into the third starting port Is different. Therefore, it is possible to realize three gaming states with different expectations for shifting to the second special game by making the expected value of the winning ratio of the first winning opening and the third starting opening different. Thereby, game nature is improved and the interest of a game ball is improved.

[Appendix D25]
The gaming machine according to appendix D24, wherein the second start opening (313 ') is a general winning opening.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D25, the frequency at which the second start opening is a general winning opening, so that a special determination (first special determination and second special determination) can be received in the third to fifth gaming states. Different. Thereby, since a special determination can be received at a frequency according to the gaming state, the game becomes diversified, so that the gameability is enhanced and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix D26]
The third gaming state is
The game balls that have been launched into the left region and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning port (314), and the second start port (313) ') And the third winning entrance (315) is difficult to enter,
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) enter the first winning port (314) and the third winning port (315). It is difficult to enter the second winning opening (313 ′),
The fourth gaming state is
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning opening (314), and the second winning opening ( 313 ′) and the third winning opening (315) are difficult to enter,
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) enter the first winning opening (314) and the second winning opening (313 '). It is difficult to make a ball, and it is easy to enter the third winning opening (315) when the detection means (318) detects that the game ball passes through the second passage (352),
The fifth gaming state is
The game balls launched into the right area are unlikely to enter the first prize opening (314) and the second prize opening (313 ′), and the other detection means (319) causes the game balls to enter the specific area. The gaming machine according to appendix D25, characterized in that it is easy to enter the third prize opening (315) when it is detected to pass.

[Appendix D27]
In the third game state and the fourth game state, the game balls launched into the right area are the first winning port (314), the second winning port (313 ') and the third winning port (315). The gaming machine according to appendix D26, which is difficult to enter any of the above.

[Appendix D28]
The fifth gaming state is
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning opening (314), and the second winning opening ( 313 ′) and the third winning opening (315) are difficult to enter,
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) are awarded to the first winning port (314) and the second winning port (313 '). In this case, it is easy to enter the third winning opening (315) when the detection means (318) detects that the game ball passes through the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to appendix D26 or appendix D27.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note D26 to Supplementary Note D28, three game states with different expected values of the winning ratio with respect to the third winning opening are realized by employing the sorting device together with the movable accessory member. Therefore, the third game state and the fourth game state in which a game ball is launched in the left region and the game is advanced using the distribution device, and the game is performed without using the distribution device by launching the game ball in the right region. The progressing fifth gaming state can be realized. Thereby, it is possible to give a wide range of games, and at the same time, it is possible to improve game play and to enhance the interest of the game ball.

[Appendix D29]
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C ′) and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) are compared with the third gaming state (mode A) in the first special determination and the first gaming state. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix D24 to appendix D28, wherein in the special determination, there is a high probability that the transition is made to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state).

[Appendix D30]
A first special symbol game in which the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning port (314) and the second starting port (313 ') is displayed as a first special symbol. A first special symbol display unit (371) for executing
A second special symbol display unit for executing a second special symbol game for displaying the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the third prize opening (315) by a second special symbol ( 372),
Further comprising
The gaming state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, after the first special symbol game based on the first special determination or the second special determination, Transition to special gaming state,
The condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first winning port (314) and the second winning port (313 ') is to shift to the special gaming state. To the fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C ′) after completion of the special game in the special gaming state,
The special in the special gaming state, provided that the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the third winning port (315) is to shift to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to appendix D29, wherein the game state is shifted to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) after the game ends.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note D29 and Supplementary Note D30, for example, there is a gameability that has a barrier until it shifts to a special gaming state to which a large amount of gaming value is given, and a gaming property that has a plurality of probability variation continuity rates substantially. It is possible to provide gaming machines having various gaming characteristics.

[Appendix D31]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix D1 to appendix D30, wherein the distribution unit (38) is fixed at a position where a game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) interferes.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment D31, the sorting unit of the sorting device is fixed at a position where the game ball introduced from the introduction port interferes. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency of distribution between the first passage and the second passage by the distribution unit (individual difference between gaming machines). Thereby, the player can find out the launch position of the game ball that can be easily distributed to the second passage by adjusting the launch position of the game ball and performing trial and error. Enjoying exploration of game ball launch positions where game balls can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island facilities of the game hall, the game balls are swung to the second passage from those game machines. It becomes possible to enjoy the search for a game machine that is easy to understand.

[Appendix D32]
The gaming machine according to appendix D31, wherein the distribution unit (38D, 38F) includes a stationary unit (381D, 389F) that is immovable and cannot rotate.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D32, it is determined by an accidental element such as a collision position of the game ball against the fixed portion. Therefore, game balls are randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by accidental elements, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix D33]
One end of the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is fixed, and at least a part of the portion other than the one end is plastically deformable, and the gaming machine according to appendix D32,

[Appendix D34]
The game machine according to appendix D33, wherein the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix D35]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix D32 to appendix D34, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is a nail.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note D33 to Supplementary Note D35, since at least a part of the fixed part of the allocating part can be plastically changed, the fixed part is set to the initial position when the position of the fixed part deviates from the initial set value. It becomes possible to return. Thereby, it is possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio with time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix D36]
The distribution part (38F) has a plurality of nails,
In the front view, the plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with a single nail at the top and symmetrically about a vertical line passing through the single nail. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment D36, by adjusting the top nail, it is possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix D37]
The distribution part (38E) has a rotating body (382D) fixed rotatably by the fixing part (381D),
The rotating body (382D) is in a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and the game is directed toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D32 to D36, wherein the gaming machine is rotatable in a second direction in which the ball is moved.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment D37, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it becomes possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the game balls to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix D38]
The gaming machine according to appendix D37, wherein the rotating body (382D) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix D39]
The allocating portion (38C) is in a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to appendix D38, wherein the gaming machine is a roller fixed so as to be freely rotatable in the second direction for moving the game ball.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note D38 and Supplementary Note D39, a rotating body such as a roller that can freely rotate is adopted as the allocating unit, and even with this rotational body, incidental elements such as a collision position of a game ball against the rotational body Determined by. Therefore, game balls are randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by accidental elements, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix E1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). A distribution device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by:
A plurality of winning ports including a first winning port (314) and a second winning port (315) having a function different from that of the first winning port (314);
A discharge port (317) for discharging game balls that have not entered the plurality of winning ports;
Detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening (315) is restricted. A movable accessory member (36) operable from a first position (standby position) to a second position (operating position) where a game ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening (314);
With
The first winning opening (314) can receive the game balls distributed to the first passage (351),
The game ball that has passed through the second passage (352)
When the movable accessory member (36) is in the first position (standby position), the entry to the second winning opening (315) is restricted and discharged from the discharge opening (317),
A gaming machine characterized in that when the movable accessory member (36) is in the second position (operating position), a ball can be entered into the second winning opening (315).

  In the gaming machine according to appendix E1, when the game balls are distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, Depending on the presence / absence of operation, the entry of the game ball into the second prize opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game balls allocated to the second passage are restricted from entering the game balls into the second winning opening when the movable accessory member is at the first position where the movable accessory member is not operated. When the movable accessory member is in the second position where the movable accessory member is operated, the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening. In this manner, the ratio of entering the ball into the second winning opening can be varied by the cooperation of the sorting device and the movable accessory member. Thereby, in the gaming machine in which the game balls distributed to the second passage can be discharged to the discharge port, the monotony of the game is reduced, and a new game property is realized according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Appendix E2]
The movable accessory member (36) is characterized in that the operation time when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied is longer than the operation time when the first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine according to E1.

[Appendix E3]
It further comprises other detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
Playing the game ball in the left region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball in the right region so that the other detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball in the game. The detection means (the first game state advantageous to the player as compared to the case of launching the ball, and the detection means ( The game state is shifted between a plurality of game states including a second game state that is advantageous to the player as compared to the case where the game ball is launched into the left region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by 318) The game state transition means (41) is further provided,
The first condition is that the first gaming state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix E2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note E2 and Supplementary Note E3, it is easy to enter the game ball into the third winning opening by the movable accessory member when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. Are different. For example, the operation time of the movable accessory member varies depending on the game state (an advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, it is determined according to the moving path of the game ball that, for example, it is difficult for the game ball launched into the right area to enter the third winning opening, assuming that the movable accessory member is operated. It becomes possible to set the ease of playing the game ball to the third prize opening. This makes it a disadvantage to the player when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), thus promoting left-handed in situations where left-handed is encouraged It becomes possible to do.

[Appendix E4]
The second winning opening (315) is determined by the detecting means (318) according to the time required for the game ball detected by the other detecting means (319) to enter the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix E3, characterized in that the gaming ball to be detected is arranged at a position longer than a time required for entering the second winning opening (315).

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix E4, the time required for the game ball detected by the detection means to enter the second winning opening and the game ball detected by the other detection means enter the second winning opening. The time required to ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched into the left area of the game board can enter the second prize opening, while a game ball launched into the right area makes it difficult to enter the second prize opening. Is possible. This makes it a disadvantage to the player when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), thus promoting left-handed in situations where left-handed is encouraged It becomes possible to do.

[Appendix E5]
In the first gaming state (mode A, mode C), the operating time of the movable accessory member (36) is that the gaming ball detected by the detecting means (318) is the second winning port (315). ), And it is time to limit the game balls detected by the other detection means (319) from entering the second winning port (315). The gaming machine according to appendix E3 or appendix E4.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E5, it is possible to appropriately restrict the game ball from entering the second winning opening when the right game is performed in the first game state where the left game is encouraged. Therefore, when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It becomes possible.

[Appendix E6]
In the second gaming state (mode E), the operating time of the movable accessory member (36) is that the game ball detected by the other detection means (319) is the second prize opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E3 to appendix E5, characterized in that it is time allowed to enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E6, it is possible to make a game ball enter the second winning opening by making a right turn in the second gaming state. Therefore, by making a right turn in the second gaming state, it is possible to advance the game with almost no increase or decrease in the number of game balls.

[Appendix E7]
It further comprises other detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36)
When the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means (318) or the other detection means (319), it is moved from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operation position),
When in the second position, the game ball passing through the second passage (352) and the game ball passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the third winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E1 to appendix E6, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix E7, not only the game balls passing through the second passage of the sorting apparatus but also the game balls launched into the right area of the game board enter the third prize opening by the movable accessory member. Can be made. Therefore, it becomes possible to allow a game ball to enter the third prize opening from a plurality of routes by one movable accessory member. Thereby, an amusing gaming machine having new gaming properties can be provided.

[Appendix E8]
The supplementary note further comprising a retraction guide portion (393, 394) provided on an upper side of the movable accessory member (36) and guiding the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to Appendix E7.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix E8, a retraction guiding unit that guides the game ball in a direction away from the second winning opening is provided above the movable accessory member. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to supplementary note E8, for example, in a gaming state in which the operating time of the movable role member is short and it is encouraged to launch the gaming machine in the left area of the game board, the second prize opening in the movable role member Since it is possible to receive the game ball at a position away from, it is possible to secure a long time until the game ball reaches the second winning opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the second winning opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position. When it is performed, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix E9]
The retraction guide part (393, 394) includes the plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined shape in which a nail on the side far from the second prize opening (315) is positioned lower than a nail on the side near the second prize opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix E8.

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix E9, the game ball can be guided upstream in the moving direction of the game ball with a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Also, in gaming machines, since a large number of nails are generally driven on the game board, a retracting guide portion can be provided when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the movable accessory member to receive support when the movable accessory member operates for a short time while suppressing the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retracting guide portion.

[Appendix E10]
The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball toward the second prize opening (315) at the second position. The movable accessory member (36) moves the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E1 to appendix E9, including a delay unit (364) for delaying.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix E10, a delay portion is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the game ball to the second winning opening. Therefore, for example, even when the player receives a game ball on the movable accessory member in a gaming state where the operation time of the movable combination member is short and left-handed is encouraged, It is possible to secure a long time until it reaches the second prize opening. As a result, the game ball received by the movable accessory member can be prevented from reaching the second prize opening in a short time from the start of operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the first position. When this is done, it is difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix E11]
The game machine according to appendix E10, wherein the delay unit (364, 364A to 364C) moves a game ball along a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36, 36A to 36C).

[Appendix E12]
The delay portion (364D to 364H) includes one or more linear convex portions (364D to 364G) or linear concave portions (in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36D to 36H) or linear concave portion ( 364H), the gaming machine according to appendix E10 or appendix E11.

[Appendix E13]
The delay part (364I to 364P) is a plurality of discretely arranged convex parts (364I to 364N) or a plurality of concave parts (364O, 364P), according to any one of supplementary notes E10 to E12 The gaming machine described.

[Appendix E14]
The gaming machine according to appendix E13, wherein the plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or the plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) are arranged in a lattice pattern.

  According to the gaming machines according to appendix E11 to appendix E14, the movement of the game ball on the movable accessory member can be delayed by the delay unit having a simple configuration. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally formed in the movable accessory member by resin molding. Thereby, the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion can be suppressed.

[Appendix E15]
From the supplementary note E10, the delay unit (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting a moving direction of the game ball on the movable accessory member (36Q). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E14.

[Appendix E16]
The gaming machine according to appendix E15, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a direction opposite to a moving direction of the game ball.

[Appendix E17]
The gaming machine according to appendix E15 or appendix E16, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) cause a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force to act on the game ball.

  According to the gaming machines according to appendix E15 to appendix E17, since the movable accessory member is provided with a roller, not only the design of the gaming machine is improved, but also the behavior of the game ball moving the movable accessory member Because it becomes easier to focus on the game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix E18]
A game state transition means (41) for shifting the game state by establishment of a predetermined state among a plurality of game states;
The gaming state transition means (41) includes a third gaming state (mode A), a fourth gaming state (mode C, a mode C ′), and different expected values of the winning ratio to the second winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to appendix E1, including a fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′).

  The gaming machine according to appendix E18 has three gaming states of third to fifth gaming states that differ in the expected value of the winning ratio with respect to the second winning opening. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E18, it is possible to create a new gaming property with improved gaming properties based on three gaming states with different expected values of the rate of entering the second winning opening. become.

[Appendix E19]
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left area is easy to enter the first winning opening (314) and difficult to enter the second winning opening (315).
The game ball launched into the right area is difficult to enter either the first winning port (314) or the second winning port (315),
The fourth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the left area is easier to enter the first prize opening (314) and the second prize opening (315) than the game ball launched into the right area,
The fifth gaming state is
The game ball launched into the right area is less likely to enter the first prize opening (314) and is easier to enter the second prize opening (315) than the game ball launched into the left area. The gaming machine described in appendix E18, which is characterized in that.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment E19, in each of the third to fifth gaming states, the ease of entering the first prize opening and the second prize opening differs depending on the launch area of the game ball with respect to the game board. Thereby, three game states of the 3rd to 5th game state from which the expected value of the winning ratio of a 1st prize opening and a 2nd prize opening differs can be realized by a simple method.

[Appendix E20]
It further comprises other detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31),
The movable accessory member (36) moves from the first position to the second position when the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball has passed through the specific area. ,
In the third game state and the fourth game state, it is more likely that the other detection means (319) launches the game ball in the left region so that the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball. It is advantageous to the player compared to the case where a game ball is launched in the right area so that the passage of
In the fifth gaming state, the detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball when the game ball is launched into the right region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the other detection means (319). As described above, the gaming machine according to appendix E19 is advantageous to the player as compared with a case where a game ball is launched into the left region.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix E20, it is possible to enter the game ball into the second prize opening by operating the movable accessory member when the passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means or other detection means To. Each of the third to fifth gaming states has a launch area that is advantageous to the player by utilizing the presence or absence of the operation of the movable accessory member. That is, three game states of the third to fifth game states having different expected values of the rate of entering the second winning opening can be realized by a simple method using the movable accessory member.

[Appendix E21]
The first special determination as to whether or not the first winning port (314) is shifted to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed by entering a game ball. Give the opportunity to do a (hit lottery)
A second special determination is made as to whether or not the second winning port (315) is shifted to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed by entering a game ball. Give the opportunity to do a (hit lottery)
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix E20, wherein the second special determination has a higher expectation level for obtaining a determination result for shifting to the second special game than the first special determination.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix E21, the expectation (function) that the game machine enters the first starting port and the game ball enters the second starting port to shift to the second special game advantageous to the player Is different. Therefore, it is possible to realize three gaming states with different degrees of expectation to be transferred to the second special game by making the expected value of the winning ratio of the first winning opening and the second starting opening different. Thereby, game nature is improved and the interest of a game ball is improved. Further, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E21, since the game balls that did not win any of the plurality of winning holes are discharged from the outlet, a special determination (first special determination and The frequency at which the second special judgment can be received is different. Thereby, since a special determination can be received at a frequency according to the gaming state, the game becomes diversified, so that the gameability is enhanced and the interest of the game ball is improved.

[Appendix E22]
The third gaming state is
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning opening (314), and the second winning opening ( 315) is difficult to enter,
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) are difficult to enter the first winning port (314), and the second winning port ( 315) is easy to enter,
The fourth gaming state is
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning opening (314), and the second winning opening ( 315) is difficult to enter,
The detection means (318), in which the game balls that have been launched into the left region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) are difficult to enter the first winning opening (314). It is easy to enter the second winning opening (315) when it is detected that a game ball passes through the second passage (352) by
The fifth gaming state is
This is triggered by the fact that the game ball launched into the right region is difficult to enter the first winning port (314) and the other detection means (319) detects that the game ball passes through the specific region. The gaming machine according to appendix E21, wherein the game is easily entered into the second winning opening (315).

[Appendix E23]
In the third game state and the fourth game state, it is difficult for a game ball launched into the right area to enter either the first winning port (314) or the second winning port (315). The gaming machine described in appendix E22, which is characterized by the above.

[Appendix E24]
The fifth gaming state is
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning opening (314), and the second winning opening ( 315) is difficult to enter,
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) are difficult to win in the first winning port (314), and are detected by the detection means (318). The gaming machine according to appendix E22 or appendix E23, wherein the game is easily entered into the second winning opening (315) when it is detected that a game ball passes through the second passage (352) .

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note E22 to Supplementary Note E24, three game states with different expected values of the winning ratio of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are realized by adopting the sorting device together with the movable accessory member. The Therefore, the third game state and the fourth game state in which a game ball is launched in the left region and the game is advanced using the distribution device, and the game is performed without using the distribution device by launching the game ball in the right region. The progressing fifth gaming state can be realized. Thereby, it is possible to give a wide range of games, and at the same time, it is possible to improve game play and to enhance the interest of the game ball.

[Appendix E25]
The fourth gaming state (mode C, mode C ′) and the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) are compared with the third gaming state (mode A) in the first special determination and the first gaming state. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E20 to appendix E24, wherein in the special determination, there is a high probability that it is determined to shift to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state).

[Appendix E26]
A first special symbol display unit for executing a first special symbol game for displaying the result of the first special determination triggered by the game ball entering the first winning port (314) by a first special symbol ( 371),
A second special symbol display unit for executing a second special symbol game for displaying the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the third prize opening (315) by a second special symbol ( 372),
Further comprising
The gaming state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, after the first special symbol game based on the first special determination or the second special determination, Transition to special gaming state,
The special in the special game state is provided on the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the game ball entering the first winning port (314) is to shift to the special game state. After the game is over, the state is shifted to the fourth game state (mode C, mode C ′),
The special in the special game state is provided on the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second winning port (315) is to shift to the special game state. The gaming machine according to appendix E25, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to the fifth gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) after the game is over.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note E25 and Supplementary Note E26, for example, a game with a barrier until a transition to a special gaming state where a large amount of game value is given, a game with a plurality of substantial probability change continuations, etc. It is possible to provide gaming machines having various gaming characteristics.

[Appendix E27]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E1 to appendix E26, wherein the distribution unit (38) is fixed at a position where a game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) interferes.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix E27, the sorting unit of the sorting device is fixed at a position where the game ball introduced from the introduction port interferes. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency of distribution between the first passage and the second passage by the distribution unit (individual difference between gaming machines). Thereby, the player can find out the launch position of the game ball that can be easily distributed to the second passage by adjusting the launch position of the game ball and performing trial and error. Enjoying exploration of game ball launch positions where game balls can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island facilities of the game hall, the game balls are swung to the second passage from those game machines. It becomes possible to enjoy the search for a game machine that is easy to understand.

[Appendix E28]
The gaming machine according to appendix E27, wherein the distribution unit (38D, 38F) includes a fixed unit (381D, 389F) that is immovable and cannot rotate.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E28, it is determined by an accidental element such as a collision position of the game ball with respect to the fixed portion. Therefore, game balls are randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by accidental elements, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix E29]
The game machine according to appendix E28, wherein one end of the fixed part (381D, 389F) is fixed, and at least a part of the part other than the one end is plastically deformable.

[Appendix E30]
The gaming machine according to appendix E29, wherein the fixed part (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary part between the one end part and a part other than the one end part.

[Appendix E31]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E28 to appendix E30, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is a nail.

  In the gaming machines according to appendix E29 to appendix E31, since at least a part of the fixed portion of the allocating portion can be plastically changed, the fixed portion is set to the initial position when the position of the fixed portion deviates from the initial set value. It becomes possible to return. Thereby, it is possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio with time by adjusting the position of the fixed portion.

[Appendix E32]
The distribution part (38F) has a plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are arranged symmetrically with the one nail at the top in a front view and symmetrical with respect to a vertical line passing through the one nail. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix E32, by adjusting the top nail, it is possible to improve the deviation of the distribution ratio over time by adjusting the position of the fixed part.

[Appendix E33]
The distribution part (38E) has a rotating body (382D) fixed rotatably by the fixing part (381D),
The rotating body (382D) has a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and a direction opposite to the first direction, and the game ball toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix E28 to appendix E32, wherein the game machine is rotatable in a second direction in which the robot is moved.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note E33, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it becomes possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the game balls to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix E34]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E33, wherein the rotating body (382D) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix E35]
The allocating portion (38C) is in a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to appendix E34, wherein the gaming machine is a roller fixed so as to be freely rotatable in the second direction for moving the game ball.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note E34 and Supplementary Note E35, a rotating body such as a roller that can freely rotate is adopted as the allocating unit, and even with this rotating body, incidental elements such as a collision position of a game ball against the rotating body Determined by. Therefore, game balls are randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by accidental elements, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix F1]
A first winning opening (314) for entering a game ball;
A second winning opening (315) that is capable of entering a game ball and has a function different from that of the first winning opening (314);
A gaming state transition means (41) for transitioning a gaming state by establishment of a predetermined state among a plurality of gaming states;
With
The gaming state transition means (41) includes a first gaming state (mode A), a second gaming state (mode C, mode C ′), and a third gaming state (mode E, mode E ′),
The first gaming state (mode A), the second gaming state (mode C, mode C ′), and the third gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) are the same as the first winning port (314) and the A gaming machine characterized in that an expected value of a winning ratio with a second winning opening (315) is different.

  The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1 has three gaming states, ie, first to third gaming states, in which expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are different. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to supplementary note F1, based on three gaming states in which the expected value of the winning ratio of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are different, the new gaming characteristics that improve the gaming characteristics It becomes possible to create.

[Appendix F2]
The first gaming state is:
The game ball launched into the left area is easy to enter the first winning opening (314), but difficult to enter the second winning opening (315).
The game ball launched into the right area is difficult to enter either the first winning port (314) or the second winning port (315),
The second gaming state is
The game balls launched into the left area are easier to enter the first prize opening (351) and the second prize opening (315) than the game balls launched into the right area,
The third gaming state is
The game ball launched into the right area is difficult to enter the first winning opening (314), but is entered into the second winning opening (315) as compared to the game ball launched into the left area. The gaming machine according to appendix F1, which is easily played.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F2, the ease of entering the first winning port and the second winning port differs depending on the launch area of the game ball with respect to the game board in each of the first to third gaming states. Thereby, three game states of the 1st to 3rd game state from which the expected value of the winning ratio of a 1st winning opening and a 2nd winning opening differs can be implement | achieved by a simple method.

[Appendix F3]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution portion (38), and is introduced into the left region of the game board (31) and introduced from the introduction port (350). A distribution device (35) that distributes the played game balls to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by the distribution unit (38);
First detection means (318) for detecting that a game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
Second detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31);
It is detected by the first detection means (318) that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), or the game ball has passed through the specific area by the second detection means (319). When the game ball is detected, the game ball enters the second winning port (315) from the first position (standby position) where the game ball is prevented from entering the second winning port (315). A movable accessory member (36) operable in a second position (actuated position) where the ball is allowed;
Further comprising
In the first game state and the second game state, the second detection means (319) is configured to launch a game ball in the left area so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means (318). It is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball is launched in the right area so that the passage of the game ball is detected,
In the third gaming state, the first detection means (318) detects the passage of the game ball when the game ball is launched into the right region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by the second detection means (319). As described above, the gaming machine according to appendix F2, which is more advantageous to a player than a case where a game ball is launched into the left region.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F3, the game ball enters the second winning opening when the movable accessory member is actuated when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means or the second detection means. Enable. Each of the first to third gaming states has a launch area that is advantageous to the player by utilizing the presence or absence of the operation of the movable accessory member. In other words, three game states of the first to third game states with different expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning port and the second winning port can be realized by a simple method using the movable accessory member.

[Appendix F4]
The first special determination as to whether or not the first winning port (314) is shifted to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed by entering a game ball. Give the opportunity to do a (hit lottery)
A second special determination is made as to whether or not the second winning port (315) is shifted to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed by entering a game ball. Give the opportunity to do a (hit lottery)
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to appendix F3, wherein the second special determination has a higher expectation level for obtaining a determination result of shifting to the second special game than the first special determination.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F4, the expectation (function) of the transition to the second special game advantageous to the player by entering the gaming machine into the first starting port and entering the gaming ball into the second starting port Is different. Therefore, it is possible to realize three gaming states with different expectation levels for shifting to the second special game by making the expected value of the winning ratio of the first winning opening and the second winning opening different. Thereby, game nature is improved and the interest of a game ball is improved.

[Appendix F5]
The first gaming state is:
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning port (314), while the second winning port. (315) is difficult to enter,
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) are placed in either the first winning port (314) or the second winning port (315). Is difficult to enter,
The second gaming state is
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning port (351), while the second winning port. (352) is difficult to enter,
A game ball that has been launched into the left region and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) is difficult to enter the first winning port (351), while the first detection is performed. It is easy to enter the second winning opening (315) when the means (318) detects that the game ball passes through the second passage (352),
The third gaming state is
While it is difficult for the game ball launched into the right region to enter the first winning port (314), the second detection means (319) detects that the game ball passes through the right specific region. Therefore, the gaming machine according to appendix F4, which is easy to enter the second winning opening (315).

[Appendix F6]
In the first game state and the second game state, it is difficult for a game ball launched into the right area to enter either the first winning port (314) or the second winning port (315). The gaming machine according to appendix F5, characterized by:

[Appendix F7]
The third gaming state is
The game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the first passage (351) by the distribution device (35) are likely to enter the first winning port (314), while the second winning port. (315) is difficult to enter,
While the game balls that have been launched into the left area and distributed to the second passage (352) by the distribution device (35) are difficult to win in the first winning port (314), the first detection means In Supplementary Note F5 or Supplementary Note F6, it is easy to enter the second winning opening (352) when it is detected by (318) that a game ball passes through the second passage (352). The gaming machine described.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note F5 to Supplementary Note F7, three game states with different expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning opening and the second winning opening are realized by adopting the sorting device together with the movable accessory member. The Therefore, the first game state and the second game state in which a game ball is launched in the left region and the game is advanced using the distribution device, and the game is performed without using the distribution device by launching the game ball in the right region. The progressing third gaming state can be realized. Thereby, it is possible to give a wide range of games, and at the same time, it is possible to improve game play and to enhance the interest of the game ball.

[Appendix F8]
The second gaming state (mode C, mode C ′) and the third gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) are compared with the first gaming state (mode A) in the first special determination and the first gaming state. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of appendix F4 to appendix F7, wherein in the special determination, there is a high probability that it is determined to shift to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state).

[Appendix F9]
A first special symbol display unit for executing a first special symbol game for displaying the result of the first special determination triggered by the game ball entering the first winning port (314) by a first special symbol ( 371),
A second special symbol display section for executing a second special symbol game for displaying the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second winning port (315) as a second special symbol ( 372),
Further comprising
The gaming state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, after the first special symbol game based on the first special determination or the second special determination, Transition to special gaming state,
On the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening (314L, 314R) is to shift to the special game state, After the special game is over, the second game state (mode C, mode C ′) is shifted to,
The special in the special game state is provided on the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second winning port (315) is to shift to the special game state. The gaming machine according to appendix F8, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to the third gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) after the game is over.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note F8 and Supplementary Note F9, for example, a game with a barrier until a transition to a special gaming state in which a large amount of game value is given, a game with a plurality of substantial probability change rates, etc. It is possible to provide gaming machines having various gaming characteristics.

[Appendix F10]
As a result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment,
A first determination result (probability big hit) that is shifted to the third gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) after the end of the special game in the special gaming state;
A second determination result (usually a big jackpot) that is shifted to a gaming state other than the third gaming state (mode E, mode E ′) after the end of the special game in the special gaming state;
The gaming machine according to appendix F9, comprising:

[Appendix F11]
The gaming state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the second game after the end of the special game triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination Compared to the state (mode C, mode C ′) and the third gaming state (mode E, mode E ′), it is determined to shift to the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination. Transition to the fourth gaming state (mode B, mode D) with a low probability,
When the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game has reached the upper limit in the fourth gaming state (mode B, mode D), transition to the first gaming state (mode A) The gaming machine according to appendix F10, characterized by:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note F10 and supplementary note F11, as a result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment, the first judgment result to be shifted to the third gaming state after the end of the special game, and the third judgment after the end of the special game. And a second determination result that is shifted to a gaming state other than the gaming state. In addition, the second gaming state and the third gaming state have a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special gaming state in the first special determination or the second special determination than the first gaming state. And it has three game states of the 1st to 3rd game state from which the expected value of the winning ratio of a 1st winning opening and a 2nd winning opening differs, and it is triggered by the entering of a game ball to the 1st winning opening On the condition that the result of the first special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, the transition to the second gaming state after the end of the special game, triggered by the entry of the game ball to the second winning opening On the condition that the result of the second special determination is to shift to the special gaming state, the transition to the third gaming state is made after completion of the special game. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the first to third gaming states can be applied to a probability changing machine including a so-called loop probability changing machine. Then, according to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note F10 and Supplementary Note F11, the third gaming state that is most advantageous to the player shifts in stages through the second gaming state. That is, in order to shift to the third gaming state that is most advantageous to the player, first, the player is shifted to the second gaming state, and in the second gaming state, the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening in the special game determination. The result of the 2 special determination needs to be the first determination result. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of shifting to a gaming state advantageous to the player step by step.

[Appendix F12]
The gaming state transition means (41) is triggered by the first special determination or the second special determination when the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result. The gaming machine according to appendix F9, wherein after transitioning to a special game, the first gaming state (mode A) is entered.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F12, when the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is the second determination result, the game state shifts to the first game state after the special game ends, so the second game state and the third game The percentage of staying in the state is low. On the other hand, in the second game state and the third game state, not only can a game ball enter the second prize opening by support by the movable accessory member, but also the special game state in the first special determination or the second special determination. This is a mode with a high probability of being determined to shift to. Therefore, while the staying ratio in the second gaming state and the third gaming state is low, the game value is easy to fall into the first gaming state, but on the other hand, there is a sharpness for the transition of the gaming state, and the gaming value that the player can obtain Can also provide a sharp gaming machine.

[Appendix F13]
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the first gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the first special determination or the second special determination Transition number setting means for setting a transition upper limit number to be shifted to the special gaming state as the first transition to the special gaming state based on;
The gaming state transition means (41) shifts to the first gaming state (mode A) after completion of the special gaming state of the transition upper limit number set by the transition number setting means (41). The gaming machine according to appendix F9.

  The gaming machine according to supplementary note F13 has three gaming states of first to third gaming states with different expected values of the winning ratios of the first winning port and the second winning port, and up to the transition upper limit number The transition to the special gaming state from will continue. That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the first to third gaming states can be applied to a so-called limit machine. Then, on the condition that the result of the first special determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening is to shift to the special game state, the game is shifted to the second game state after the end of the special game. The game is shifted to the third game state after the end of the special game on the condition that the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second prize opening is to shift to the special game state. . That is, the transition destination of the gaming state after the special game differs depending on whether the ball enters the first winning port or the ball enters the second winning port. Therefore, in the opportunity to shift to the remaining special gaming state after the first hit, the gameability of how to shift to the third gaming state that is most advantageous to the player while leaving the opportunity to transition to the special gaming state remains A gaming machine having the same can be provided.

[Appendix F14]
The gaming state transition means (41) has a maximum number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game in the second gaming state (mode C ′) or the third gaming state (mode E ′). When the game machine reaches the first gaming state (mode A), the gaming machine according to appendix F9, wherein:

[Appendix F15]
A special variable pitching device (82) having a special pitching portion (824) opened in the special game;
The gaming state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the first gaming state (mode A) is to shift to the special gaming state, the special game in the special gaming state On the condition that the game ball enters the entrance part, after the end of the special game, transition to the second game state (mode C ′),
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination in the second game state (mode C ′) is to shift to the special game state, the special game in the special game state The gaming machine according to appendix F14, wherein the gaming machine enters the third gaming state (mode E ′) after completion of the special game on the condition that the gaming ball enters the special ball entry unit (824). .

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note F14 and Supplementary Note F15, when the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches the upper limit in the second gaming state or the third gaming state, the game machine is shifted to the first gaming state. The That is, a gaming machine having three gaming states of the first to third gaming states can be applied to ST machines including so-called V-ST machines. Further, in the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note F14 and Supplementary Note F15, it is necessary to go through the second gaming state in order to shift to the third gaming state that is most advantageous to the player. That is, in order to shift to the third gaming state, after the transition to the second gaming state, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game until the upper limit is reached. The result of the special determination needs to shift to the special gaming state. Accordingly, after the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the determination result of how quickly the second special symbol game is shifted to the special gaming state is obtained, and the transition to the third gaming state that is most advantageous to the player is performed. Judgment of whether or not to shift to the third gaming state, and how many special gaming states to transition to the upper limit of the number of times of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game after the transition to the third gaming state It is possible to provide a gaming machine having a game characteristic of whether to obtain a result.

[Appendix F16]
A first special symbol display for executing a first special symbol game in which a result of the first special determination triggered by a game ball entering the first winning port (314L, 314R) is displayed as a first special symbol. Part (371),
A second special symbol display section for executing a second special symbol game for displaying the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second winning port (315) as a second special symbol ( 372),
When the result of the second special determination triggered by the game ball entering the second winning port (315) is a specific result (small hit) different from that for shifting to the special game state It is possible to enter a game ball by being actuated, and the special entry to which the game state transition means (41) grants the right to enter the special game state (two types of big hits) by entering the game ball. A feather accessory device (83) having a ball portion (833);
Further comprising
The gaming state transition means (41)
When the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is that which shifts to the special gaming state (1 type big hit), the transition to the special gaming state is triggered,
On the condition that the result of the first special determination or the second special determination is to shift to the special game state, the second game state (mode C) after the special game in the special game state ends. To
After the operation of the wing accessory device (83) is completed based on the right to transition to the special gaming state (two types of big hits) granted when a game ball enters the special ball entry unit (833). Transition to the special gaming state,
Shifting to the third gaming state (mode E) after completion of the special game in the special gaming state, which is shifted when the game ball enters the special ball entering unit (833). The gaming machine according to appendix F8.

[Appendix F17]
The gaming state transition means (41) is configured such that, in the second gaming state or the third gaming state, when the total number of games of the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game reaches an upper limit number, The gaming machine according to attachment F16, wherein the gaming machine is shifted to a first gaming state.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note F16 and Supplementary Note F17, the result of the first special judgment or the second special judgment is to shift to a special gaming state (one-type big hit), or a game ball enters the special pitching part As a result, the right to transition to the special gaming state is granted (two types of big hits), so that the transition to the special gaming state is made. That is, the gaming machine having the three gaming states of the first to third gaming states can be applied to a so-called type 1 type 2 mixing machine.

[Appendix F18]
It is detected by the first detection means (318) that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), or the game ball has passed through the specific area by the second detection means (319). A normal determination means for performing a normal determination as to whether or not the movable accessory member (36) is operated between the first position (standby position) and the second position (actuation position) triggered by the detection. (41)
The second game state (mode C, mode C ′) and the third game state (mode E, mode E ′) are determined by the normal determination means (41) as compared to the first game state (mode A). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes F3 to F17, wherein the probability that it is determined that the movable accessory member (36) is operated in the normal determination is high.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F18, the probability that it is determined that the movable accessory member is operated in the normal determination by the normal determination means is different in the second game state, the third game state, and the first game state. Thereby, three game states of the 1st to 3rd game state from which the expected value of the winning ratio of a 1st winning opening and a 2nd winning opening differs can be implement | achieved by a simple method.

[Appendix F19]
In the second game state (mode C, mode C ′), the game ball has passed through the second passage (352) by the first detection means (318) as compared to the first game state (mode A). The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes F1 to F18, characterized in that the time from when this is detected until the operation of the movable accessory member (36) is started is short.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix F19, in the second gaming state, the movement of the movable accessory member is performed after the first detecting means detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage compared to the first gaming state. The time to start is short. Thereby, three game states of the 1st to 3rd game state from which the expected value of the winning ratio of a 1st winning opening and a 2nd winning opening differs can be implement | achieved by a simple method.

[Appendix F20]
In the third gaming state (mode E, mode E ′), the movable accessory member (36) is compared to the first gaming state (mode A) and the second gaming state (mode C, mode C ′). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix F1 to appendix F19, characterized in that the operating time of is long.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F20, the operating time of the movable accessory member is longer in the third gaming state than in the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Thereby, three game states of the 1st to 3rd game state from which the expected value of the winning ratio of a 1st winning opening and a 2nd winning opening differs can be implement | achieved by a simple method.

[Appendix G1]
Multiple winning entrances that allow game balls to enter,
A first position in which a game ball is allowed to enter a specific winning port (315) of the plurality of winning ports, and a game ball that is allowed to enter the specific winning port (315) are allowed. A movable accessory member (36) operable between two positions;
A retraction guiding portion (393, 394) that is provided above the movable accessory member (36) and guides the game ball in a direction away from the specific winning opening (315);
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1, a retraction guiding unit for guiding the game ball in a direction away from the second prize opening is provided above the movable accessory member. Therefore, according to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G1, for example, in a gaming state where the operating time of the movable role member is short and it is encouraged to launch the gaming machine in the left area of the game board, a specific winning opening in the movable role member Since the game ball can be received at a position away from the game ball, it is possible to secure a long time until the game ball reaches a specific winning opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the specific winning opening in a short time from the start of the operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position. When it is performed, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix G2]
The retraction guide part (393, 394) includes the plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined shape in which a nail far from the specific winning opening (315) is positioned lower than a nail near the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to Appendix G1.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G2, the game ball can be guided upstream in the moving direction of the game ball by a simple configuration in which a plurality of nails are arranged in an inclined manner. Also, in gaming machines, since a large number of nails are generally driven on the game board, a retracting guide portion can be provided when driving these nails. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the movable accessory member to receive support when the movable accessory member operates for a short time while suppressing the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in manufacturing cost due to the provision of the retracting guide portion.

[Appendix G3]
The plurality of winning ports further include a predetermined winning port (314R) having a function different from that of the specific winning port (315),
The movable accessory member (36) allows a game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315) and restricts a game ball from entering the predetermined winning opening (314R). Position (standby position) and a second position (actuation) that restricts the entry of game balls into the specific winning opening (315) and allows the entry of game balls into the predetermined winning opening (314R) The gaming machine according to the supplementary note G1 or the supplementary note G2, characterized in that the gaming machine can be

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G3, depending on whether or not the movable accessory member is operated, the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening and the predetermined winning opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, when the movable accessory member is in the first position where it is not actuated, it is allowed to enter a game ball into a specific winning port, while the game ball enters a predetermined winning port. When it is restricted and the movable accessory member is in the second position to be operated, the entry of the game ball into the specific prize opening is restricted while the game ball is allowed to enter the predetermined prize opening. As described above, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G3, the movable accessory member not only allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the specific prize opening, but also allows the game ball to enter the predetermined prize opening. Allow or limit at the same time. Thereby, the monotonousness of a game can be reduced and a highly interesting game machine having new game characteristics according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member can be provided.

[Appendix G4]
The movable accessory member (36)
Allowing the game balls to enter the predetermined prize opening (314R, 314) by opening the predetermined prize opening (314R, 314) in the first position (standby position);
Covering the predetermined winning port (314R) in the second position (actuated position) to close the predetermined winning port (314R) and restrict the entry of game balls into the predetermined winning port (314R) The gaming machine according to appendix G3, characterized in that:

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G4, it is possible to allow a game ball to enter a specific winning opening by the movable accessory member by a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member is provided at a position where the predetermined winning opening can be opened and closed. Alternatively, it is possible to allow or restrict the entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning opening as well as the restriction.

[Appendix G5]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). And further comprising a sorting device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
The predetermined winning opening (314R, 314) is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) can enter,
The movable accessory member (36)
While allowing the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) at the first position (standby position) to enter the predetermined winning port (314R, 314), the specific winning port (315) is permitted. Limit the entry of
In the second position (operating position), the game balls that have passed through the second passage (352) are restricted from entering the predetermined winning award (314R, 314), while the specified winning award (315) is restricted. The gaming machine according to appendix G4, wherein the ball is allowed to enter.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment G5, when the game balls are distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, Depending on the presence / absence of operation, game balls are allowed or restricted to enter a specific winning opening and a predetermined winning opening. Specifically, the game balls assigned to the second passage are specified while the game balls are allowed to enter the predetermined winning opening when the movable accessory member is in the first position where the movable accessory member is not operated. When a game ball is restricted from entering the prize opening and the movable accessory member is in the second position, the entry of the game ball into a predetermined prize opening is restricted while the game ball is restricted to a specific prize opening. The game balls are allowed to enter. As described above, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note G5, the movable accessory member not only allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening, but also the predetermined game ball distributed to the second passage. At the same time, allow or restrict the entry of game balls into the winning opening. And the game machine which concerns on additional remark G5 can vary the pitch ratio of a specific winning opening and a predetermined winning opening by cooperation of a distribution apparatus and a movable accessory member. Thereby, the monotonousness of a game can be reduced and a highly interesting game machine having new game characteristics according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member can be provided.

[Appendix G6]
The movable accessory member (36) is configured such that the predetermined winning port (314R) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) between the second passage (352) and the predetermined winning port (314R). ), The predetermined winning opening (314R) is set to the open state at the first position (standby position), and the predetermined winning opening (at the second position (operating position)) is set. The gaming machine according to appendix G5, further comprising an opening / closing part (362) that brings 314R) into the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G6, the movement of the game ball that has passed through the second passage between the second passage and the predetermined winning opening with a part of the movable accessory member as an opening / closing portion toward the predetermined winning opening In the middle of the route, for example, by a simple configuration in which a movable accessory member is provided at a position where a predetermined winning opening can be opened and closed, not only allowance or restriction of a game ball entering a specific winning opening by the movable accessory member is possible. In addition, it is possible to allow or restrict game balls from entering a predetermined winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix G7]
The movable accessory member (36) is continuous with the opening / closing portion (362), and moves a game ball launched into the right area of the game board (31) toward the opening / closing portion (362) (363). The gaming machine according to appendix G6, further comprising:

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note G7, a simple structure is provided in which a part of the movable accessory member is provided as a guide part continuous to the opening / closing part at a position where the game ball launched into the right region is moved toward the opening / closing part. In addition to allowing or restricting the entry of a game ball into a specific winning opening, the movable accessory member can permit or restrict the entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix G8]
The movable accessory member (36R) includes a first portion (361R) for allowing a game ball to enter the second winning port (315) from the left of the second winning port (315), and the second winning port. The gaming machine according to appendix G3, further comprising: a second portion (362R) that causes a game ball to enter the second winning opening (315) from the right side of (315).

  In the gaming machine according to attachment G8, the movable accessory member moves the game ball from the left side of the second prize opening and the first part for allowing the game ball to enter the second prize slot from the left side of the second prize slot. And a second portion for entering the winning prize opening. Thereby, by the simple structure of providing the first part and the second part on the movable accessory member, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening, and the second winning opening. It is possible to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into the game at the same time.

[Appendix G9]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). And further comprising a sorting device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
The movable accessory member (36R)
Allowing the game ball passing through the second passage to enter the first start port (314) at the first position (standby position);
In the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows a game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) to enter the second winning opening (352), and The gaming machine according to appendix G8, wherein the portion (362R) allows a game ball launched into the right region of the game board (31) to enter the second winning opening (352).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G9, the first portion of the movable accessory member enables the game ball in the second passage of the sorting apparatus to enter the second winning opening. Thereby, in the gaming machine adopting the distribution device, the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening by the movable accessory member by a simple configuration in which the first portion and the second portion are provided on the movable accessory member. Allowance or restriction, and allowance or restriction of game balls entering the second prize opening can be performed simultaneously.

[Appendix G10]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R), and allows the game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315). It further has a penetration part (363R),
The game according to appendix G8 or appendix G9, wherein the first part (361R) and the second part (362R) are inclined so as to become lower toward the penetrating part (363R). Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G10, both the game ball in the second passage and the game ball in the right region are provided by a simple configuration in which a through portion is provided between the first portion and the second portion having different inclination states. It is possible to move to the penetrating part and enter a specific winning opening.

[Appendix G11]
The movable accessory member (36R)
In the first portion (361R), the game balls passing through the second passage (352) are restricted from entering the specific winning opening (351) at the first position (operating position), and Allowed in the second position (operating position),
In the second part (362R), the ball entering the specific winning opening (351) of the game ball launched into the right area of the game board (31) is restricted at the first position (actuation position), The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G8 to G10, wherein the gaming machine is allowed in the second position (operating position).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G11, both the game ball in the second passage and the game ball in the right region are provided by a simple configuration in which a through portion is provided between the first portion and the second portion having different inclination states. It is possible to move to the penetrating part and enter a specific winning opening.

[Appendix G12]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S),
The first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) are close to each other at the first position (standby position), and at the second position (actuation position). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G3, characterized in that the front end portions thereof are separated from each other.

  In the gaming machine according to Appendix G12, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, not only allowance or restriction of game balls entering a specific winning opening but also allowance or restriction of game balls entering a predetermined winning opening can be performed by the movable accessory member.

[Appendix G13]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). And further comprising a sorting device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passage (352), and is in the first position (standby position). When the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) interferes, the game ball is moved toward the predetermined winning opening (314), and the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) in the operating position is The gaming machine according to appendix G12, wherein the gaming ball is moved toward the specific winning opening (315) by interference.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G13, when the game balls are distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, Depending on whether or not the first movable accessory member and the second movable accessory member are activated, the entry of the game ball into the predetermined winning opening and the specific winning opening is permitted or restricted. Specifically, the game balls distributed to the second passage are game balls to a predetermined winning opening when the first movable accessory member and the second movable accessory member as movable accessory members are in the standby position. Is allowed to enter a specific winning opening, but the entry of a game ball into a specific winning opening is restricted, and when the first movable accessory member and the second movable accessory member are in the operating position, While the entry of game balls is restricted, the entry of game balls into a specific winning opening is allowed. Thus, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G13, the first movable accessory member and the second movable accessory member not only allow or restrict the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening, but also the second passage. At the same time, allowing or restricting the entry of the game balls into the predetermined winning opening of the game balls distributed to is performed. And the game machine which concerns on additional remark G13 can vary the entrance ratio of a predetermined winning opening and a specific winning opening by cooperation of a distribution apparatus and a movable accessory member. Thereby, the monotonousness of a game can be reduced and a highly interesting game machine having new game characteristics according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member can be provided.

[Appendix G14]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). A distribution device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by:
A gap through which a game ball can pass is formed with the specific winning opening (315), and the game ball launched into the right area of the game board (31) is directed toward the specific winning opening (315). A guiding part (31M ′) to be moved;
Further comprising
The movable accessory member (36S to 36X)
In the first position (standby position), the specific winning opening (315) is closed, and the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) and the right side of the game board (31) are launched. Restricting the entry of game balls into the specific winning opening (315),
In the second position (operating position), the specific winning opening (315) is opened, and a path for a game ball is formed between the guiding portion (31M ′) and the specific winning opening (315). The additional note G1 or the additional note, wherein the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) and the game ball that has been launched in the right region are allowed to enter the specific winning opening (315). A gaming machine according to G2.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G14, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, a path of the game ball is formed between the guiding portion and the specific winning opening, so that the second path of the sorting device is Not only the game balls that pass through, but also the game balls that have been launched into the right area of the game board can be entered into a specific winning opening by the movable accessory member. Therefore, it becomes possible to enter a game ball into a specific winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. Thereby, an amusing gaming machine having new gaming properties can be provided.

[Appendix G15]
The movable accessory member (36T) is slidable between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position),
The first position (standby position) is a position for closing the specific winning opening (315) and opening the gap,
The gaming machine according to appendix G14, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position that opens the specific winning opening (315) and closes the gap.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G15, the movable accessory member is slid at a first position where the specific winning opening is closed and a second position where the gap between the guiding portion and the specific winning opening is closed. A single movable accessory member allows a game ball to enter a specific winning opening from a plurality of routes.

[Appendix G16]
The movable accessory member (36U, 36W) is operable between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) by rotation,
The first position (standby position) is a position for closing the specific winning opening (315) and opening the gap,
The gaming machine according to appendix G14, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position that opens the specific winning opening (315) and closes the gap.

[Appendix G17]
The game machine according to appendix G16, wherein the movable accessory member (36U) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction along the game board (31).

[Appendix G18]
The gaming machine according to appendix G16, wherein the movable accessory member (36V) is rotatable about a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the game board (31).

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note G16 to Supplementary Note G18, the movable accessory member is rotated in the horizontal direction between the first position where the specific winning opening is closed and the second position where the gap between the guiding portion and the specific winning opening is closed. Due to the simple configuration, it is possible to enter a game ball into a specific winning opening from a plurality of routes by one movable accessory member.

[Appendix G19]
The gaming machine according to appendix G18, wherein the rotating body (36V) can be stopped in an upright state at the second start port (315) and a third position (standby position) that opens the gap.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G19, it is not necessary to provide a retraction guide part, and in the gaming state (mode A to mode C) in which the movable accessory member is released for a short time, the game ball in the right region of the sorting device is movable. It can prevent being guided to the 2nd starting opening by the accessory member.

[Appendix G20]
The movable accessory member (36W) is rotatable, and the second starting port (315) and a closing part (364W) capable of closing the gap, and the second starting port (315) and the gap are opened. With a possible penetration (363W)
The first position (standby position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is closed by the closing portion (364W) and the gap is opened by the through hole (363W).
The second position (operating position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is opened by the through hole (363W) and the gap is closed by the closing portion (364W). The gaming machine according to appendix G14.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G20, the game ball is entered from the plurality of paths into the second winning opening by a single movable accessory member with a simple configuration of rotating the movable accessory member having the closing portion and the penetrating portion. It becomes possible.

[Appendix G21]
The movable accessory member (36X) rotates around a rotation axis extending in a direction inclined with respect to a horizontal direction between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) in the gap. Is a possible rotating body,
The rotating body (36X)
A first penetrating part (361X) that penetrates along a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis and allows a game ball to pass through, and a direction that intersects the first penetrating part (361X) in the direction of the rotation axis, A second penetrating part (362X) through which a sphere can pass,
The first position (standby position) is a position where the game ball is dropped in the gap by the second penetration part (362X),
The gaming machine according to appendix G14, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the first penetrating portion (361X) communicates with the specific winning opening (315).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G21, a simple structure in which a rotating body is rotated between a specific winning opening and a guiding portion, and a single moving accessory member enters a gaming ball from a plurality of paths into a specific winning opening. It becomes possible to make a ball.

[Appendix G22]
A game ball that moves the movable accessory member (36T to 36X) toward the specific winning opening (315) when the movable accessory member (36T to 36X) is in the second position (operating position). The game machine according to any one of supplementary notes G14 to G21, further comprising a guard part (31B) that prevents the special winning opening (315) from being exceeded.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G22, by providing the guard portion, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, the game ball moving the movable accessory member toward the specific winning opening is surely received in the specific prize. The ball can enter the mouth.

[Appendix G23]
Detection means (318) for detecting that a game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
When the detection means (318) detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage (352), the movable accessory member (36) is moved to the first position (standby position) and the first position. Normal determination means (41) for performing a normal determination as to whether or not to operate between two positions (actuation positions);
The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes G5 to G7 to Supplementary Note G11, and Supplementary Notes G13 to G22, further comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note G23, a game ball detecting means is provided in the second passage through which the game ball can enter the specific winning opening by the operation of the movable accessory member, and the game ball is detected by this detecting means. In response to this, the normal determination unit determines whether or not the movable accessory member is to be operated by the normal determination unit. Therefore, in the gaming machine according to supplementary note G23, although the game balls are distributed to the first passage and the second passage, it is determined whether or not the movable accessory member is operated, that is, to the specific winning opening by the movable accessory member. Whether or not a game ball can be entered is determined according to the result of the normal determination. Accordingly, whether or not the game ball in the second passage enters the specific winning opening depends on the result of the normal determination, so that the game does not easily become monotonous and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix G24]
The specific winning opening (315) has a special determination (big hit game state) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed by entering a game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note G1 to Supplementary Note G23, characterized by providing an opportunity to perform (lottery).

[Appendix G25]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes G1 to G24, wherein the specific winning opening (313 ') is a general winning opening.

[Appendix H1]
A plurality of winning holes (314, 315) that allow game balls to enter;
A first position (standby position) in which a game ball is restricted from entering a specific winning port (315) of the plurality of winning ports (314, 315) and a game to the specific winning port (315) A movable accessory member that is operable between a second position (actuated position) where the ball is allowed to enter and moves the game ball toward the specific winning opening (315) in the second position ( 36)
With
The game machine characterized in that the movable accessory member (36) has a delay section (364) for delaying the movement of the game ball on the movable accessory member (36).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1, a delay portion is provided in the movable accessory member that guides the game ball to a specific winning opening. Therefore, for example, even when the player receives a game ball on the movable accessory member in a gaming state where the operation time of the movable combination member is short and left-handed is encouraged, It is possible to secure a long time until it reaches a specific winning opening. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball received by the movable accessory member from reaching the specific winning opening in a short time from the start of the operation of the movable accessory member to the return to the standby position. When it is performed, it is possible to make it difficult to receive support from the movable accessory member.

[Appendix H2]
The game machine according to appendix H1, wherein the delay unit (364, 364A to 364C) moves a game ball along a meandering path in the movable accessory member (36, 36A to 36C).

[Appendix H3]
The delay portion (364D to 364H) includes one or more linear convex portions (364D to 364G) or linear concave portions (in the direction intersecting the moving direction of the game ball in the movable accessory member (36D to 36H) or linear concave portion ( 364H), the gaming machine according to appendix H1 or appendix H2.

[Appendix H4]
The delay part (364I to 364P) is a plurality of discretely arranged convex parts (364I to 364N) or a plurality of concave parts (364O, 364P), according to any one of supplementary notes H1 to H3, The gaming machine described.

[Appendix H5]
The gaming machine according to appendix H4, wherein the plurality of convex portions (364I to 364N) or the plurality of concave portions (364O, 364P) are arranged in a lattice pattern.

  According to the gaming machines according to the supplementary notes H2 to H5, the movement of the game ball on the movable accessory member can be delayed by the delay unit having a simple configuration. For example, when the movable accessory member is formed by resin molding, the delay portion can be integrally formed in the movable accessory member by resin molding. Thereby, the complexity of the manufacturing process and the increase in the manufacturing cost due to the formation of the delay portion can be suppressed.

[Appendix H6]
From the supplementary note H1, the delay portion (364Q) is one or more rollers (364Q) having a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting a moving direction of the game ball on the movable accessory member (36Q). The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix H5.

[Appendix H7]
The gaming machine according to appendix H6, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) are rotationally driven in a reverse direction opposite to a moving direction of the game ball.

[Appendix H8]
The gaming machine according to appendix H6 or appendix H7, wherein the one or more rollers (364Q) cause a magnetic force or an electromagnetic force to act on the game ball.

  According to the gaming machines according to the supplementary notes H6 to H8, the movable accessory member is provided with a roller, so that not only the design of the gaming machine is improved, but also the behavior of the game ball that moves the movable accessory member Because it becomes easier to focus on the game, the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H9]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution part (38), and is launched into the left region of the game board (31) and introduced from the introduction port (350). A distribution device (35) for distributing the game balls to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by the distribution portion (38);
First detection means (318) for detecting that a game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
Second detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31);
Further comprising
The movable accessory member (36)
When the passing of the game ball is detected by the first detecting means (318) or the second detecting means (319), the first position (standby position) is moved to the second position (operating position). ,
When in the second position, the game ball passing through the second passage (352) and the game ball passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note H1 to Supplementary Note H8, wherein:

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment H9, not only the game balls passing through the second passage of the sorting apparatus but also the game balls launched into the right area of the game board enter the specific winning opening by the movable accessory member. Can be made. Therefore, it becomes possible to enter a game ball into a specific winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. Thereby, an amusing gaming machine having new gaming properties can be provided.

[Appendix H10]
The movable accessory member (36) is characterized in that the operation time when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied is longer than the operation time when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to H9.

[Appendix H11]
The right region so that the second detecting means (319) detects the passing of the game ball when the first detecting means (318) detects the passing of the game ball so that the passing of the game ball is detected. The first game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball is launched in the first time, and the game ball is launched into the right region so that the second detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball. A game between a plurality of game states including a second game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with a case where a game ball is launched into the left region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by one detection means (318). It further comprises a game state transition means (41) for transitioning the state,
The first condition is that the first gaming state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix H10, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note H10 and Supplementary Note H11, it is easy to enter a game ball into a specific winning opening by the movable accessory member when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. Are different. For example, the operation time of the movable accessory member varies depending on the game state (an advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, it is determined that the movable ball member has been operated, and the game ball launched into the right region is difficult to enter a specific winning opening. It becomes possible to set the ease of playing a game ball to a specific winning opening. This makes it a disadvantage to the player when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), thus promoting left-handed in situations where left-handed is encouraged It becomes possible to do.

[Appendix H12]
The specific winning opening (315) is configured so that the time required for the game ball detected by the second detecting means (319) to enter the specific winning opening (315) is the first detecting means (318). The gaming machine according to appendix H11, characterized in that the gaming ball detected by (1) is arranged at a position longer than a time required for entering the specific winning opening (315).

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H12, the time required for the game ball detected by the first detection means to enter the specific winning opening and the game ball detected by the second detection means are the specific winning opening. The time required to enter the ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched into the left area of the game board can enter a specific winning opening, while a game ball launched into the right area makes it difficult to enter a specific winning opening. Is possible. This makes it a disadvantage to the player when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), thus promoting left-handed in situations where left-handed is encouraged It becomes possible to do.

[Appendix H13]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C) is that the gaming ball detected by the first detecting means (318) is the specific winning opening. (315) is allowed to enter the ball, and it is a time to limit the game ball detected by the second detection means (319) from entering the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H11 or Supplementary Note H12.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note H13, it is possible to appropriately restrict a game ball from entering a specific winning opening when a right hand is made in the first gaming state in which a left hand is encouraged. Therefore, when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It becomes possible.

[Appendix H14]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the second gaming state (mode E) is that the gaming ball detected by the second detecting means (319) is the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note H11 to Supplementary Note H13, characterized in that it is time allowed to enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H14, it is possible to make a game ball enter a specific winning opening by making a right turn in the second gaming state. Therefore, by making a right turn in the second gaming state, it is possible to advance the game with almost no increase or decrease in the number of game balls.

[Appendix H15]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). And further comprising a sorting device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
The predetermined winning opening (314R, 314) is provided at a position where a game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) can enter,
The movable accessory member (36)
While allowing the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) at the first position (standby position) to enter the predetermined winning port (314R, 314), the specific winning port (315) is permitted. Limit the entry of
In the second position (operating position), the game balls that have passed through the second passage (352) are restricted from entering the predetermined winning award (314R, 314), while the specified winning award (315) is restricted. The game machine according to any one of Supplementary Note H1 to Supplementary Note H14, wherein the ball is allowed to enter.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment H15, when the game balls are distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to the second passage by the distribution device, Depending on the presence / absence of operation, game balls are allowed or restricted to enter a specific winning opening and a predetermined winning opening. Specifically, the game balls assigned to the second passage are specified while the game balls are allowed to enter the predetermined winning opening when the movable accessory member is in the first position where the movable accessory member is not operated. When a game ball is restricted from entering the prize opening and the movable accessory member is in the second position, the entry of the game ball into a predetermined prize opening is restricted while the game ball is restricted to a specific prize opening. The game balls are allowed to enter. As described above, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H15, the movable accessory member not only allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the specific winning opening, but also the predetermined game balls distributed to the second passage. At the same time, allow or restrict the entry of game balls into the winning opening. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H15 can vary the pitch ratio between a specific winning opening and a predetermined winning opening by the cooperation of the sorting device and the movable accessory member. Thereby, the monotonousness of a game can be reduced and a highly interesting game machine having new game characteristics according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member can be provided.

[Appendix H16]
The movable accessory member (36) is configured such that the predetermined winning port (314R) of the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) between the second passage (352) and the predetermined winning port (314R). ), The predetermined winning opening (314R) is set to the open state at the first position (standby position), and the predetermined winning opening (at the second position (operating position)) is set. The gaming machine according to appendix H15, further comprising an opening / closing part (362) that brings 314R) into the closed state.

  According to the gaming machine according to supplementary note H16, the movement of the game ball that has passed through the second passage between the second passage and the predetermined winning opening with a part of the movable accessory member as an opening / closing portion toward the predetermined winning opening In the middle of the route, for example, by a simple configuration in which a movable accessory member is provided at a position where a predetermined winning opening can be opened and closed, not only allowance or restriction of a game ball entering a specific winning opening by the movable accessory member is possible. It is possible to allow or restrict game balls from entering a predetermined winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix H17]
The movable accessory member (36) is continuous with the opening / closing portion (362), and moves a game ball launched into the right area of the game board (31) toward the opening / closing portion (362) (363). The gaming machine according to attachment H16, further comprising:

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H17, a simple structure is provided in which a part of the movable accessory member is provided at a position where the game ball launched into the right region is moved toward the opening / closing part as a guide part continuous to the opening / closing part. In addition to allowing or restricting the entry of a game ball into a specific winning opening, the movable accessory member can permit or restrict the entry of a game ball into a predetermined winning opening at the same time.

[Appendix H18]
The movable accessory member (36R) includes a first portion (361R) for allowing a game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315) from the left of the specific winning opening (315), and the specific winning opening. A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note H1 to Supplementary Note H17, comprising: a second portion (362R) that causes a game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315) from the right side of (315) .

  In the gaming machine according to appendix H18, the movable accessory member specifies the first part for allowing the game ball to enter the specific winning opening from the left of the specific winning opening, and the gaming ball from the right of the specific winning opening. And a second portion for entering the winning opening. Thereby, by the simple structure of providing the first part and the second part on the movable accessory member, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the predetermined winning opening, and the specific winning opening. It is possible to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into the game at the same time.

[Appendix H19]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). And further comprising a sorting device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
The movable accessory member (36R)
Allowing the game ball passing through the second passage to enter the other specific start port (314) in the first position (standby position);
In the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows a game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) to enter the specific winning opening (315), and The gaming machine according to appendix H18, wherein the portion (362R) allows a gaming ball launched into the right area of the gaming board (31) to enter the specific winning opening (315).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H19, the first portion of the movable accessory member allows the game ball in the second passage of the sorting apparatus to enter a specific winning opening. Thereby, in the gaming machine adopting the sorting device, the game ball can be inserted into the predetermined winning opening by the movable accessory member by a simple configuration in which the first portion and the second portion are provided on the movable accessory member. Allowance or restriction, and allowance or restriction of game balls entering a specific winning opening can be performed simultaneously.

[Appendix H20]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R), and allows the game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315). It further has a penetration part (363R),
The game according to appendix H18 or appendix H19, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined so as to become lower toward the penetrating portion (363R). Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix H20, both the game ball in the second passage and the game ball in the right region are provided by a simple configuration in which a through portion is provided between the first portion and the second portion having different inclination states. It is possible to move to the penetrating part and enter a specific winning opening.

[Appendix H21]
The movable accessory member (36R)
In the first portion (361R), the game balls passing through the second passage (352) are restricted from entering the specific winning opening (315) at the first position (operating position), and Allowed in the second position (operating position),
In the second portion (362R), the ball entering the specific winning opening (315) of the game ball launched in the right area of the game board (31) is restricted at the first position (actuation position), The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H19 or Supplementary H20, which is allowed in the second position (operating position).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H21, both the game ball in the second passage and the game ball in the right region are provided by a simple configuration in which a penetration portion is provided between the first portion and the second portion having different inclination states. It is possible to move to the penetrating part and enter a specific winning opening.

[Appendix H22]
The specific winning opening (315) has a special determination (big hit game state) as to whether or not to shift to a special game state (jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) is executed by entering a game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note H1 to Supplementary Note H121, characterized by providing an opportunity to perform (lottery).

[Appendix H23]
A first special determination (a jackpot lottery) as to whether or not the plurality of winning holes are to be shifted to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed by entering a game ball ) And whether or not to shift to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed by entering the game ball Including a second winning opening (315) that gives an opportunity to perform the second special judgment (Lottery lottery)
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The second special determination has a higher expectation level for obtaining a determination result for shifting to the second special game than the first special determination,
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note H1 to Supplementary Note H22, wherein the specific winning opening (315) is the second winning opening.

[Appendix I1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). A distribution device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by
The gaming machine characterized in that the distribution unit (38) is fixed at a position where a game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) interferes.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment I1, the sorting unit of the sorting device is fixed at a position where the game ball introduced from the introduction port interferes. Therefore, the player can also read the tendency of distribution between the first passage and the second passage by the distribution unit (individual difference between gaming machines). Thereby, the player can find out the launch position of the game ball that can be easily distributed to the second passage by adjusting the launch position of the game ball and performing trial and error. Enjoying exploration of game ball launch positions where game balls can be easily distributed, or when multiple game machines of the same type are installed in the island facilities of the game hall, the game balls are swung to the second passage from those game machines. It becomes possible to enjoy the search for a game machine that is easy to understand.

[Appendix I2]
The gaming machine according to appendix I1, wherein the distribution unit (38D, 38F) includes a fixed unit (381D, 389F) that is immovable and cannot rotate.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment I2, it is determined by an accidental element such as a collision position of the game ball with respect to the fixed portion. Therefore, game balls are randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by accidental elements, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix I3]
The game machine according to appendix I2, wherein one end of the fixing part (381D, 389F) is fixed, and at least a part of the part other than the one end is plastically deformable.

[Appendix I4]
The gaming machine according to appendix I3, wherein the fixed portion (381D, 389F) is plastically deformable at a boundary portion between the one end portion and a portion other than the one end portion.

[Appendix I5]
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix I2 to appendix I4, wherein the fixing portion (381D, 389F) is a nail.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes I3 to I5, since at least a part of the fixed part of the allocating part can be plastically changed, the fixed part is set to the initial position when the position of the fixed part deviates from the initial set value. It becomes possible to return. Thereby, it is possible to improve the uneven distribution ratio over time.

[Appendix I6]
The distribution part (38F) has a plurality of nails,
The plurality of nails are arranged in a bilaterally symmetrical manner with one nail at the top in a front view and a vertical line passing through the one nail being symmetric. A gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix I6, it is possible to improve the uneven distribution ratio over time by adjusting the top nail.

[Appendix I7]
The distribution part (38E) has a rotating body (382D) fixed rotatably by the fixing part (381D),
The rotating body (382D) is in a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and the game is directed toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes I2 to I5, wherein the gaming machine is rotatable in a second direction in which the ball is moved.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix I7, by selecting the rotation method of the rotating body, it becomes possible to select and design the distribution pattern of the game balls to the first passage and the second passage from various patterns. It is also possible to adjust the distribution ratio between the first passage and the second passage.

[Appendix I8]
The gaming machine according to appendix I7, wherein the rotating body (382D) is freely rotatable in the first direction and the second direction.

[Appendix I9]
The allocating portion (38C) is in a first direction for moving the game ball toward the first passage (351) and in a direction opposite to the first direction, and toward the second passage (352). The gaming machine according to appendix I1, wherein the gaming machine is a roller fixed so as to be freely rotatable in a second direction for moving the game ball.

  In the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note I8 and Supplementary Note I9, a rotating body such as a roller that can freely rotate is adopted as the allocating unit, and even with this rotating body, incidental elements such as a collision position of a game ball against the rotating body Determined by. Therefore, game balls are randomly distributed to the first passage and the second passage by accidental elements, so that the monotony of the game can be reduced and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Appendix J1]
A first winning opening (314, 314R, 313 ′) that allows game balls to enter;
A second winning opening (315) that allows a game ball to enter and has a function different from that of the first winning opening (314, 314R, 313 ′);
Restricting the entry of game balls into one of the first winning ports (314, 314R, 313 ′) and the second winning port (315); and A first position (standby position) that allows a game ball to enter the other winning opening (315) different from the one winning opening (314, 314R), and the one winning opening (314, 314R, 313 ′) ) And a movable accessory member operable between a second position (operating position) that allows the game ball to enter the other winning port (315) and restricts the game ball from entering the other winning port (315). 36, 36R, 36S)
A gaming machine comprising:

  In the gaming machine according to appendix J1, game balls are allowed to enter one of the first winning port and the second winning port depending on whether or not the movable accessory member is activated. The game ball is restricted from entering the other winning port, and the game ball entering the other winning port is restricted while the game ball is restricted from entering the other winning port. One of the allowable states is realized. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the supplementary note J1, the movable accessory member not only allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the one winning opening, but also the entry of the gaming ball into the other winning opening. Allow or limit at the same time. Thereby, the monotonousness of a game can be reduced and a highly interesting game machine having new game characteristics according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member can be provided.

[Appendix J2]
The movable accessory member (36)
In the first position (standby position), the first winning port (314R, 313 ′) is in the open state, and in the second position (operating position), the first winning port (314R, 313 ′) is in the closed state. An opening and closing part (362)
Continuing from the opening / closing part (362), the movement of the game ball on the right side of the first prize opening to the opening / closing part (362) is restricted at the first position (standby position), and the second position ( A guide portion (363) that allows movement of the game ball on the right side of the first winning opening toward the opening / closing portion (362) in the operating position);
The gaming machine according to appendix J1, characterized by having:

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix J2, a movable accessory member having an opening / closing portion capable of opening / closing the first winning opening and a guide portion for moving a game ball on the right side of the first winning opening toward the opening / closing portion is provided. With a simple configuration, it is possible to permit or restrict the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and allow or restrict the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening by the movable accessory member.

[Appendix J3]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). And further comprising a sorting device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
The opening / closing part (362)
In the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the first winning opening (314R, 313 ′), whereas the second winning is Restrict entry to the mouth (315),
In the second position (actuated position), the game balls that have passed through the second passage (352) are restricted from entering the second winning port (314R, 313 ′), whereas the second prize is Allow entry into the mouth (315),
The guide portion is
In the first position (standby position), the movement of the game ball launched into the right region of the game board (31) toward the opening / closing part (362) is restricted, and in the second position (operation position), the game board The gaming machine according to appendix J2, wherein the gaming ball launched into the right region of (31) is allowed to move toward the opening / closing part (362).

  In the gaming machine according to attachment J3, the distribution device distributes the game balls to the first passage and the second passage, the distribution device distributes the game balls to the second passage, and the game balls are operated by the movable accessory member. Depending on whether or not there is a game ball, the game ball is allowed or restricted to enter the first winning port and the second winning port. Then, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J3, the game device to the first winning opening of the game balls distributed to the second passage by the movable accessory member by the cooperation of the distribution device and the movable accessory member. The admission or restriction of entering the ball and the admission or restriction of entering the game ball into the second winning opening are performed simultaneously. Thereby, in the gaming machine adopting the distribution device, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine that reduces the monotony of the game and has new gaming characteristics according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix J4]
The movable accessory member (36R) includes a first portion (361R) for allowing a game ball to enter the second winning port (315) from the left of the second winning port (315), and the second winning port. The game machine according to appendix J1, further comprising: a second portion (362R) for allowing a game ball to enter the second winning opening (315) from the right side of (315).

  In the gaming machine according to attachment J4, the movable accessory member moves the game ball from the left side of the second prize opening and the first part for allowing the game ball to enter the second prize slot from the left side of the second prize slot. And a second portion for entering the winning prize opening. Thereby, by the simple structure of providing the first part and the second part on the movable accessory member, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening, and the second winning opening. It is possible to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into the game at the same time.

[Appendix J5]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). And further comprising a sorting device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
The movable accessory member (36R)
Allowing the game ball passing through the second passage to enter the first start port (314) at the first position (standby position);
In the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows a game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) to enter the second winning opening (352), and The gaming machine according to appendix J4, wherein the portion (362R) allows a gaming ball launched into the right region of the gaming board (31) to enter the second winning opening (352).

  In the gaming machine according to attachment J5, the first portion of the movable accessory member enables the game ball in the second passage of the sorting apparatus to enter the second winning opening. Thereby, in the gaming machine adopting the distribution device, the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening by the movable accessory member by a simple configuration in which the first portion and the second portion are provided on the movable accessory member. Allowance or restriction, and allowance or restriction of game balls entering the second prize opening can be performed simultaneously.

[Appendix J6]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R), and allows the game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315). It further has a penetration part (363R),
The game according to appendix J4 or appendix J5, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined so as to become lower toward the penetrating portion (363R). Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix F6, both the game ball in the second passage and the game ball in the right region are provided by a simple configuration in which a through portion is provided between the first portion and the second portion having different inclination states. It is possible to move to the penetrating part and enter a specific winning opening.

[Appendix J7]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S),
The first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) are close to each other at the first position (standby position), and at the second position (actuation position). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J1, characterized in that the leading ends of are spaced apart.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment J7, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member can allow or restrict the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and allow or restrict the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening simultaneously.

[Appendix J8]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). And further comprising a sorting device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passage (352), and is in the first position (standby position). The game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) interferes to move the game ball toward the first winning opening (314), and the second passage (352) is moved in the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to appendix J7, wherein the gaming ball is moved toward the second winning port (315) by the interference of the passing gaming ball.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment J8, the game balls are distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to the second passage by the distribution device as the first movable combination as a movable combination member. Depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are activated, entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and the second winning opening is permitted or restricted. Then, in the gaming machine according to Appendix J8, the game device to the first winning opening of the game balls distributed to the second passage by the movable accessory member by the cooperation of the sorting device and the movable accessory member. The admission or restriction of entering the ball and the admission or restriction of entering the game ball into the second winning opening are performed simultaneously. Thereby, in the gaming machine adopting the distribution device, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine that reduces the monotony of the game and has new gaming characteristics according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix J9]
A first detection means (318) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the first specific area (352) through which the game ball launched into the left area of the game board can pass;
The movable accessory member (36) is moved from the first position (standby position) to the second position (operating position) when the passage of the game ball is detected by the first detection means (318). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J1 to I8, wherein the gaming machine is operated.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note J9, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the first detection means, the game ball is allowed to enter the second winning opening by the movable accessory member. As a result, the movable accessory member can make the game ball launched in the left area of the game board enter the second prize opening.

[Appendix J10]
A second detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second specific area through which the game ball launched into the right area of the game board can pass;
The movable accessory member (36) is moved from the first position (standby position) to the second position (actuated position) when the passage of the game ball is detected by the second detection means (319). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J1 to I9, wherein the gaming machine is operated.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note J10, when the passing of the game ball is detected by the second detection means, the movable ball member allows the game ball to enter the second winning opening. As a result, the movable accessory member can make the game ball launched in the right region of the game board win a prize in the second winning opening.

[Appendix J11]
Whether the first winning port (314R, 314) is shifted to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed by entering a game ball is determined. It will give you an opportunity to make a special decision (a jackpot lottery)
A second special determination is made as to whether or not the second winning port (315) is shifted to a special game state (a jackpot game state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (a jackpot game) is executed by entering a game ball. It gives an opportunity to do a (big hit lottery)
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game that is more advantageous to the player than the first special game,
The gaming machine according to any one of appendix J1 to appendix J10, wherein the second special determination has a higher expectation level to obtain a determination result of shifting to the second special game than the first special determination. .

[Appendix J12]
The first winning opening (313 ′) is a general winning opening, and the second winning opening (315) is a special game state in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed by entering a game ball. It gives the opportunity to make a special decision (big hit lottery) whether or not to shift to (big hit gaming state)
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes J1 to J10, wherein:

[Appendix K1]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). A distribution device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by:
A first prize opening that allows game balls to enter;
A first winning opening (314) capable of entering a game ball that has passed through the first passage (351) or the second passage (352);
A game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter, and a second winning port having a function different from that of the first winning port,
A first position (standby position) that restricts the entry of game balls into the second winning opening (315) and a second position (operation that allows the entry of game balls into the second winning opening (315)) A movable accessory member (36S to 36X) operable between
A gap through which a game ball can pass is formed between the second prize opening (315) and the game ball launched to the right area of the game board (31) is directed toward the second prize opening (315). A guiding part (31M ′) to be moved;
With
The movable accessory member (36S to 36X)
At the first position (standby position), the second winning opening (315) is closed, and the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) and the right side of the game board (31) are launched. Limiting the entry of game balls into the second prize opening (315),
In the second position (operating position), the second winning opening (315) is opened, and a path for a game ball is formed between the guiding portion (31M ′) and the second winning opening (315). A gaming machine that allows a game ball launched into the right region to enter the second winning port (315).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K1, when the movable accessory member is in the second position, a path of the game ball is formed between the guiding portion and the second winning opening, so that the second path of the distribution device is Not only the passing game ball but also the game ball launched into the right area of the game board can be entered into the second winning opening by the movable accessory member. Therefore, it becomes possible to allow a game ball to enter the second winning opening from a plurality of routes by one movable accessory member. Thereby, an amusing gaming machine having new gaming properties can be provided.

[Appendix K2]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S),
The first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) are close to each other at the first position (standby position), and at the second position (actuation position). The gaming machine according to appendix K1, characterized in that the tips of the are spaced apart.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K2, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member can allow or restrict the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and allow or restrict the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening simultaneously.

[Appendix K3]
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passage (352), and is in the first position (standby position). The game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) interferes to move the game ball toward the first winning opening (314), and the second passage (352) is moved in the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to appendix K2, wherein the gaming ball is moved toward the second winning opening (315) by the interference of the passing gaming ball.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix K3, the game balls are distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to the second passage by the distribution device as the first movable accessory as a movable accessory member. Depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are activated, entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and the second winning opening is permitted or restricted. In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K3, the game device to the first winning opening of the game balls distributed to the second passage by the movable accessory member by the cooperation of the sorting device and the movable accessory member. The admission or restriction of entering the ball and the admission or restriction of entering the game ball into the second winning opening are performed simultaneously. Thereby, in the gaming machine adopting the distribution device, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine that reduces the monotony of the game and has new gaming characteristics according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix K4]
The movable accessory member (36T) is slidable between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position),
The first position (standby position) is a position for closing the second winning opening (315) and opening the gap,
The gaming machine according to appendix K1, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K4, the movable accessory member is slid in a first position where the second prize opening is closed and a second position where the gap between the guide portion and the second prize opening is closed. A single movable accessory member allows a game ball to enter the second winning opening from a plurality of paths.

[Appendix K5]
The movable accessory member (36U, 36V) is operable between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) by rotation,
The first position (standby position) is a position for closing the second winning opening (315) and opening the gap,
The gaming machine according to appendix K1, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is opened and the gap is closed.

[Appendix K6]
The game machine according to appendix K5, wherein the movable accessory member (36U) is rotatable about a rotation axis extending in a direction along the game board (31).

[Appendix K7]
The game machine according to appendix K5, wherein the movable accessory member (36V) is rotatable around a rotation axis extending in a direction intersecting the game board (31).

  In the gaming machines according to appendix K5 to appendix K7, the movable accessory member is horizontally disposed between the first position where the second winning opening is closed and the second position where the gap between the guiding portion and the second winning opening is closed. With the simple configuration of rotating the game ball, it is possible to allow the game ball to enter the second winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member.

[Appendix K8]
The gaming machine according to appendix K7, wherein the rotating body (36V) can be stopped in an upright state at the second start port (315) and a third position (standby position) that opens the gap.

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K8, the game ball in the right region of the sorting device is movable in the gaming state (mode A to mode C) in which the movable accessory member is opened for a short time without providing a retraction guide. It can prevent being guided to the 2nd starting opening by the accessory member.

[Appendix K9]
The movable accessory member (36W) is rotatable, and the second starting port (315) and a closing part (364W) capable of closing the gap, and the second starting port (315) and the gap are opened. With a possible penetration (363W)
The first position (standby position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is closed by the closing portion (364W) and the gap is opened by the through hole (363W).
The second position (operating position) is a position where the second winning opening (315) is opened by the through hole (363W) and the gap is closed by the closing portion (364W). The gaming machine according to appendix K1.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note K9, the game ball is inserted into the second winning opening from the plurality of paths by one movable accessory member by a simple configuration in which the movable accessory member having the closing portion and the penetrating portion is rotated. It becomes possible.

[Appendix K10]
The movable accessory member (36X) rotates around a rotation axis extending in a direction inclined with respect to a horizontal direction between the first position (standby position) and the second position (operating position) in the gap. Is a possible rotating body,
The rotating body (36X)
A first penetrating part (361X) that penetrates along a direction orthogonal to the rotation axis and allows a game ball to pass through, and a direction that intersects the first penetrating part (361X) in the direction of the rotation axis, A second penetrating part (362X) through which a sphere can pass,
The first position (standby position) is a position where the game ball is dropped in the gap by the second penetration part (362X),
The gaming machine according to appendix K1, wherein the second position (operating position) is a position at which the first penetrating portion (361X) communicates with the second starting port (315).

  In the gaming machine according to supplementary note K10, a simple structure in which the rotating body is rotated between the second winning opening and the guiding portion, and a single moving accessory member inserts a game ball into the second winning opening from a plurality of paths. It becomes possible to make a ball.

[Appendix K11]
A game ball that moves the movable accessory member (36T to 36X) toward the second winning opening (315) when the movable accessory member (36T to 36X) is in the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes K4 to K10, further comprising a guard portion (31B) that prevents the second winning opening (315) from exceeding.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment K11, by providing the guard portion, when the movable accessory member is at the second position, the game ball that moves the movable accessory member toward the second starting port is surely received in the second prize. The ball can enter the mouth.

[Appendix L1]
A plurality of winning holes (314, 315) that allow game balls to enter;
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution part (38), and is launched into the left region of the game board (31) and introduced from the introduction port (350). A distribution device (35) for distributing the game balls to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352) by the distribution portion (38);
A first position (standby position) that restricts the entry of game balls into the second prize opening (315) and a second position (operation that allows the game balls to enter into the second prize opening (314R)) A movable accessory member (36) operable between the position) and
First detection means (318) for detecting that a game ball has passed through the second passage (352);
Second detection means (319) for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board (31);
Further comprising
The movable accessory member (36)
When the passing of the game ball is detected by the first detecting means (318) or the second detecting means (319), the first position (standby position) is moved to the second position (operating position). ,
When in the second position, the game ball passing through the second passage (352) and the game ball passing through the specific area are allowed to enter the specific winning opening (315). A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine according to appendix L1, not only the game balls passing through the second passage of the sorting apparatus but also the game balls launched into the right area of the game board enter the specific winning opening by the movable accessory member. Can be made. Therefore, it becomes possible to enter a game ball into a specific winning opening from a plurality of paths by one movable accessory member. Thereby, an amusing gaming machine having new gaming properties can be provided.

[Appendix L2]
The movable accessory member (36) is characterized in that the operation time when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied is longer than the operation time when the first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine according to L1.

[Appendix L3]
The right region so that the second detecting means (319) detects the passing of the game ball when the first detecting means (318) detects the passing of the game ball so that the passing of the game ball is detected. The first game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball is launched in the first time, and the game ball is launched into the right region so that the second detection means (319) detects the passage of the game ball. A game between a plurality of game states including a second game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with a case where a game ball is launched into the left region so that the passage of the game ball is detected by one detection means (318). It further comprises a game state transition means (41) for transitioning the state,
The first condition is that the first gaming state (mode A, mode C),
The gaming machine according to appendix L2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state (mode E).

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note L2 and Supplementary Note L3, it is easy to enter a game ball into a specific winning opening by the movable accessory member when the first condition is satisfied and when the second condition is satisfied. Are different. For example, the operation time of the movable accessory member varies depending on the game state (an advantageous launch position). Therefore, when the first condition is satisfied, it is determined that the movable ball member has been operated, and the game ball launched into the right region is difficult to enter a specific winning opening. It becomes possible to set the ease of playing a game ball to a specific winning opening. This makes it a disadvantage to the player when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), thus promoting left-handed in situations where left-handed is encouraged It becomes possible to do.

[Appendix L4]
The specific winning opening (315) is configured so that the time required for the game ball detected by the second detecting means (319) to enter the specific winning opening (315) is the first detecting means (318). The gaming machine according to appendix L3, characterized in that the gaming ball detected by (1) is arranged at a position longer than a time required for entering the specific winning port (315).

  According to the gaming machine according to attachment L4, the time required for the game ball detected by the first detection means to enter the specific winning opening, and the game ball detected by the second detection means are the specific winning opening. The time required to enter the ball is different. Therefore, for example, a game ball launched into the left area of the game board can enter a specific winning opening, while a game ball launched into the right area makes it difficult to enter a specific winning opening. Is possible. This makes it a disadvantage to the player when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), thus promoting left-handed in situations where left-handed is encouraged It becomes possible to do.

[Appendix L5]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the first gaming state (mode A, mode C) is that the gaming ball detected by the first detecting means (318) is the specific winning opening. (315) is allowed to enter the ball, and it is a time to limit the game ball detected by the second detection means (319) from entering the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to supplementary note L3 or supplementary note L4, which is characterized.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L5, it is possible to appropriately limit a game ball from entering a specific winning opening when a right hand is made in the first gaming state in which a left hand is encouraged. Therefore, when making a right strike in a situation where left-handed is encouraged (for example, in the first gaming state), the situation is disadvantageous to the player. It becomes possible.

[Appendix L6]
The operating time of the movable accessory member (36) in the second gaming state (mode E) is that the gaming ball detected by the second detecting means (319) is the specific winning opening (315). The gaming machine according to any one of appendix L3 to appendix L5, characterized in that it is a time during which the ball is allowed to enter.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L6, it is possible to make a game ball enter a specific winning opening by making a right turn in the second gaming state. Therefore, by making a right turn in the second gaming state, it is possible to advance the game with almost no increase or decrease in the number of game balls.

[Appendix L7]
The movable accessory member (36)
In the first position (standby position), the first winning port (314R, 313 ′) is in the open state, and in the second position (operating position), the first winning port (314R, 313 ′) is in the closed state. An opening and closing part (362)
Continuing from the opening / closing part (362), the movement of the game ball on the right side of the first prize opening to the opening / closing part (362) is restricted at the first position (standby position), and the second position ( A guide portion (363) that allows movement of the game ball on the right side of the first winning opening toward the opening / closing portion (362) in the operating position);
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note L1 to Supplementary Note L6, comprising:

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L7, a movable accessory member having an opening / closing portion capable of opening / closing the first winning opening and a guide portion for moving a game ball on the right side of the first winning opening toward the opening / closing portion is provided. With a simple configuration, it is possible to permit or restrict the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and allow or restrict the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening by the movable accessory member.

[Appendix L8]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). And further comprising a sorting device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
The opening / closing part (362)
In the first position (standby position), the game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) is allowed to enter the first winning opening (314R, 313 ′), whereas the second winning is Restrict entry to the mouth (315),
In the second position (actuated position), the game balls that have passed through the second passage (352) are restricted from entering the second winning port (314R, 313 ′), whereas the second prize is Allow entry into the mouth (315),
The guide portion is
In the first position (standby position), the movement of the game ball launched into the right region of the game board (31) toward the opening / closing part (362) is restricted, and in the second position (operation position), the game board The gaming machine according to appendix L7, wherein the gaming ball launched into the right region of (31) is allowed to move toward the opening / closing part (362).

  In the gaming machine according to attachment L8, the distribution device distributes the game balls to the first passage and the second passage, the distribution device distributes the game balls to the second passage, and the game balls are operated by the movable accessory member. Depending on whether or not there is a game ball, the game ball is allowed or restricted to enter the first winning port and the second winning port. Then, in the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L8, the allocating device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other, so that the gaming balls distributed to the second passage by the movable accessory member to the first winning opening The admission or restriction of entering the ball and the admission or restriction of entering the game ball into the second winning opening are performed simultaneously. Thereby, in the gaming machine adopting the distribution device, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine that reduces the monotony of the game and has new gaming characteristics according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

[Appendix L9]
The movable accessory member (36R) includes a first portion (361R) for allowing a game ball to enter the second winning port (315) from the left of the second winning port (315), and the second winning port. A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note L1 to Supplementary Note L6, comprising a second portion (362R) that causes a game ball to enter the second winning opening (315) from the right side of (315) .

  In the gaming machine according to attachment L9, the movable accessory member moves the game ball from the left side of the second prize opening and the first part for entering the game ball from the left side of the second prize slot and the game ball from the right side of the second prize port. And a second portion for entering the winning prize opening. Thereby, by the simple structure of providing the first part and the second part on the movable accessory member, the movable accessory member allows or restricts the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening, and the second winning opening. It is possible to allow or restrict the entry of game balls into the game at the same time.

[Appendix L10]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). And further comprising a sorting device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
The movable accessory member (36R)
Allowing the game ball passing through the second passage to enter the first start port (314) at the first position (standby position);
In the second position (operating position), the first portion (361R) allows a game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) to enter the second winning opening (352), and The gaming machine according to appendix L9, wherein the portion (362R) allows a gaming ball launched into the right region of the gaming board (31) to enter the second winning opening (352).

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L10, the first portion of the movable accessory member allows the game ball in the second passage of the sorting apparatus to enter the second winning opening. Thereby, in the gaming machine adopting the distribution device, the game ball is inserted into the first winning opening by the movable accessory member by a simple configuration in which the first portion and the second portion are provided on the movable accessory member. Allowance or restriction, and allowance or restriction of game balls entering the second prize opening can be performed simultaneously.

[Appendix L11]
The movable accessory member (36R) is provided between the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R), and allows the game ball to enter the specific winning opening (315). It further has a penetration part (363R),
The game according to appendix L9 or appendix L10, wherein the first portion (361R) and the second portion (362R) are inclined so as to become lower toward the penetrating portion (363R). Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to appendix L11, both the game ball in the second passage and the game ball in the right region are provided by a simple configuration in which a through portion is provided between the first portion and the second portion having different inclination states. It is possible to move to the penetrating part and enter a specific winning opening.

[Appendix L12]
The movable accessory member (36S) includes a rotatable first movable accessory member (3681S) and a second movable accessory member (3682S),
The first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) are close to each other at the first position (standby position), and at the second position (actuation position). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note L1 to Supplementary Note L6, characterized in that the tip ends of the two are separated.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note L12, the movable accessory member is configured as a so-called electric tulip. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the movable accessory member can allow or restrict the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and allow or restrict the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening simultaneously.

[Appendix L13]
It has an introduction port (350), a first passage (351), a second passage (352), and a distribution unit (38), and the game ball introduced from the introduction port (350) is transferred to the distribution unit (38). And further comprising a sorting device (35) that distributes to either the first passage (351) or the second passage (352),
One of the first movable accessory member (3681S) and the second movable accessory member (3682S) is provided below the second passage (352), and is in the first position (standby position). The game ball that has passed through the second passage (352) interferes to move the game ball toward the first winning opening (314), and the second passage (352) is moved in the second position (operating position). The gaming machine according to attachment L12, wherein the gaming ball is moved toward the second winning opening (315) by the interference of the passing gaming ball.

  In the gaming machine according to attachment L13, the game balls are distributed to the first passage and the second passage by the distribution device, and the game balls are distributed to the second passage by the distribution device as the first movable accessory as a movable accessory member. Depending on whether or not the member and the second movable accessory member are activated, entry of the game ball into the first winning opening and the second winning opening is permitted or restricted. In the gaming machine according to attachment L13, the sorting device and the movable accessory member cooperate with each other, so that the gaming balls distributed to the second passage by the movable accessory member are directed to the first winning opening. The admission or restriction of entering the ball and the admission or restriction of entering the game ball into the second winning opening are performed simultaneously. Thereby, in the gaming machine adopting the distribution device, it is possible to provide a highly interesting gaming machine that reduces the monotony of the game and has new gaming characteristics according to the control mode of the operation of the movable accessory member.

10: gaming machine 31: gaming board 31B: guard nail 314: first starting port 314L: left first starting port 314R: right first starting port 315: second starting port 316: variable winning device 316b: variable winning port 318: First through gate 319: second through gate 35, 35A, 35B, 35C, 35D, 35E, 35F: distribution device 351: first passage 352: second passage 36, 36A to 36R, 36T to 36X: electric support member 36S: Electric tulip accessory device 3681S: Left wing member 3682S: Right wing member 361X: First through part 362X: Second through part 361X ', 362X': Through hole 362: Opening / closing part 363; Guide part 363W: Through hole 363W ': Penetrating portion 364W: closing portions 364, 364A, 364B: delay guide 364C: meandering grooves 364D-364G: linear convex portion 364H: Concave portions 364OI to 364N: convex portions 364O, 364P: concave portions 364Q: rollers 371: first special symbol display 372: second special symbol indicator 373: normal symbol indicator 374: reserved number indicators 38, 38A, 38B: Distribution member 38C: Roller 38D: Windmill 381D: Nail 382D: Rotating body 38E: Mountain-shaped fixing part 38F: Triangular nail 389F: Apex nail 393, 394: Retraction guide nail 41: MPU
82: Special variable winning device 824: V winning opening 824
83: Feather equipment 833: V prize opening 99: Game ball

Claims (8)

A distribution device that has an introduction port, a first passage, a second passage, and a distribution unit, and distributes game balls introduced from the introduction port to either the first passage or the second passage by the distribution unit When,
A first winning opening through which the game balls distributed in the first passage can enter;
A game ball distributed to the second passage is capable of entering, and a second winning port having a function different from that of the first winning port,
Detecting means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the second passage;
A first position where a ball that has passed through the second passage is restricted from entering the second winning opening when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through the second passage. A movable accessory member that operates to a second position in which a game ball that has passed through the second passage is allowed to enter the second winning opening;
A gaming machine comprising:   2. The movable operating member according to claim 1, wherein the operating time when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied is longer than the operating time when the first condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described. It further comprises other detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the right area of the game board,
Compared to launching a game ball in the right area so that the passing of the game ball is detected by the other detection means so that the game ball is launched in the left area so that the detection means detects the passage of the game ball Thus, the detection means detects the passage of the game ball in the right region so that the first game state advantageous to the player and the passage of the game ball are detected by the other detection means. And a game state transition means for shifting the game state between a plurality of game states including a second game state that is advantageous to the player as compared with a case where a game ball is launched into the left region.
The first condition is that the first gaming state,
The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the second condition is the second gaming state.   The second prize opening is the time required for the game ball detected by the other detection means to enter the second prize opening. The game ball detected by the detection means is at the second prize opening. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the gaming machine is disposed at a position longer than a time required for entering the ball. The operation time of the movable accessory member in the first gaming state allows the game ball detected by the detection means to enter the second winning opening, and the other detection means. Is a time for restricting the game ball detected by the player from entering the second winning opening,
The operation time of the movable accessory member in the second gaming state is a time that allows the game ball detected by the other detection means to enter the second winning opening. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 3 to 5, characterized in that: A guide unit that forms a gap that allows a game ball to pass between the second prize opening and moves the game ball that has been launched to the right area of the game board toward the second prize opening;
Further comprising
The movable accessory member is:
In the first position, the second prize opening is closed, and the game balls that have passed through the second passage and the game balls that have been launched in the right area of the game board are entered into the second prize opening. Limit
In the second position, the second winning opening is opened, and a game ball passage is formed between the guiding portion and the second winning opening, the gaming ball passing through the second passage, and The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein a gaming ball launched into a right region is allowed to enter the second winning opening. The movable accessory member is slidable between the first position and the second position,
The first position is a position for closing the second prize opening and opening the gap,
The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the second position is a position where the second winning opening is opened and the gap is closed. The movable accessory member is operable between the first position and the second position by rotation;
The first position is a position for closing the second prize opening and opening the gap,
The gaming machine according to claim 6, wherein the second position is a position where the second winning opening is opened and the gap is closed.

Images